advertisement
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT AND
GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LISTS
FOR
GENERATOR, SIGNAL SG-1122/U
(HEWLETT-PACKARD MODEL 8443A and 8443B)
(NSN 6625-00-155-5990)
This copy is a reprint which includes current pages from Changes 1 through 3.
H E A D Q U A R T E R S , D E P A R T M E N T O F T H E A R M Y
16 OCTOBER 1981
Remove the power cord from the Model 8443A/B before removing the board.
Voltages are still present when the instrument is placed in standby. Voltages are present in this instrument, when energized, which can cause death on contact.
NOTE
Users of this manual are advised to consult Section VII and Appendix B which contains errors and changes in text and illustrations. The user should correct the errors and perform the changes as indicated and needed.
}
No. 3
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
C3
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, DC.
1 January 1989
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT, AND GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SIGNAL GENERATOR SG-1 122/U
(NSN 6625-00-155-5990)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P, 16 October 1981, is changed as follows:
1.
Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification number.
Remove pages
C-5/(C-6 blank)
Insert pages
2.
File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.
Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and DOD contractors only for official use or for administration or operational purposes. This determination was made on 5 July 1988. Other requests for this document will be referred to Commander, US Army
Communications-Electronics Command and Fort Monmouth, ATTN:
AMSEL-LC-ME-P, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5000.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE-Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
WILLIAM J. MEEHAN II
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-36 Operator, Unit, and DS/GS requirements for SG-1122/U.
CHANGE
No. 2
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
C2
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 1 June 1987
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT
SUPPORT, AND GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SIGNAL GENERATOE SG-1122/U
(NSN 6625-00-155-5990)
TM I1-6625-2858-14&P, 16 October 1981, is changed as follows:
1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification number.
Remove pages Insert pages
2.
C-1 through C-6.......................................C-1 through C-5/(C-6 blank)
File this change sheet in the front of the publication for reference purposes.
Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and DOD contractors only for official use or for administration or operational purposes. This determination was mode on 17 February 1987. Other requests for this document will be referred to Commander, US Army
Communications-Electronics Command and Fort Monmouth, ATTN:
AMSEL-ME-P, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5000.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE-Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
R.L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.
General, United States Army
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-36 literature requirements for SG-1122/U.
Chief of Staff
CHANGE
No. 1
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
C1
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 1 January 1987
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT
SUPPORT, AND GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SIGNAL GENERATOR SG-1 122/U
(NSN 6625-00-155-5990)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P, 16 October 1981, is changed as follows:
1.
Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page. Added or revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification number.
Remove pages Insert pages
a and b ....................................................a and b i and ii ......................................................i and ii
0-1 and 1-0 ..............................................0-1 and 1-0
A- /(A-2 blank) .........................................A-/(A-2 blank)
B-I through B-4 ........................................B-l through B-43/(B-44 blank)
2.
File this change sheet in the front of the publication for reference purposes.
This publication Is required for official use or for administrative or operational purposes only. Distribution is limited to US Government
Agencies. Other requests for this document must be referred to
Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics Command and Fort
Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-ME-P, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5000.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
R.L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-36 literature requirements for SG-1122/U.
a
TRACKING GENERATOR/COUNTER
8443A
Serial Numbers Prefixed: 955-, 964-,
1049A, 1145A, 1217A
This manual applies directly to HP Model 8443A
Tracking Generator/Counters having the serial number prefixes listed above.
NOTE
For Tracking Generator/Counters having serial number prefix 1145A and below, see
Section VII, Manual Changes.
NOTE
For Tracking Generator/Counters having serial number prefix 1217A00786 and above, see Appendix B, Difference Data Sheets.
TRACKING GENERATOR
8443B
Serial Numbers Prefixed: 0973A, 1142A,
1228A
This manual applies directly to HP Model 8443B
Tracking Generators having the serial number prefixes listed above.
NOTE
For Tracking Generators having serial number prefix 1142A and below, see Section
VII, Manual Changes.
NOTE
For Tracking Generators having serial number prefix 1228A00151 and above, see
Appendix B, Difference Data Sheets.
Manual Part Number: 08443-90028
Supplement Part Number: 08443-90030
Microfiche Part Number: 08443-90029
Change 1 b
Printed: APRIL 1972
CERTIFICATION
The Hewlett-Packars Company certifies that this instrument was thoroughly tested and inspected and found to meet its published specifications when it was shipped from the factory. The Hewlett-Packard Company further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the U.S. National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by the Bureau’s calibration facilities, or to the calibration facilities of other
International Standards Organization members.
WARRANTY AND ASSISTANCE
This Hewlett-Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship. This warranty applies for one year from the date of delivery. Hewlett-
Packard will repair or replace products which prove to be defective during the warranty period provided they are returned to Hewlett-Packard. No other warranty is expressed or implied. We are not liable for consequential damages. Service contracts or customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett-Packard products that require maintenance and repair on-site. For any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-
Packard Sales and Service Office. Addresses are provided at the back of this manual.
c (d blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
This Manual includes copyright material reproduced by permission of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Technical Manual
No. 11-6625-2858-14&P
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, DC, 16 October 1981
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT
SUPPORT, AND GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR
SIGNAL GENERATOR SG-1122/U
(NSN 6625-00-155-5990)
REPORTING OF ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter, DA Form 2028
(Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), or DA Form 2028-2 located in the back of this manual direct to: Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics
Command and Fort Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-ME-MP, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5000.
A reply will be furnished to you.
Section
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION
Maintenance Forms, Records and Reports .................................................0-1
Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIR) ....................0-1
Destruction of Army Electronics Materiel.....................................................0-1
This manual is an authentication of the manufacturer’s commercial literature which, through usage, has been found to cover the data required to operate and maintain this equipment. Since the manual was not prepared in accordance with military specifications and AR 310-3, the format has not been structured to consider levels of maintenance.
Change 1 i
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page Section Page
2-6. Claims for Damage ........................................... 2-1
2-10. Power Requirements ........................................ 2-1 4-1. Introduction
3-13. Operator’s Maintenance.................................... 3-1
ii
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
Page
Models 8443A Tracking Generator/Counter,
8443B Tracking Generator, and Accessories ... 1-0
Instrument Identification ......................................... 1-1
Service Kit Required for Maintenance .................... 1-6
Tracking Generator/Counter Controls,
Connectors and Indicators ................................ 3-2
Rear Panel Controls and Connectors ..................... 3-4
Operator’s Checks .................................................. 3-5
Frequency Range Test ........................................... 4-1
Amplitude Range Test Setup.................................. 4-3
Amplitude Accuracy Test ........................................ 4-6
Output Impedance Test Setup................................ 4-7
Time Base Aging Rate Test.................................. 4-10
Counter Input Test Setup ..................................... 4-12
Power Supply Test Setup ....................................... 5-2
First Converter Test Setup ..................................... 5-3
200 MHz IF Test Setup........................................... 5-5
Third Converter Test Setup .................................... 5-6
ALC/Video Amplifier Test Setup ............................. 5-7
Reference Oscillator Test Setup............................. 5-8
Cabinet Parts........................................................ 6-20
Changes for Figure 8-23 (Part of Change I) ........... 7-5
Changes for Figure 8-21 (Part of Change I) ........... 7-6
Model 8443A with Circuit Board Extended
for Maintenance ................................................ 8-1
Basic AND and OR Gates ...................................... 8-5
Basic NAND and NOR Gates ................................. 8-9
Logic Comparison Diagrams ................................ 8-10
Basic NOR Gate Flip-Flop .................................... 8-10
Triggered Flip-Flop ............................................... 8-11
RS Flip-Flop ......................................................... 8-12
RST Flip-Flop ....................................................... 8-13
Clocked JK Flip-Flop ............................................ 8-13
JK Master-Slave Flip-Flop (Typical) ..................... 8-14
16 Counter Binary Counter Chain ........................ 8-15
8421 BCD Decade Counter .................................. 8-16
Blanking Decade Counter .................................... 8-17
Buffer/Store .......................................................... 8-18
Decoder ................................................................ 8-18
Integrated Circuit Packaging ................................ 8-19
Troubleshooting Tree ........................................... 8-20
Figure Page
Chassis Mounted Parts and Assembly
Locations ........................................................ 8-23
Overall Block Diagram ......................................... 8-25
All Second Converter, Cover and
Components ......................................................... 8-26
A13, First Converter, Cover and
Components ................................................... 8-27
A12, 50 MHz Amplifier, Cover and
Components ................................................... 8-27
First and Second Converter and IF Amplifier,
Schematic Diagram ........................................ 8-27
A8, ALC Video Amplifier....................................... 8-29
A9, Third Converter Assembly ............................. 8-29
A10, Bandpass Filter Assembly ........................... 8-29
200 MHz IF Amplifier Assembly, Third
Converter, ALC/Video Amplifier and
Attenuator, Schematic Diagram ...................... 8-29
A14, Sense Amplifier Assembly, Components ..... 8-31
A15, Rectifier Assembly, Components ................. 8-31
Power Supplies and Regulators,
Schematic Diagram ........................................ 8-31
Counter Section Logic Diagram ........................... 8-33
A7, Marker Control Assembly,
Cover and Components .................................. 8-35
Marker Control Circuit, Schematic Diagram ......... 8-35
A5, Time Base Assembly,
Cover and Components .................................. 8-37
Time Base Circuit Schematic Diagram ................ 8-37
A6, High Frequency Decade Assembly,
Cover and Components .................................. 8-39
High Frequency Decade Assembly,
Schematic Diagram ........................................ 8-39
A1A1, Low Frequency Counter Board
Assembly, Components .................................. 8-41
Low Frequency Counter Circuit,
Schematic Diagram ........................................ 8-41
A1, Low Frequency Counter Assembly
Components ................................................... 8-43
A1A2, Fan Motor Assembly, Components ........... 8-43
Fan Motor Circuits, Schematic Diagram .............. 8-43
Overall Wiring Diagram, Inclu ding Chassis
Mounted Parts ................................................ 8-44
A16, Switch Assembly (8443A) ............................ 8-44
iii
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page Table Page
7-1. 8443A Back-Dating Serial Numbers ....................... 7-1
APPENDICES
C. Maintenance Allocation Chart
iv
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Section 0
INTRODUCTION
0-1.
Scope.
This manual contains instructions for the operator, organizational, direct support and general support maintenance manuals for the SG-1122/U Generator,
Signal. Throughout this manual the SG-1122/U is referred to as the 8443A and 8443B.
0-2.
Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms.
know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us what you don’t like about the design. Put it on an SF 368 (Quality Deficiency Report). Mail it to
Commander, US Army Communications-Electronics
Command and Fort Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-PA-MA-
D, Fort Monmouth, New Jersey 07703-5000. We’ll send you a reply.
Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 310-1 to determine whether there are new editions, changes, or additional publications pertaining to the equipment.
0-3.
a. Report of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory
Equipment.
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by DA PAM 738-750 as contained in
Maintenance Management Update.
b. Report of Packaging and Handling Deficiencies.
Fill out and forward SF 364 (Report of Discrepancy
(ROD)) as prescribed in AR 735-11-2/DLAR
4140.55/NAVMATINST 4355.73B/AFR 400-54/MCO
4430.3H.
c. Discrepancy in Shipment Report (DISREP) (SF
361).
Maintenance Forms, Records, and Reports.
Fill out and forward Discrepancy in Shipment
Report (SF 361) as prescribed in AR 55-38/
NAVSUPINST 4610.33C/ AFR 75-18/ MCO P4610.19D/
DLAR 4500.15.
0-4.
Reporting Equipment Improvement
Recommendations (EIR).
If your Signal Generator needs improvement, let us
Change 1 0-1
0-5.
Administrative Storage.
The Generator SG-1122/U can be stored in stockrooms, warehouses or other protected facilities. The equipment should be protected from excessive humidity, sand, dust, and chemical contaminants. Before putting the
SG1122/U into administrative storage, make the following preparations:
a. Perform all Operator’s Checks given in Figure 3-
3 and assure that the unit is completely operable before
storing.
b. If the original packing material is not available,
follow the instructions in paragraph 2-23.
c. Store the equipment indoors, protected from elements. Maintain the equipment at moderate temperatures and humidity.
0-6.
Destruction of Army Electronics Material.
Destruction of Army electronics materiel to prevent enemy use shall be in accordance with TM 750-244-2.
0-7.
Warranty Information.
(See MIL-M-63038B, para 3.2.3.1.8).
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 1-1. Models 8443A Tracking Generator/ Counter, 8443B Tracking Generator, and Accessories.
1-0
Section 1 TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
1-1.
INTRODUCTION
1-2. This manual contains all information required to install, operate, test adjust and service the Hewlettpackard Model 8443A Tracking Generator/ Counter and the Model 8443B Tracking Generator. This section covers instrument identification, description, options, accessories, specifications and other basic information.
1-3. Figure 1-1 shows the 8443A and 8443B with the
supplied accessories.
1-4. The various sections in this manual provide information as follows: a.
SECTION II, INSTALLATION, provides
information relative to incoming inspection, power requirements, mounting, packing and shipping, etc.
b.
SECTION III, OPERATION, provides
information relative to operating the instrument.
c.
SECTION IV, PERFORMANCE TESTS,
provides information required to ascertain that the instrument is performing in accordance with published specificaitons.
d.
SECTION V, ADJUSTMENTS, provides
information required to properly adjust and align the instrument after repairs are made.
e.
SECTION VI, PARTS LISTS, provides
ordering information for all replaceable parts and assemblies.
f.
provides manual back-dating information.
g.
SECTION VIII, SERVICE, includes all
information required to service the instrument.
1-5. INSTRUMENTS COVERED BY MANUAL
1-6. Hewlett-Packard instruments carry a ten digit serial
number (see Figure 1-2) on the back panel. When the
prefix on the serial number plate of your instrument is the same as one of the prefix numbers on the inside title page of this manual, the manual applies directly to the instrument. When the instrument serial number prefix is
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION
not listed on the inside title page of initial issue, manual change sheets and manual up-dating information are provided. Later editions or revisions to the manual will
contain the required change information in Section VII.
1-7.
DESCRIPTION
1-8. The Model 8443A/B was designed to be used in conjunction with the Hewlett-Packard 8553/8552
Spectrum Analyzer. The Tracking Generator provides a
CW signal which tracks the frequency tuning of the spectrum analyzer or restores the Spectrum Analyzer input signal.
1-9. As implied by the instrument name, the Model
8443A also includes a counter section. The counter section may be used to count the output frequency of the tracking generator or the frequency of signals generated by external sources (up to better than 120 MHz). A rear panel connector provides BCD data output from the counter section for use in external equipment such as a recorder.
1-10. The time base for the Model 8443A counter section is a stable oven-contained, crystal-controlled 1
MHz oscillator. Provisions are made to use an external 1
MHz source for the time base if a frequency standard is available. An output from the internal 1 MHz source is also available for use in external equipment if desired.
1-11. The Model 8443A Counter Section may be operated in one of three modes. They are:
Figure 1-2. Instrument Identification
1-1
Section 1 TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Table 1-1. Model 8443A/B Specification
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
Numbered specifications coincide with numbered performance tests in
TRACKING GENERATOR
1.
Frequency Range: 100 kHz to 110 MHz.
(Output frequency tracks the 8553/8552
Spectrum Analyzer tuning.)
2.
Amplitude Range: <-120 dBm to +10 dBm in 10 and 1 dB steps with a continuous 1.2
dB vernier.
3.
Amplitude Accuracy (flatness):
±
0.5 dB.
Output attenuators 10 dB steps
±
0.2 dB, 1 dB steps
±
0.1 dB. Absolute: 0 dBm at 30
MHz ±0.3 dB.
4.
Output Impedance: 50 ohms, AC coupled, reflection coefficient <0.09 (1.2 SWR); output <0 dBm.
*COUNTER
Modes:
Marker: Counter reads frequency at marker position on the Spectrum Analyzer Display.
Scan Hold: Scan starts at left edge of display and stops at marker. Counter measures frequency continually. External:
Counter measures frequency of signal at counter input.
5.
Measurement Range: 100 kHz to 110
MHz. Display; 7 digits with 1 digit overrange.
6.
Resolution (gate time): 1 kHz (1 mS), 100
Hz (10 mS) and 10 Hz (100 mS).
7.
Accuracy: +1 count + time base accuracy.
GENERAL
Temperature Range: Operation 0 to 550C, storage, -40 to +750C. Power: 115 V or 230
V, 48440 Hz, 75 watts. (When the instrument is in standby power consumption is 30 watts.) RFI: Meets or exceeds MIL-I-
6181D.
DIMENSIONS: 18-3/4 L x 16-3/4 W x 3-7’/8 H.
WEIGHT: 24 lbs, 5 oz. (11,02 kg)
* 8443A only
8.
Time Base Aging Rate: <3 x 10-9 per day. (0.3 Hz/day) after warmup.
Function:
Restore Signal: Counter reads frequency of an unknown signal to counter accuracy when marker is placed anywhere on signal response. Typically
15 dB signal-to-noise ratio required for restored operation.
Track Analyzer: RF OUTPUT tracks spectrum analyzer tunging for swept frequency at marker on spectrum analyzer CRT.
External Inputs:
10.
Counter: 10 kHz to 120 MHz, 50 ohms, -
10 dBm minimum, +25 dBm maximum.
11.
Time Base: 1 MHz, 40 ohms, 1 Vrms minimum.
Auxiliary Outputs:
12.
Time Base: 1 MHz, 1 V rms nominal.
13.
Digital Frequency Output: 8,4,2,1, code: positive logic.
9.
Time Base Temperature Drift: <3 x 10-8
(3 Hz) variation, 0 to 55 C.
1-2
Section 1
a. EXTERNAL. For use in measuring frequency of external signals not related to the Model 8443A or the
Spectrum Analyzer.
b. MARKER. In this mode the scan ramp of the
Spectrum Analyzer is stopped momentarily at a point determined by the Model 8443A MARKER POSITION control. At the point where the scan is stopped a bright marker appears on the analyzer display CRT.
Simultaneously, the RF OUTPUT frequency from the
Tracking Generator is counted by the Model 8443A
Counter. If the FUNCTION switch is set to TRACK
ANALYZER, the counter frequency indicates marker frequency, independent of Spectrum Analyzer input signal frequency. If the FUNCTION switch is set to
RESTORE SIGNAL, the counter indicates the Spectrum
Analyzer input signal frequency (as long as the marker is placed on the signal response).
c. SCAN HOLD. in this mode operational sequence is similar to the MARKER mode except that when the scan is stopped it will not restart until the operator changes the mode of operation. The counter will count continually in the SCAN HOLD mode. The marker position may be controlled manually by the
MARKER POSITION control to measure the frequency at any point on the CRT.
1-12. A three-position RESOLUTION control on the
Model 8443A provides counter readouts (in MHz) to accuracies of 10 Hz, 100 Hz and 1 kHz.
1-13. The output of the Model 8443A/B is level (
±
0.5 dB) from 100 kHz to 110 MHz. The output level may be adjusted, by means of three front panel controls, to any level between +10 dBm and -123.2 dBm.
1-14. Complete specifications for the Model 8443A/B
1-15.
COMPATIBILITY
1-16.
Spectrum Analyzer RF Section
1-17. 8553L. The HP Model 8553L that does not have the TG-1 modification installed requires a modification to provide compatibility with the Model 8443B and the
Model 8443A. Modification kit part number is 08553-
6065; after modification, the unit is designated 8553L-
TG-2.
NOTE
The TG labels should be on the rear panel next to the serial number.
1-18. The HP Model 8553L that has the TG-1 modification installed requires an additional modification
1-3
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
to provide compatibility with the Model 8443A with serial numbers prefix 1217A and above. The modification kit part number is 08553-60142; after modification, the unit is designated 8553L-TG-2.
1-19. 8553B. The HP Model 8553B with serial number prefix 1215A and above is fully compatible with the
Model 8443A/B. The Model 8553B with serial number prefix 1144A and below requires a modification to provide compatibility with the Model 8443A with serial number prefix 1217A and above. The modification kit part number is 08553-60142; after modification, the unit is designated 8553B-TG-2.
1-20.
Spectrum Analyzer IF Section
1-21. 8552A. The HP Model 8552A with serial number prefix 1213A and above is fully compatible with the
Model 8443A/B. The Model 8552A with serial number prefix 945and below that does not have the TG-1 modification installed requires a modification to provide compatibility with the Model 8443B and the Model
8443A. The modification kit part number is 08552-6060; after modification, the unit is designated 8552A-TG-2.
1-22. The HP Model 8552A with serial number prefix
1144A and below that has the TG-1 modification installed requires an additional modification to provide compatibility with the Model 8443A with serial number prefix 1217A and above. The modification kit part number is 08552-60159; after modification, the unit is designated 8552A-TG-2.
1-23. 8552B. The HP Model 8552B with serial number prefix 1210A and above is fully compatible with the
Model 8443A/B. The Model 8552B with serial number prefix 1209A and below requires a modification to provide compatibility with the Model 8443A with serial number prefix 1217A and above. The modification kit part number is 08552-60159; after modification, the unit is designated 8552B-TG-2.
1-24.
Spectrum Analyzer Display Section
1-25. Display section models 140A, 140S, 141A and
141S all require HP modification kit number 00140-
69504 to provide compatibility with the Model 8443A/B
1-26. Display section models 140T and 141T are compatible with the Model 8443A/B.
1-27.
ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED
1-28. The following accessories are provided with the
Model 8443A/B:
Section 1
a. An interconnecting cable for use between the
Spectrum Analyzer and the 8443A/B (HP 08443-60009).
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
the 8443A/B BCD output to an HP 5050 Digital Recorder.
b. A power cable (HP 8120-1348).
c. A rack mounting kit (HP 5060-8739).
d. A joining bracket kit (HP 5060-8543).
1-31. WARRANTY
1-32. Certification and Warranty information for the Model 8443A/B appears on the inside front cover of this manual.
1-29.
ACCESSORIES NOT SUPPLIED
1-30. A Service Kit, HP part number 08443-60011 is recommended for maintenance purposes. An HP 562A-
16C Interface Cable can be used to connect
1-33. TEST EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
REQUIRED
1-34. Table 1-2 lists test equipment and accessories
recommended to service the Model 8443A/B.
Table 1-2. Test Equipment and Accessories
Item
Digital Voltmeter
Suggested Model
HP 3480A Digital Voltmeter with
HP 3482A Plug-in
Oscilloscope
Spectrum Analyzer
VHF Signal Generator
Frequency Counter
Tunable RF Voltmeter
Minimum Specifications
Voltage Accuracy: +0.2%
Range Selection: Manual or Automatic
Voltage Range: 1 - 1000 Vdc full scale
Input Impedance: 10 megohms
Polarity: Automatic Indication
Frequency Range: dc to 50 MHz
Time Base: 1 us/div to 10 ms/div
Time Base Accuracy: + 3%
Dual Channel, Alternate Operation
Ac or dc Coupling
External Sweep Mode
Voltage Accuracy: +3%
Sensitivity: 0.020 V/div
Frequency Range: 0 - 100 MHz
Scan Width: 10 MHz
Frequency Range: 40 -455 MHz
Frequency Accuracy: +1%
Output Amplitude: >-20 dBm
Output Impedance: 50 ohms
Frequency Range: 100 kHz - 300
MHz
Accuracy: +0.001%
Sensitivity: 100 mVrms
Readout Digits: 7 digits
Bandwidth: 1 kHz
Frequency Range: 1 - 1000 MHz
Sensitivity: 10 mV - 1 Vrms
Input Impedance:
≥
,0.1 megohms
HP 180A with
HP 1804A Vertical Amplifier and
HP 1821A Horizontal Amplifier
HP 10004 10:1 Divider
HP 10004 10:1 Divider
HP 8443/8552/141S Spectrum Analyzer
HP 608E/F VHF Signal Generator
HP 5245L Frequency
Counter
HP 8405A Vector Voltmeter
1-4
Section 1
Item
Three-Port Mixer
Power Supply
Spectrum Analyzer
Digital to Analog
Converter/Recorder
Recorder
Paper
Amplifier
Quartz Oscillator
Frequency Synthesizer
Attenuator
Standard
RF Amplifier
RF Crystal Detector
Temperature Controlled Oven
Test Oscillator
Digital Recorder
AC Voltmeter
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Table 1-2. Test Equipment and Accessories (cont’d)
Minimum Specifications
Frequency Range: 0.2 - 500 MHz
Impedance: 50 ohms
Connectors: Female BNC on all ports
Input Power: 5 mW nominal
Output Voltage: Variable, 0 - 30 Vdc
Output Current: 0 --400 mA
Meter Resolution: <5 mV
0 - 310 MHz
Suggested Model
HP 10514A Mixer (2)
HP 6217A Power Supply
HP 8554/8552/140 Spectrum
Analyzer
HP 581A Option 01 with
HP 680A
Accuracy: 5% of full scale
Command Pulse:
±
20
µ sec or greater, 6 to 20 volts
Recorder: Response time < 1/2 second or less
Accuracy: Better than 0.2% full scale
Std. 5" roll chart: 50 minor divisions
Frequency Range: dc to 1 MHz
Accuracy:
±
0.3% from dc to 10 kHz
Distortion: <0.01% below 1 kHz
Output Frequencies: 5 MHz, 1 MHz,
100 kHz
Stability: <5 X 10-10 per day
Output Frequency: 100 kHz to 500
MHz
Digital Frequency Selection: 0.1 Hz through 100 MHz per step, 20
µ sec selection time
Range: 120 dB in 10 dB steps
Accuracy:
±
0.01 dB
20 dB or 40 dB gain - 1 kHz to 150
MHz
0.1 MHz to 110 MHz, 50 ohms
HP 9270-1012
HP 467A
HP 105B
HP 5101A/5110B
HP H38-355D
HP 461A
HP 8471A
Adjustable from 0° to +55°C
10 Hz to 10 MHz, 3.16V max into
50
Ω
8-4-2-1 input positive logic
Eight column printout
0.5V to 300 full scale
Frequency Range: 20 Hz to 4 MHz
HP 651B
HP 5050B
HP 400D/E/F/H
1-5
Section 1
Service Kit
Item
Variable Voltage
Transformer
Cable Assembly (4)
Soldering Iron
X-Y Recorder
Attenuator
Standard
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Table 1-2. Test Equipment and Accessories (cont’d)
Minimum Specifications
Contents:
12 Pin extender board (HP
5060-5915)
6 Pin extender board (HP
5060-5914)
22 Pin extender board (HP
5060-0630)
Coax Adapter, Selectro plug to
BNC jack (HP 1250-1236)
Coax Adapter, Selectro jack to
BNC jack (HP 1250-1237
Oscilloscope probe Adapters (4 each) (HP 10035-53202)
Alignment Screwdriver (HP
8710-1010)
Range: 102 - 127 Vac
Voltmeter Range: 103 - 127 Vac +1 volt
Male BNC Connectors, 48 inches long
47-1/2 watt
Suggested Model
HP 08443-60011 Service Kit
General Radio W5NMT3A or
Superior Electric UC1M
HP 10503A
Ungar #776 with p4037
Heating Unit
HP 7035B 1,10,100 mV/in; 1 and 10 V/in continuous vernier between range
Range: 1.2 dB in 0.1 dB steps
Accuracy: 0.01 dB
HP H38-355C
1-6
Section 1
SERVICE KIT
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 1-3. Service Kit Required for Maintenance
1-7/1-8
Section 1 TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
2-1.
INITIAL INSPECTION
2-2.
Mechanical Check
2-3. Check the shipping carton for evidence of damage immediately after receipt. If there is any visible damage to the carton, request the carrier’s agent to be present when the instrument is unpacked. Inspect the Model
8443A/B for physical damage such as bent or broken parts and dents or scratches. If damage is found refer to
paragraph 2-6 for recommended claim procedures. If
the Model 8443A/B appears undamaged, perform the
electrical check (see paragraph 2-4). The packaging
material should be retained for possible future use.
2-4.
Electrical Check
2-5. The electrical performance check consists of
following the procedures listed in paragraphs 4-10 to 4-
22. These procedures allow the operator to determine
that the instrument is, or is not, operating within the
specifications listed in Table 1-1. The initial performance
and accuracy of the instrument are certified as stated on the inside front cover of this manual. If the Model
8443A/B does not operate as specified, refer to
paragraph 2-6 for the recommended claim procedure.
2-6. DELETED.
2-7. DELETED.
2-8. DELETED.
2-9.
PREPARATION FOR USE
SECTION II
INSTALLATION
2-10.
Power Requirements
2-11. The model 8443A/B may be operated on 115 or
230 volts ac +10% at 48 to 440 cycles, single phase.
Power required is 75 watts. The 115/230 volt slide switch on the rear of the instrument must be in the correct position to avoid damage to the instrument.
When shipped, the instrument is set for 115 volt ac operation.
2-12.
Power Cable
2-13. To protect operating personnel, the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) recommends that the instrument panel and cabinet be grounded. This instrument is equipped with a detachable three-conductor power cable which, when plugged into an appropriate receptacle, grounds the instrument. The offset pin on the power cable threeprong connector is the ground connection. When using a three-prong to two-prong adapter the ground lead on the adapter should be grounded to retain the safety feature.
2-14.
Operating Environment
2-15. The Model 8443B does not require forced air cooling when operating at temperatures form 0 to 550C
(32 to 131° F). Normal air circulation will maintain a reasonable temperature within the instrument. The
8443A is equipped with a fan which is capable of keeping the instrument ambient temperature within reasonable limits when the instrument is operated at temperatures between 0° to 550C (32° to 1310F).
CAUTION
Before applying power check the rear panel slide switch for proper position
(115 or 230 volts).
2-16.
Bench Operation
2-17. The Model 8443A/B cabinet has plastic feet and a foldaway tilt stand for convenience in bench operation.
The tilt stand permits inclining the instrument for ease in viewing the frequency readout. The plastic feet are shaped to provide clearance for air circulation and to make modular cabinet width instruments self-aligning when stacked. The instrument may also be rack mounted. A joining bracket kit is provided to assure a common ground between the Model 8443A/B and the
Spectrum Analyzer.
2-1
Section 1
2-18.
DELETED.
2-19.
DELETED.
2-20.
DELETED.
2-21.
DELETED.
2-22. In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number.
2-23.
Other Packaging Materials
2-24. The following general instructions should be used for repackaging with commercially available materials.
2-2
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
a. Wrap the instrument in heavy paper or plastic.
(If shipping to a Hewlett-Packard Service Office or center, attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, model number and full serial number.) b. Use a strong shipping container. A double-wall carton made of 350 pound test material is adequate.
c. Use enough shock-absorbing material (three to four inch layer) around all sides of the instrument to provide firm cushion and prevent movement inside the container. Protect the control panel with cardboard.
d. Seal the shipping container securely.
e. Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to assure careful handling.
Section 1
3-1.
INTRODUCTION
3-2. This section provides operating instructions for the
HP Model 8443A Tracking Generator/ Counter and the
Model 8443B Tracking Generator.
3-3. Operating instructions for the HP Model 8553/8552
Spectrum Analyzer, which must be interconnected with the Model 8443A/B, are not included in this manual except as required in initial setup and operation. The operator should be thoroughly familiar with operation of the Spectrum Analyzer or have the appropriate manual on hand.
3-4.
PANEL FEATURES
3-13.
OPERATOR’S MAINTENANCE
3-14. Operator’s maintenance on the Model 8443A/B is limited to fuse replacement and adjustment of the controls indicated in the checkout procedure.
NOTE
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SECTION III
OPERATION
the switch located on the top of the A4 Time Base
Assembly must be placed in the EXT position.
3-5. Front and rear panel controls, indicators and
connectors are identified and described in Figures 3-1
and 3-2. For the 8443B, disregard references to the
Counter controls; the Tracking Generator controls are the same in both instruments.
3-6.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3-7. In view of the simplicity of operation of the Model
8443A/B, the Operator’s Checks provide adequate information to assure proper operation of the instrument.
However, the operator should experiment with the instrument in order to become more familiar with its operation. It should be noted that the output of any device (within the frequency and amplitude range of the analyzer) may be connected to the RF Section RF
INPUT and the frequency at any point of the response counted by the Model 8443A. The input to the device under test may be provided by an external signal generator, or by the output of the Tracking Generator itself.
3-8.
OPERATOR’S CHECKS
If maintaining an 8443B, disregard references to the Counter section.
3-15. Adjustment of A7Rll on the marker control board should be made only if the condition described in step j
of Figure 3-3 exists. To properly adjust A7Rll first turn
the MARKER POSITION control fully clockwise. Adjust the CTR ADJ control so that the marker appears approximately one minor division from the far right CRT graticule line. Turn the MARKER POSITION control fully counterclockwise. The marker should be two minor division or less from the far left graticule line. Now pull the MARKER POSITION control away from the panel and adjust A7Rll to center the marker on the center CRT graticule line.
3-16. Fuse replacement information is provided in Table
Designation
F1
A15F1
A15F2
A15F3
A15F4
A15F5
Table 3-1. Fuse Information
Purpose Rating
Line Fuse 2 amperes
+175 Volt Supply 0.25 ampere
+24 Volt Supply 1 ampere
+5.8 Volt Supply 2 amperes
+20 Volt Supply 1 ampere
-12 Volt Supply 1 ampere
3-9. Use the operator’s checks in Figure 3-3 to verify
proper operation of the instrument’s main functions.
3-10.
SPECIAL FEATURES
3-11. The output of the internal 1 MHz time base reference oscillator is available for use in external equipment at J4 on the rear of the 8443A.
3-12. An external time base reference signal may be applied to J3 on the rear panel of the Model 8443A.
When an external reference signal is used,
3-17.
TRACKING GENERATOR OPERATION
3-18. The Tracking Generator section of the 8443A and the 8443B is a leveled signal source whose output frequency precisely tracks the Spectrum Analyzer tuning frequency. This output can be used as a source to measure the frequency response of passive and active devices operating within its frequency range.
3-1
Section 1 TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (1 of 2)
(1) MARKER INTENSITY: adjusts the intensity of the marker that appears on the Spectrum
Analyzer’s CRT display.
(2) FREQUENCY MHz: display indicates reading of Counter.
(3) MARKER POSITION: when in, sets position of marker on CRT. When out, marker automatically goes to center of CRT display.
(4) CTR ADJ: adjusts position of marker when
MARKER POSITION knob is out.
(5) FUNCTION*: controls function of Tracking
Generator and Counter.
TRACK ANALYZER: the signal at RF
OUTPUT tracks the Spectrum Analyzer’s
* Function control not installed on units with serial number prefix 1049A and below. See backdating
tuning frequency. The Counter reads the frequency at the marker (if MODE is set to MARKER or SCAN
HOLD). (This mode is used for frequency response measurements.)
RESTORE SIGNAL: if the marker is placed anywhere on a signal response that appears on the
CRT, a restored version of that signal appears at RF
OUTPUT (i.e., frequency characteristics are the same, and the amplitude depends upon RF
OUTPUT LEVEL controls); also, the COUNTER reads that signal’s frequency (if MODE is set to
MARKER or SCAN HOLD). If the marker is not placed on a signal response, little or no output appears at RF OUTPUT and any COUNTER reading should be disregarded. (This mode is used to precisely measure the frequency of unknown signals.)
3-2
Section 3 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
(6) RESOLUTION: sets frequency resolution of Counter
FRONT PANEL FEATURES
(when FUNCTION is set to TRACK
ANALYZER).
(7) MODE: controls mode of Counter.
(10) RF OUTPUT LEVEL dBm: controls set the signal level at the RF OUTPUT jack.
EXTERNAL: Counter reads frequency of signal at COUNTER INPUT jack (up to 110
MHz).
TENS: 10 dB steps from +10 to -110 dB.
UNITS: 1 dB steps from 0 to -12 dB.
MARKER: Counter reads frequency at marker.
SCAN HOLD: analyzer stops scanning: tuning frequency follows marker, controlled by MARKER POSITION. Counter reads frequency at marker.
(8) COUNTER INPUT: external input to frequency counter. Signal level should be >-
10 dBm and <+15 dBm. BNC 50 ohm jack.
(9) TRACKING ADJUST: centers tracking signal in IF pass-band of Spectrum Analyzer
TENTHS: 0 to -1.2 dB vernier, calibrated at tenth-dB points.
(11) RF OUTPUT 50
Ω
: output for tracking signal. BNC 50 ohm jack.
(12) POWER: when in ON position, it applies power to the circuitry (while lamp lights). When in STBY, it removes power from the circuitry (blue lamp lights), however, power is still applied to Counter reference oscillator heater (8443A only).
Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (2 of 2)
3
Section 3 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
(1) LINE Power Jack: connection for line power cable.
(2) LINE SELECTOR: used to select 115 of 230 VAC operation.
(3) LINE FUSE: houses line power fuse
(fuse value is the same for both voltages).
(4) 1 MHz OUT: output for internal time base signal, 1 Vrms (8443A).
(5) EXT TIME BASE IN: input for external time base signal, 1 MHz, >1 Vrms (8443A).
(6) Interconnection Jack: connects to
Spectrum Analyzer Display Section AUX A jack through interconnection cable.
(7) Interconnection Cable: connects to
Tracking \Generator/Counter interconnection jack and to Display Section AUX A jack.
(8) DIGITAL OUTPUT: BCD output of
Counter indication (8443A).
(9) UNBLANKED/BLANKED: in UN-
BLANKED position, all seven digits are always lit. In BLANKED position, insignificant zeros to the left of the decimal point are blanked (8443A).
Figure 3-2. Rear Panel Controls and Connectors
3-4
Section 3 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
a. Set the LINE SELECTOR on the rear white ON lamp should light.
panel (see Figure 3-2) to be compatible with the
available line voltage. b. Connect line power cable to LINE power jack
on rear panel (see Figure 3-2); plug power cable into
line power outlet. The blue STBY lamp (10) should light.
NOTE
The Model 8443A should remain connected to line power when not in use. This will maintain a constant temperature in the time base reference oscillator oven.
e. Apply power to the Spectrum Analyzer and adjust the Display Section controls. Set the analyzer as follows:
FREQUENCY..............................50 MHz
BANDWIDTH ............................. 300 kHz
SCAN WIDTH ................. PER DIVISION
SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION
....................................................10 MHz
INPUT ATTENUATION ..................10 dB
BASE LINE CLIPPER ....................... ccw
SCAN TIMER PER DIVISION
.....................................1 MILLISECOND
LOG REF LEVEL ..........................0 dBm
LOG/LINEAR.......................... I0 dB LOG
VIDEO FILTER ................................OFF
SCAN MODE .................................... INT
SCAN TRIGGER........................... AUTO c. Connect the interconnection cable to the interconnection jack and to the analyzer’s AUX A
d. Set POWER switch (10) to ON. The f. Set the FUNCTION switch (8) to TRACK
ANALYZER. Set MODE switch (3) to
Figure 3-3. Operator’s Checks (1 of 2)
3-5
Section 3 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
OPERATOR’S CHECKS
MARKER, the RESOLUTION switch (5) to 100 Hz, and RF OUTPUT LEVEL controls (11) to 0 dBm. l. Pull the MARKER POSITION knob (6) away from the panel; the marker should be near the center vertical graticule line on the CRT. Adjust CRT
ADJ (7) to position the marker on the line.
NOTE
If checking an 8443B, disregard references to the Counter controls.
m. Tune the analyzer FREQUENCY control
through its range. The Counter should again display whatever frequency is represented by the position of the marker.
g. Connect RF OUTPUT (12) to the analyzer RF
INPUT with a BNC to BNC cable assembly. The trace on the analyzer’s CRT display should rise from the baseline to the top graticule line. n. Set the analyzer to a narrow scan width
(20 kHz PER DIVISION or less), and set TUNING
STABILIZER to on. Set RESOLUTION (5) to 10 Hz and then to 1 kHz. The Counter’s readout (4) should have 10 Hz and then 1 kHz resolution.
h. Set RF OUTPUT LEVEL (11) to -30 dBm. Set the Spectrum Analyzer SCAN WIDTH to
ZERO, BANDWIDTH to the narrowest bandwidth,
LOG/LINEAR to LINEAR and LINEAR SENSITI-
VITY to 1 mV/Div. Adjust TRACKING ADJUST (9) for maximum vertical deflection on the CRT. (This assures that the Tracking Generator is accurately tracking the Spectrum Analyzer’s tuning frequency.)
Re-set the analyzer as set in step e.
o. Push the MARKER POSITION knob (6) in, and set MODE (3) to EXTERNAL. Set RF
OUTPUT LEVEL (11) to 0 dBm and connect RF
OUTPUT (12) to COUNTER INPUT (1). Set analyzer
SCAN WIDTH to ZERO. The Counter should display the frequency the analyzer is tuned to; the marker should not be visible.
i. Change the RF OUTPUT LEVEL controls (11); the trace on the CRT should change as indicated by the controls. (At low output levels it will be necessary to change the analyzer LOG REF
LEVEL control to keep the signal above the baseline.) p. Set MODE (3) to SCAN HOLD. The analzyer’s scan should stop at the marker, and the
Counter should display the frequency represented by the position of the marker. The marker (the point at which the scan is stopped) can be positioned at any point on the CRT by the MARKER POSITION control (6).
NOTE
This concludes the checks that apply to.
the 8443B
j. Adjust MARKER INTENSITY (2) for the desired marker intensity. The marker is a bright spot on the trace on the CRT. If it is not visible, check that the MARKER POSITION knob (6) is in
(push toward the panel) and turn the knob to position the marker on-screen. (If the marker cannot be positioned on-screen, follow the procedures
q. Set MODE (3) to MARKER, RESOLU-
TION (5) to 1 kHz, and tune the analyzer to a frequency below 10 MHz. Set MARKER POSITION
(6) ccw and set the rear panel UNBLANKED/
BLANKED switch (see Figure 3-2) to UNBLANKED.
The digits to the left of any significant digits that are left of the decimal point should display zeros. Set
UNBLANKED/BLANKED to blanked; the zeros should blank (i.e., disappear).
k. Rotate MARKER POSITION (6) to position the marker to various points on the CRT. The
Counter should display whatever frequency is 0 MHz or random frequencies.
represented by the position of the marker.
Figure 3-3. Operator’s Checks (2 of 2)
3-6
r. Set the analyzer as set in step e. Connect analyzer CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT. Set FUNCTION
(8) to RESTORE SIGNAL. Using MARKER POSITION
(6) set marker on skirt of 30 MHz signal; the Counter should indicate approximately 30 MHz. Set marker off signal into baseline noise; the Counter should indicate
Section 3
3-19. The signal output of the 8443A/B has absolute amplitude calibration. It can be set, in one dB steps, from +10 dBm to -122 dBm. There is also a vernier, calibrated in tenth dB steps, that allows continuously adjustable attenuation over a 1.2 dB range.
3-20. Measuring Passive Devices
3-21. To quickly measure the frequency response of a passive device, set the Spectrum Analyzer to display the desired frequency range. Set the RF OUTPUT LEVEL control settings so that: a. The signal level at the analyzer’s input mixer does not exceed -10 dBm (Signal level at input mixer =
Signal level at RF INPUT INPUT ATTENUATION).
b. The signal level out of the 8443A/B will not damage or over-drive the device to be measured.
3-22. Set the analyzer LOG REF LEVEL controls to the same settings as RF OUTPUT LEVEL. Connect the device between the 8443A/B RF OUTPUT and the analyzer RF INPUT. The frequency response of the device will be displayed directly on the CRT. Insertion loss can be read directly from the graticule lines.
3-23. Measuring Active Devices
3-24. When measuring active devices, some provision should be made for the gain of the device to prevent damage to the Spectrum Analyzer or to the device. This is readily accomplished using the 8443A/B RF OUTPUT
LEVEL controls.
3-25. Set the Tracking Generator and the Spectrum
Analyzer using the procedure described for measuring passive devices. However, before connecting the active device between the 8443A/B and the analyzer,
decrease
the signal level out of the 8443A/B by an amount greater than the gain of the device. The gain of the device will
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
be the sum of the decrease and the dB reading from the
CRT graticule. (Remember, this is a negative number on the graticule).
3-26. For example, the Spectrum Analyzer is calibrated for a reference at the top graticule line of the CRT. Then the setting of the RF OUTPUT LEVEL TENS control is decreased 40 dB, and the device is connected between the 8443A/B RF OUTPUT and the analyzer RF INPUT.
If the response curve is at the -7 dB graticule line, the gain of the device is 33 dB (40 Db - 7 dB).
3-27. Important Considerations
3-28. When using the Tracking Generator for swept response measurements, the Spectrum Analyzer
BANDWIDTH control and DISPLAY UNCAL light take on a somewhat different significance. The BANDWIDTH setting mainly affects the average noise level of the analyzer and has only a secondary effect on resolution.
Narrowing BANDWIDTH improves dynamic range, but requires slower scan rates.
3-29. In most cases the DISPLAY UNCAL light will not apply. The best procedure in swept response measurements is to slow the scan rate (i.e. increase
SCAN TIME PER DIVISION) until the display amplitude remains constant. At this point, the scan is at the proper rate to satisfy the requirements of both the Spectrum
Analyzer and the device being measured.
3-30. Spurious responses are not displayed on the CRT due to the tracking signal source and receiver.
Therefore measurements can be made over a dynamic range limited only by gain compression as an upper limit and system noise as a lower limit.
3-31. Devices, such as filters, which have attenuation greater than 100 dB can be measured. Trace the response on the CRT in two 70 dB segments; photograph each segment to get a composite picture.
3-7/3-8
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
4-1. INTRODUCTION
SECTION IV
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-2. This section provides instructions for performance testing the Model 8443A Tracking Generator/Counter and the Model 8443B Tracking Generator. When testing an 8443B, disregard tests and references that deal with the Counter section of the 8443A.
4-3. TEST PROCEDURES
4-4. Purpose. The performance test procedures are used to check instrument performance for incoming inspection and periodic evaluation. The tests are designed to verify published specifications. Tests are numbered in the same sequence as the specifications in
4-5. Each test applies directly to a listed specification.
Next a description of the test and any special instructions are listed. Each test that requires test equipment has a test setup drawing and a list of required equipment.
Step 1 of each test lists control settings for that test.
Each test procedure provides spaces for test data which
are duplicated in the Performance Test Card, Table 4-1,
at the end of this section.
4-6. All tests are made with the Model 8443A/B interconnected with a HP 8553/8552/140 Spectrum
Analyzer which is known to be functioning properly.
4-7. Test Equipment Required. The test instruments
required for performance testing are listed in Table 1-2
and in the individual tests. Test instruments other than those listed may be used providing their performance equals or exceeds the critical specifications listed in
4-8. Front Panel Checks and Adjustments. Refer to
paragraph 3-8 Operator’s Checks.
4-9. PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-10. Specification 1, Frequency Range
SPECIFICATION: 100 kHz to 110 MHz. (Output frequency tracks the 8553/8552 Spectrum Analyzer tuning).
DESCRIPTION: The frequency range is checked by applying signals to the Spectrum Analyzer, centering these signals on the CRT and counting the signal frequency.
EQUIPMENT:
HF Signal Generator
VHF Signal Generator
Figure 4-1. Frequency Range Test
4-1
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-10. Specification 1, Frequency Range (cont’d)
PROCEDURE:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-1 and set the control as follows:
Tracking Generator/Counter:
MODE ................................................................................................................................. MARKER
RESOLUTION .......................................................................................................................... 10 Hz
MARKER POSITION ................................................................................................Knob pulled out
MARKER INTENSITY....................................................................................................... Mid- range
Spectrum Analyzer:
DISPLAY SECTION...........................................................................................Clearly defined trace
INPUT ATTENUATION............................................................................................................. 10 dB
SCAN WIDTH ............................................................................................................ PER DIVISION
SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION.................................................................................................. 5 kHz
BANDWIDTH ............................................................................................................................ 1 kHz
SCAN TIME PER DIVISION ................................................................................................ 20 mSec
LOG REF LEVEL ..................................................................................................................... 0 dBm
HF Signal Generator:
FREQUENCY ....................................................................................................................... 100 kHz
ATTENUATOR . .................................................................................................................. -50 dBm
MODULATION SELECTOR . ..................................................................................................... CW
VHF Signal Generator:
FREQUENCY . ................................................................................................................... 110 MHz
OUTPUT ............................................................................................................................... -50 dBm
MODULATION ............................................................................................................................. CW
2. With the HF Signal Generator output connected to the analyzer RF INPUT, tune the analyzer FREQUENCY to 100 kHz. The Model 8443A counter, which is reading the output of the tracking generator, should provide a readout of
100 kHz ± 1 kHz.
100 kHz
NOTE
When testing an 8443B, connect a frequency counter to RF OUTPUT. Measure frequency range with the counter.
3. With the VHF Signal Generator output connected to the analyzer RF INPUT, tune the analyzer FREQUENCY to
110 MHz. The Model 8443 counter should provide a readout of 110 MHz.
110 MHz
4. Any other frequency or frequencies of special interest within the range of 110 kHz to 110 MHz may be displayed in the same manner.
4-2
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-11. Specification 2, Amplitude Range
SPECIFICATION: <-120 dBm to +10 dBm in 10 and 1 dB steps with a continuous 1.2 dB vernier.
DESCRIPTION: The output of the video amplifier in the Model 8443A/B is a constant +10 dBm signal. Two step attenuators are provided to enable the operator to control the output amplitude in 10 dB and 1 dB steps. In addition, a 1.2
dB vernier provides continuous attenuation of its range. This test demonstrates the accuracy of the attenuators.
Figure 4-2. Amplitude Range Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
120 dB Attenuator Standard (10 dB Steps)
12 dB Attenuator Standard (1 dB Steps)
RF Amplifier ( 20dB gain, 30 MHz)
Digital Voltmeter
PROCEDURE:
1. Connect the 120 dB attenuator to the Model 8443A/B RF OUTPUT using a BNC to BNC adapter (do not use a cable). Set the controls as follows:
Tracking Generator/Counter:
MODE ................................................................................................................................. MARKER
RESOLUTION .......................................................................................................................... 1 kHz
MARKER POSITION .................................................................................................................. Any
FUNCTION ........................................................................................................ TRACK ANALYZER
Attenuators:
TENS ........................................................................................................................................... +10
UNITS ...............................................................................................................................................0
TENTHS ...........................................................................................................................................0
4-3
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-11. Specification 2, Amplitude Range (cont’d)
Spectrum Analyzer:
FREQUENCY ........................................................................................................................ 30 MHz
BANDWIDTH ............................................................................................................................ 50 Hz
SCAN WIDTH ...........................................................................................................................ZERO
SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION ..................................................................................................... Any
INPUT ATTENUATION.....................................................................................................................0
SCAN TIME PER DIVISION ................................................................................... 1 MILLISECOND
LOG REF LEVEL .................................................................................................................... 40dBm
LOG REF LEVEL VERNIER .............................................................................................................0
LOG/LINEAR .............................................................................................................................. LOG
RF Amplifier: Power ON 40 dB gain
120 dB Calibrated Attenuator: Set for 120 dB attenuation
Digital Voltmeter: AUTORANGE or 1000 Millivolts
microfarad) is required between the vertical output of the 8552 and the digital voltmeter.
3. Adjust the analyzer FREQUENCY to 30 MHz.
4. Use the Model 8443A/B TENTHS control to set the digital voltmeter reading to 300 mV. (Allow time for the lowpass filter to stabilize).
5. Set the Model 8443A/B TENS control to 0 and the calibrated attenuator to 110 dB.
0 dBm DVM reading: 298 mV 302 mV
6. If necessary, reset the Model 8443A/B TENTHS control to obtain a reading of 300 mV on the digital voltmeter.
Change the Model 8443A/B TENS control to -10 and the calibrated attenuator to 100 dB.
-10 dBm DVM reading: 298 mV 302 mV
7. Check the remaining Model 8443A/B attenuator steps by adding 10 dB steps with the TENS attenuator, while decreasing the calibrated attenuator in 10 dB steps (the sum of the two attenuators should always total 110 dB).
The digital voltmeter should be reset to 300 mV prior to each step if necessary.
-20 dBm DVM reading:
-30 dBm DVM reading:
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
-40 dBm DVM reading:
-50 dBm DVM reading:
-60 dBm DVM reading:
-70 dBm DVM reading:
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
-80 dBm DVM reading:
-90 dBm DVM reading:
-100 dBm dBM reading:
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
-110 dBm DVM reading: 298 mV 302 mV
4-4
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-11. Specification 2, Amplitude Range (cont’d)
8. Remove the RF Amplifier and the 120 dB calibrated attenuator from the test setup. Connect the 12 dB calibrated attenuator between the Model 8443A/B RF OUTPUT and the analyzer RF INPUT. Set the Model 8443A/B TENS attenuator to -50 dBm and the analyzer LOG REF LEVEL to -10 dBm. Set the calibrated 12 dB attenuator to 12 dB. Adjust the Model 8552 LOG REF LEVEL vernier control to obtain a reading of 300 mV on the digital voltmeter.
9. Set the Model 8443A/B UNITS attenuator to -1 and the 12 dB calibrated attenuator to 11. The digital voltmeter should indicate 300 mV ± 1 mV.
-1 dBm DVM reading: 299 mV 301 mV
10. Check the remaining UNITS steps by increasing the UNITS attenuation in 1 dB steps while decreasing the 12 dB calibrated attenuator by 1 dB steps. (The sum of the two attenuators should always total 12 dB.) The digital voltmeter should be reset to 300 mV prior to each step if necessary.
-3 dBm DVM reading:
-4 dBm DVM reading:
-5 dBm DVM reading:
-6 dBm DVM reading:
-7 dBm DVM reading:
-8 dBm DVM reading:
-9 dBm DVM reading:
-10 dBm DVM reading:
-11 dBm DVM reading:
-12 dBm DVM reading:
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
4-5
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-12. Specification 3, Amplitude Accuracy (Flatness)
SPECIFICATION: ± 0.5 dB across entire range.
DESCRIPTION: The Spectrum Analyzer is swept through its entire range and the output of the Mode. 443A/B is recorded on an X-Y Recorder.
Figure 4-3. Amplitude Accuracy Test
EQUIPMENT:
X-Y Recorder
Crystal Detector
PROCEDURE:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-3 and set the controls as follows:
Tracking Generator/Counter:
MODE ................................................................................................................................. MARKER
RF LEVEL ATTENUATORS ....................................................................................................... 0 dB
MARKER POSITION .................................................................................................................CCW
Spectrum Analyzer:
SCAN WIDTH ...........................................................................................................................ZERO
SCAN MODE ....................................................................................................................... SINGLE
SCAN TIME .........................................................................................................................2 sec/Div
SCAN TRIGGER . .................................................................................................................. AUTO
X-Y Recorder:
Horizontal trace begins at left margin of recorder chart paper and ends at right margin synchronized to the beginning and end of the analyzer scan ramp.
Vertical position of the stylus may be anywhere on the recorder chart paper which permits a 1 dB step without reaching top or bottom limits.
2. With all controls set as shown above, place the PEN switch on the recorder to the DOWN position. ,ii and push the SINGLE scan button on the analyzer. Be sure to place the recorder PEN switch in the UP position as soon as the scan stops.
3. Turn the Model 8443A/B UNITS attenuator to 1 dB and repeat step 2. Return the UNITS attenuate to 0 dB.
4-6
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-12. Specification 3. Amplitude Accuracy (Flatness) (cont’d)
4. Set the analyzer to SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION at 10 MHz, and tune the analyzer to approximately 50 MHz.
Carefully tune the analyzer to indicate a 100 kHz readout on the Model 8443A. (On the 8443B, use a frequency counter, connected to RF OUTPUT, to tune the analyzer to 100 kHz). Position the recorder stylus slightly below the top line drawn in steps 2 and 3. Place the PEN switch on the recorder in the down position and depress the
SINGLE scan button on the analyzer. When the scan stops, set the PEN switch to UP.
5. Set the analyzer SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION to 2 MHz and tune the analyzer FREQUENCY to a point where the
Model 8443A counter reads 90 MHz. (Connect an external counter to the 8443B to tune the analyzer to 90 MHz).
The recorder stylus should be positioned at the same level as measured at 90 MHz in test 4. Place the recorder
PEN switch in the DOWN position and push the SINGLE button on the analyzer. When the recorder stylus reaches the right hand margin of the recorder chart place the PEN switch in the UP position. The entire trace
(steps 4 and 5) should be between the two lines drawn in steps 2 and 3.
± 0.5 dB
4-13. Specification 4, Output Impedance
SPECIFICATION: 50 ohms, ac coupled, reflection coefficient < or = 0.09 (1.2 SWR); output 0 dBm.
DESCRIPTION: The RF output from the Tracking Generator is measured with an RF Voltmeter, first with no load, then terminated in 50 ohms. The source resistance (Rs) of the Tracking Generator is then calculated and finally the SWR is determined by dividing Zo by Rs (Rs by Zo if Zo is greater than Rs).
EQUIPMENT:
RF Vector Voltmeter
50 ohm dummy load
BNC Tee
Figure 4-4. Output Impedance Test Setup
4-7
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-13. Specification 4, Output Impedance (cont’d)
PROCEDURE:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-4 and set the controls as follows:
Tracking Generator/Counter:
RF OUTPUT
LEVEL dBm .................................................................................................. .All controls set to 0
POWER ........................................................................................................................................ ON
Spectrum Analyzer:
FREQUENCY ........................................................................................................................ 30 MHz
SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION.................................................................................................. 1 kHz
SCAN WIDTH ...........................................................................................................................ZERO
ALL OTHER CONTROLS ............................................................................................... Any setting
RF Vector Voltmeter:
CHANNEL........................................................................................................................................ A
FREQ RANGE - MHz....................................................................................... 30 MHz (APC locked)
RANGE . ............................................................................................................................. 1000 mV
PHASE CONTROLS............................................................................................................ Not used
2. Measure the RF output of the Tracking Generator with the RF Vector Voltmeter. Record the reading:
Voc = mVrms
3. Use the BNC Tee and terminate the Tracking Generator RF OUTPUT in 50 ohms. Measure the RF output with the RF Vector Voltmeter. Record the reading:
VL = mVrms
4. Find the source resistance of the Tracking Generator by the following formula:
Rs = RL Voc - RL
VL
Voc = Tracking Generator RF output open circuit voltage
VL = Tracking Generator RF output terminated in 50 ohms
RL = Zo = Characteristic Impedance = 50 ohms
5. Find SWR by the formula:
SWR = Zo
Rs
( Rs
Ro if Zo is greater than Rs.
)
6. Record this value; maximum allowable is 1.2
1.2 SWR
4-8
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-14. Specification 5, Measurement Range (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: 100 kHz to 110 MHz. Display: seven digits with one digit over-range (for frequencies of
100 MHz and higher).
DESCRIPTION: This test is identical to 4-10.
4-15. Specification 6, Resolution (Gate time, 8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: 1 kHz (1 mSec), 100 Hz (10 mSec) and 10 Hz (100 mSec).
DESCRIPTION: This test consists of placing the RESOLUTION switch on the 8443A in each of its three positions and observing the numerical readout.
PROCEDURE: Operate the Model 8443A in the MARKER mode with the MARKER POSITION knob pulled out. Tune the analyzer to any frequency over 100 MHz, and place the Model 8443A RESOLUTION control in each of its three positions.
In the 10 Hz position all of the numerical readouts are illuminated and the decimal point is between the third and fourth readouts. In the 100 Hz position the first numerical readout is blanked and the decimal point is between the fourth and fifth readouts. In the 1 kHz position the first and second readouts are blanked and the decimal point is between the fifth and sixth readouts.
4-16. Specification 7, Accuracy (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: ± count ± time base accuracy.
DESCRIPTION: Connect the 1 MHz OUT (J4 on rear panel of the Model 8443A) to the COUNTER INPUT. Place the
MODE control in the EXTERNAL position. In any position of the RESOLUTION control the last digit of the numerical readout will be 0, 1 or 9.
4-9
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-17. Specification 8, Time Base Aging Rate (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: < 3 x 10-9 per day. (0.003 Hz/day at 1 MHz after warmup).
DESCRIPTION: This test checks long term frequency stability. This is accomplished by mixing the reference oscillator frequency of the Model 8443A with a stable 1.000001 MHz signal and recording the drift on a strip recorder.
Figure 4-5. Time Base Again Rate Test
EQUIPMENT:
Digital-to-Analog Converter/Recorder
Frequency Counter
Double Balanced Mixer
Amplifier, dc to 1 MHz
Quartz Oscillator
Frequency Synthesizer
Oscilloscope
Attenuator
PROCEDURE:
1. Set controls as follows:
Digital-to-Analog Converter/Recorder:
POWER ........................................................................................................................................ ON
COLUMN SELECTOR ........................................................................................................2, 3 and 4
OPERATE............................................................................... (after ZERO-CALIBRATE procedure)
MIN-N-HR ..................................................................................................................................... HR div .....................................................................................................................................................8
PEN............................................................................................................................................ down
RANGE . ............................................................................................................................... 100 mV
Amplifier, dc:
Remove ground strap from low output terminal
GAIN ............................................................................................................................................ X10
Quartz Oscillator:
OUTPUT ................................................................................................................. From 1 MHz jack
4-10
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-17. Specification 8, Time Base Aging Rate (8443A Only) (cont’d)
Frequency Counter:
SIGNAL INPUT ............................................................................................................................. DC
TIME BASE ............................................................................................................................. 10 µ S
SAMPLE RATE ..............................................................................Just out of POWER OFF detent
SENSITIVITY (preset) ................................................................................................................ 0.1V
FUNCTION to PERIOD AVERAGE . ...............................................................................................1
STORAGE/OFF (on back panel) ...................................................................................... STORAGE
Frequency Synthesizer:
FREQUENCY SELECTION . ........................................................... Local keyboard and OPERATE
OUTPUT LEVEL .....................................................................................................................full CW
FREQUENCY ............................................................................................................... 1,000,001 Hz
SEARCH OSCILLATOR ........................................................................................ Function not used
FREQUENCY STANDARD......................................................................................................... EXT
ATTENUATOR ......................................................................................................................... 20 dB
presence of 50 cycle ac on the 1 cycle input to the frequency counter. If 60 cycles is present it is probably due to a ground loop. Check all equipment grounds.
3. After warmup (seven days of continuous operation of 72 hours of continuous operation after an off time of less than 72 hours) test the time base aging rate.
4. After the digital to analog converter/recorder has been calibrated, position the recorder stylus to a convenient point on the recording paper. Check the time base for a 24 hour period. The recorder excursions must not exceed 1.4
minor divisions.
divisions
4-18. Specification 9, Time Base Temperature Drift (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: <3 x 10- 8 (0.03 Hz) variation referenced to 100 MHz 0 to 55°C.
DESCRIPTION: This test verifies frequency stability over the specified operating temperature range.
EQUIPMENT: Same as 4-17 plus a temperature controllable oven.
PROCEDURE:
1. With the equipment connected and adjusted as in 4-16, place the Model 8443A in a temperature controllable oven. Adjust the temperature to +24°C and allow the temperature to stabilize.
2. Make a reference plot on the recorder at +24°C.
3. Lower the oven temperature to 0°C and allow three hours for the temperature to stabilize. Record the deviation from the +24°C trace.
4. Increase the oven temperature to +55°C and allow three hours for the temperature to stabilize. Record the deviation from the previous traces.
5. Total deviation must be not more than 3 x 10-8.
Deviation
4-11
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-19. Specification 10, External Counter Input (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: 10 kHz to 120 MHz, 50 ohms, -10 dBm minimum, +25 dBm maximum.
DESCRIPTION: This test verifies the ability of the counter to count frequencies between 10 kHz and 120
MHz at signal levels as low as -10 dBm.
Figure 4-6. Counter Input Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
Test Oscillator
VHF Signal Generator
PROCEDURE:
1. Place the Model 8443A MODE switch in the EXTERNAL position and connect the test oscillator output to the
COUNTER INPUT. Set the test oscillator output to 10 kHz at -10 dBm. The counter readout should indicate 10 kHz. Increase the test oscillator output to +25 dBm. Counter readout remains the same.
2. Connect the VHF Signal Generator RF OUTPUT to the Model 8443A COUNTER INPUT. Set generator output to
120 MHz at -10 dBm. The counter readout should indicate 120 MHz.
3. Repeat the test at various frequencies between 10 kHz and 120 MHz.
4-20. Specification 11, External Time Base (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: 1 MHz, 50 ohm, 1 Vrms minimum.
DESCRIPTION: This test verifies proper operation of the counter when an external time base is used.
EQUIPMENT:
Frequency Standard
VHF Signal Generator
PROCEDURE:
1. Connect the signal generator RF OUTPUT to the Model 8443A COUNTER INPUT (100 MHz, -10 dBm). Counter readout indicates 100 MHz.
2. Connect the frequency standard output (1 MHz) to the Model 8443A EXT TIME BASE IN (rear panel J3). Place
A4S2 in the EXT position. The counter readout should again indicate 100 MHz.
4-12
Section 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
PERFORMANCE TESTS
4-21. Specification 12, Time Base Output (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: 1 MHz, 1 Vrms nominal.
DESCRIPTION: This test verifies the presence of the internal time base signal at J4 on the rear panel of the Model 8443A.
EQUIPMENT: Oscilloscope
PROCEDURE: Connect the 1 MHz OUT (rear panel J4) to the oscilloscope input. Oscilloscope displays a 1 MHz signal at least 1 Vrms in amplitude.
4-22. Specification 14, Digital Frequency Readout (8443A Only)
SPECIFICATION: 8, 4, 2, 1 code: positive logic.
DESCRIPTION: This test verifies the availability of the digital output from the Model 8443A.
EQUIPMENT: Digital Recorder
PROCEDURE: Connect the DIGITAL OUTPUT on the rear panel of the Model 8443A to the digital recorder input. Place the UNBLANKED/BLANKED switch on the Model 8443A to the BLANKED position (to prevent zero’s before the first significant digit). In the EXTERNAL Mode set the analyzer to 10 MHz/Div and 10 second/Div. Connect the RF OUTPUT to the COUNTER INPUT. Note that the digital recorder readout tracks (one count behind) the Model 8443A counter readout.
4-13
Section 4
4-10. Frequency Range
4-11. Amplitude Range
4-12. Amplitude Accuracy (Flatness)
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 4-1. Performance Test Record
100 kHz
110 MHz
0 dBm reading:
-10 dBm reading:
-20 dBm reading:
-30 dBm reading:
-40 dBm reading:
-50 dBm reading:
-60 dBm reading:
-70 dBm reading:
-80 dBm reading:
-90 dBm reading:
-100 dBm reading:
-110 dBm reading:
-1 dBm reading:
-2 dBm reading:
-3 dBm reading:
-4 dBm reading:
-5 dBm reading:
-6 dBm reading:
-7 dBm reading:
-8 dBm reading:
-9 dBm reading:
-10 dBm reading:
-11 dBm reading:
-12 dBm reading:
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
298 mV 302 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
299 mV 301 mV
± 0.5 dB
4-13. Output Impedance
1.2 SWR
4-17. Time Base Aging Rate divisions
4-18. Time Base Temperature Drift deviation
4-14
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SECTION V
ADJUSTMENTS
5-1. INTRODUCTION
5-2. This section describes adjustments and checks required to return the Model 8443A/B to peak operation capability when repairs are required. Included in this section are test setups and procedures and a test card for recording data taken during adjustment procedures.
Adjustment location illustrations are provided on the first foldout in this manual. If adjusting an 8443B, disregard references to the Counter circuits.
5-3. Checks and Adjustments Arrangement
5-4. The check and adjustment procedures are arranged in numerical order.
5-5. Test Equipment Required
5-6. Each test procedure in this section contains a list of test equipment to be used. Required specifications for
test equipment are detailed in Table 1-2. Also, each test
setup identifies all test equipment and accessories by callouts. Any equipment substituted for the instruments
or accessories listed in Table 1-2 must meet the
minimum specifications in order to adjust the Model
8443A/B effectively.
5-7. HP 08443-60011 Service Kit
5-8. The HP 08443-60011 Service Kit is an accessory item available from Hewlett-Packard for use in maintaining the Model 8443A/B.
5-9. Table 1-2 contains a detailed description of the
contents of the service kit. Any item in the kit may be ordered separately if desired.
5-10. Factory Selected Components
5-11. Some component values in the Model 8443A/B are selected at the time of final assembly and test.
These components are listed in Table 8-1. They are also
listed in the adjustment procedure for the circuit in which they appear.
5-12. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
5-1
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
ADJUSTMENTS
5-13. Power Supplies
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 4.
DESCRIPTION: The power supplies in the Model 8443A provide regulated outputs of +175 volts, +24 volts, +20 volts, +5.8
volts and -12 volts. These checks verify proper operation of the power supplies. (The power supplies in the 8443B provide only +24 volts, +20 volts, and -12 volts).
Figure 5-1. Power Supply Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
Digital Voltmeter
AC Voltmeter
Service Kit
Variable Voltage
Transformer
PROCEDURE:
1. With power applied to the model 8443A/B through the variable voltage transformer, connect the digital voltmeter to the +24 volt test point on the A14 assembly. Vary the ac line voltage from 100 volts to 130 volts. The +24 volts should not vary more than +10 mV.
Input AC
100 Vac
115 Vac
130 Vac
+24V
2. Measure the dc levels and the ac ripple at the test points on the A14 Sense Amplifier.
Level
+24V
+20V
+5.8V
-12V
Tolerance
±10.00 mV
±0.40 V
±0.12 V
±0.24V
3. Measure the dc level and ac ripple at the 175 V test point.
Ripple
<0.2 mV
<1.0 mV
<1.0 mV
<1.0 mV
5-2
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
ADJUSTMENTS
5-13. Power Supplies (cont’d)
Level
+175V
Tolerance
± 3.5V
Ripple
<1.0 V
4. If the voltages are not within tolerance connect the digital voltmeter to the +24 volt test point on the A14 assembly and adjust reference level potentiometer R50. If the voltage cannot be adjusted to +24 volts, or if other dc outputs
after completing repairs.
NOTE
R11, R33, R38 and R43 are all factory selected at time of final assembly to provide the proper reference level for the sense amplifier in which they appear. The value of these resistors determines the dc level of the supply output.
5-14. First Converter (A13)
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION: The first converter contains a 3 MHz crystal controlled oscillator, 3 MHz and 47 MHz amplifiers and a diode quad mixer. These tests verify proper operation of the assembly.
Figure 5-2. First Converter Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
RF Voltmeter
Service Kit
Frequency Counter
PROCEDURE:
1. Set the TRACKING ADJUST control full ccw and monitor the 3 MHz test point on the A13 assembly with the RF
Voltmeter. Adjust L1 PEAK ADJ for maximum indication on the RF Voltmeter.
2. Monitor the 3 MHz test point with the frequency Counter and set L2, RANGE ADJ, for a frequency of 2 MHz.
3. Turn the TRACKING ADJUST control full cw. The frequency at the 3 MHz test point should be 3 MHz. If the frequency is greater than 3.00025 MHz, replace R20 with a higher value.
4. Connect the RF Voltmeter to the 3 MHz test point. The minimum output level over the range of the TRACKING
ADJUST control should be 275 mVrms.
275 mVrms
5-3
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
ADJUSTMENTS
5-14. First Converter (A13) (cont’d)
5. Measure the output of the 3 MHz oscillator (Test Point 1) with the RF Voltmeter. Signal level should be 480 mVrms minimum.
480 mVrms
6. Reinstall the A13 assembly and connect the 50 MHz output to the Spectrum Analyzer RF INPUT. The 40 MHz signal should be -26 dBm minimum.
26 dBm
5-15. 50 MHz IF Amplifier (A12)
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION: The 50 MHz amplifier provides about 12 dB of gain. These tests verify proper operation of the bandpass filter and the 44 and 47 MHz traps.
EQUIPMENT: Service Kit
PROCEDURE:
1. Connect the output of the A12 assembly to the Spectrum Analyzer RF INPUT. Adjust the BPF ADJ capacitors for maximum 50 MHz signal on the analyzer CRT. Minimum signal level is -15 dBm.
-15 dBm
2. Adjust C8 and C17 for minimum signal at 44 MHz and C10 for minimum signal at 47 MHz. Check for minimum separation of 60 dB between the 50 MHz signal and the 44 and 47 MHz signals over the entire range of the analyzer’s third local oscillator signal.
Separation 60 dB
5-16. Second Converter (All)
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION: The second converter contains a three-stage amplifier (about 20 dB gain) and a diode quad mixer. These tests verify proper operation of the assembly.
EQUIPMENT:
Service Kit
RF Voltmeter
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the All assembly and reinstall it using an extender board. Check the output from the amplifier to the mixer (Test Point 1) with the RF Voltmeter. Level should be 800 mVrms minimum.
800 mVrms
2. Check the 200 MHz output with the RF Voltmeter (terminated in 50 ohms). Minimum level should be -22 dBm.
-22 dBm
5-4
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
ADJUSTMENTS
5-17. 200 MHz IF Amplifier (A10)
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 3.
DESCRIPTION: The A10 assembly contains a two-stage variable gain (about 20 dB) amplifier and a bandpass filter.
These tests verify proper operation of the assembly.
Figure 5-3. 200 MHz IF Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
VHF Signal Generator
Service Kit
0 - 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer
DC Power Supply
PROCEDURE:
1. Apply a -10 dBm, 100 MHz, CW signal to the 200 MHz input (green cable) on the A10 assembly. Connect the 200
MHz output of the A10 assembly to the RF INPUT of the 0 - 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer and tune the analyzer to 100 MHz. Adjust A10C5 for minimum response on the analyzer CRT.
2. Change the input signal to 150 MHz and adjust A10C4 for minimum 150 MHz response.
3. Change the input signal to 200 MHz, center the signal on the 0 - 1250 Spectrum Analyzer CRT and adjust the bandpass filter (C3, C5 and C6) for maximum response. Reduce the output of the signal generator to -35 dBm.
The signal level displayed on the 0 1250 Spectrum Analyzer should be -18 dBm (17 dB gain).
4. Remove the A8 assembly and apply a 23 volt dc level to the ALC Test Point (A10TP3) on the A10 assembly.
Tune the ALC RANGE ADJ for minimum signal level out as observed on the 0 - 1250 Spectrum Analyzer CRT.
5-5
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
ADJUSTMENTS
5-18. Third Converter (A9)
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 3.
DESCRIPTION: Third converter assembly contains a three-stage (about 20 dB gain) amplifier, a diode quad mixer and a
120 MHz low pass filter. These tests verify proper operation of the assembly.
Figure 5-4. Third Converter Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
RF Voltmeter
0 - 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer
Service Kit
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the A9 assembly and reinstall it using an extender board from the service kit. Check the amplifier output at Test Point 3 (Q1-c). Signal level should be 800 mVrms minimum.
800 mVrms
2. Connect the output of the A9 assembly to the analyzer RF INPUT. Signal level should be --32 dBm minimum.
-32 dBm
3. Connect the output of the A9 assembly to the RF INPUT of the 0 - 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer and verify that frequencies above 120 MHz are sharply attenuated.
5-6
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
ADJUSTMENTS
5-19. ALC/Video Amplifier
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 3.
DESCRIPTION: The A8 assembly contains two integrated circuit RF amplifiers and a leveling circuit which controls the gain of the 200 MHz IF amplifier. These tests verify proper operation of the assembly.
Figure 5-5. ALC/Video Amplifer Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
Power Supply
Service KIT
Power Meter
3.7 Volt Zener Diode
PROCEDURE:
1. Connect the 3.7 volt zener diode across the external power supply output terminals. Connect the negative power supply lead to the CCW lead of the output vernier control and the positive lead to ground.
2. Set the OUTPUT LEVEL dBm TENS to +10 (UNITS and TENTHS to 0) and connect the power meter to the RF
OUTPUT. Set the analyzer to ZERO scan at 100 MHz.
3. Set OUTPUT LEVEL UNITS to -9 and TENTHS to -1. Adjust the power supply for a 0 dBm output from the Model
8443A/B as read on the power meter.
4. Set OUTPUT LEVEL dBm UNITS to -10 and TENTHS to 0. Adjust R16, 0 dB ADJ, on the A8 assembly for a 0 dBm output from the Model 8443A/B as read on the power meter.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until further adjustment is unnecessary.
6. Disconnect the external power supply and set OUTPUT LEVEL dBm UNITS to -9 and TENTHS to -1.
7. Adjust -1 dB ADJ (R14) on the A8 assembly for a 0 dBm output from the Model 8443A/B as read on the power meter.
8. Set OUTPUT LEVEL dBm UNITS to -10 and TENTHS to 0. Verify 0 dBm output with the power meter.
5-7
Section 5 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
ADJUSTMENTS
5-20. Reference Oscillator (A4) (8443A Only)
REFERENCE: Service Sheet 7.
DESCRIPTION: This procedure allows adjustment of the reference oscillator (A4) in comparison with an external frequency standard.
Figure 5-6. Reference Oscillator Test Setup
EQUIPMENT:
1 MHz Frequency Standard
Oscilloscope
PROCEDURE: After warmup (seven continuous days of operation or 72 hours of operation after an off time of 72 hours or
adjust the vertical sensitivity for full scale sinusoid. Adjust the reference oscillator COARSE and FINE controls until the display moves in either direction no faster than one division in five seconds.
5-8
Section 5
Hewlett-Packard Model 8443A/B
Tracking Generator/Counter
Serial No.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 5-1. Adjustment Test Record
Tests Performed by
Date
5-13. Power Supplies Checks and Adjustments.
+24 volt supply at 100 Vac at 115 Vac at 130 Vac
Power Supply:
+24V
+20V
+5.8V
Measured Level
-12V
+175V
5-14. First Converter (A13) Checks and Adjustments.
Measured ripple
Test
4
5
6
5-15. 50 MHz IF Amplifier (A12) Checks and Adjustments.
275 mVrms
480 mVrms
-26 dBm
Test
1
2
5-16. Second Converter (All) Checks and Adjustments.
Test
1
2
5-18. Third Converter (A9) Checks and Adjustments.
Test
1
2
-15 dBm
Separation 60 dB
800 mVrms
-22 dBm
800 mVrms
-32 dBm
5-9/5-10
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SECTION VI
REPLACEABLE PARTS
6-1. This section contains information relative to ordering replacement parts and assemblies.
6-2. Table 6-1 provides correct stock numbers for use
when ordering printed circuit board assemblies on an exchange basis.
6-3. Table 6-2 provides an index of reference
designations and abbreviations used in the preparation of manuals by Hewlett-Packard.
6-4. Table 6-3 identifies parts by reference designations.
6-5. Table 6-4 provides code number identification of
manufacturers.
Table 6-1. Part Numbers for Assembly Exchange Orders
Assembly
A1 Low Frequency Counter
A2 0-120 dB Attenuator
A3 0-12 dB Attenuator
A6 High Frequency Decade
A8 ALC Video Amplifier
A10 200 MHz IF Amplifier
A11 Second Converter
A12 50 MHz IF Amplifier
A13 First Converter
A14 Sense Amplifier
A15 Rectifier
New
Pat No.
08443-60071
08443-60001
08443-60002
08443-60048
084.43-60047
08443-60046
08443-60045
08443-60044
08443-60043
08443-60042
08443-60041
08443-60077
08443-60015
08443-60014
Exchange No.
08443-60075
08443-60102
08443-60103
08443-60104
08443-60105
08443-60106
08443-60107
08443-60108
08443-60109
08443-60110
08443-60111
08443-60115
08443-60113
08443-60114
6-1
Section 6
Table 6-2. Reference Designators and Abbreviations used in Parts List
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
A
B
BT
C
CP
CR
DL
DS
E
= assembly
- capacitor
= diode
= device signaling (lamp)
= misc electronic part
A
AFC
= amperes
= automatic frequency control
AMPL = amplifier
BFO = beat frequency osclla- tor
BE CU = beryllium copper
BH = binder head
BP = bandpass
BRS = brass
BWO = backward wave oscillator
CCRW = counterclockwise
CER = ceramic
CMO = cabinet mount only
COEF = coefficient
COM = common
COMP = composition
COMPL = complete
CONN = connector
CP = cadmium plate
CRT = cathode-ray tube
CW = clockwise
DEPC = deposited carbon
DR = drive
ELECT = electrolytic
ENCAP = encapsulated
EXT = external
F
FH
= farads
= flat head
FIL H = Fillister head
FXD = fixed
G = giga (109)
GE = germanium
GL = glas
GRD = ground(ed)
F
FL
J
K
L
LS
M
MK
MP
H
HDW
HEX
HG
HR
Hz
IF
IMPG
INCD
INCL
INS
INT
K
REFERENCE DESIGNATORS
= fuse
= Filter
= Jack
= relay
= inductor
= loud speaker
= meter
= microphone
= mechanical part
P
Q
R
RT
S
T
TB
TP
U
ABBREVIATIONS
= plug
= transistor
= resistor
= thermistor
= switch
= transformer
= test point
= integrated circuit
= henries
= hardware
= hexagonal
= mercury
= hour(s)
= Hertz
= intermediate freq
= impregnated
= Incandescent
= Include(s)
= insulation(ed)
= internal
= kilo =1000
LH
LIN
=
= left hand linear taper
LK WASH = lock washer
LOG
LPF
= logarithmic taper
= low pass filter
M
MEG
= milli = 10-3
= meg = 106
MET FLM = metal film
MET OX = metallic oxide
MFR = manufacturer
MHz
MINAT
MOM
MOS
MTO
MY
=
=
=
= mega Hertz miniature momentary metalized substrate
= mounting
= “mylar"
N/O = normally open
NOM = nominal
NPO = negative positive zero (zero ternperature coefficient)
NPN = negative-positive-
= negative
NRFR = not recommended for field replacement
NSR = not separately replaceable
OBD = order by description
OH
OX
P
PC
= oval head
= oxide
= peak
= printed circuit
PF = picofarads = 10-12
= farads
PH BRZ = phosphor bronze
PHL
PIV
= Phillips
= peak inverse voltage
PNP = positive-negativepositive
P/O = part of
POLY = polystrene
PORC = porcelain
POS = position(s)
POT = potentiometer
PP = peak-to-peak
PT = point
PWV = peak working voltage
N
N/C
NE
NI PL
= nano (10-9)
= normally closed
= neon
= nickel plate
RECT = rectifier
RF = radio frequency
RH = round head or right hand
6-2
VR
W
X
Y
Z
V = vacuum tube.
= neon
= photocell
= voltage
= regulator
= cable
= socket
= crystal
= tuned cavity.
network
W/
W
WIV
WW
W/O
TA
TD
TGL
THD
TI
TOL
TRIM
RMO
RMS
RWV
= rack mount only
= root-mean square
= reverse working
S-B
SCR
SE
SECT voltage
= slow-blow
= screw
= selenium
= section(s)
SEMICON = semiconductor
SI
SIL
SL
= silicon
= silver
= slide
SPG
SPL
SST
SR
STL
= spring
= special
= Stainless steel
= split ring
= steel
= tantalum
= time delay
= toggle
= thread
= titanium
= tolerance
= trimmer
TWT = traveling wave tube
µ = micro = 10-6
VAR
VDCW
= variable
= dc working volts
= with
= watts
= working Inverse voltage
= wire wound
= without
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
A1A1DS8
A1A1DS8
A1A1L1
A1A1L2
A1A1L3
A1A1Q1
A1A1Q2
A1A1Q3
A1A1Q4
A1A1Q5
A1A1R1
A1A1R2
A1A1R3
A1A1R4
A1A1R5
A1A1R6
A1A1R7
A1A1CR4
A1A1CR5
A1A1DS1
A1A1DS2
A1A1DS2
A1A1DS2
A1A1DS3
A1A1DS3
A1A1DS4
A1A1SD4
A1A1SD5
A1A1SD5
A1A1SD6
A1A1SD6
A1A1DS7
A1A1DS7
A1A1R8
A1A1R9
A1A1R10
A1A1R11
A1A1R12
A1A1R13
A1MP7
A1MP8
A1MP9
A1MP10
A1MP11
A1MP12
A1MP13
A1W1
A1W1
A1A1C1
A1A1C2
A1A1C3
A1A1C4
A1A1CR1
A1A1CR1
A1A1CR2
A1A1CR3
A10P1
A1MP2
A1MP3
A1MP3
A1MP3
A1MP3
A1MP3
A1MP3
A1MP3
A1MP4
A1MP5
A1MP5
A1MP5
A1MP6
A1MP6
A1MP7
1970-0042
1200-0405
9100-1643
9100-1616
9140-0051
1854-0022
1854-0071
1854-0022
1854-0022
1854-0022
0683-6825
0683-6825
0683-3025
0683-6825
0683-3025
0683-6825
0683-3025
1901-0025
1901-0025
1970-0042
1200-0405
1970-0042
1200-0405
1970-0042
1200-0405
1970-0042
1200-0405
1970-0042
1200-0405
1970-0042
1200-0405
1970-0042
1200-0435
0683-6825
0683-3025
0683-6825
0683-6825
0683-6825
0683-1025
08443-00009
08443-00016
08443-00042
08443-00007
08443-00008
08443-00010
08443-00011
08443-00015
08443-4D004
08443-03044
08443-60039
0380-0885
1251-1887
1400-0818
0400-0009
3160-0231
0400-0009
0400-0009
0400-0009
0400-0009
0400-0009
0400-0009
0400-0009
08443-60064
08443-60037
0160-2143
0160-2143
0160-2930
0180-0197
0180-0137
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0025
Reference
Designation
A1
HP Part Number
08443-60071
Qty Description
1
4
43
2
6
6
12
1
30
8
8
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
2
1
1
1
1
1 BOARD ASSY:LOW-FREOUENCY COUNTER
(8443A ONLY)
COVER:TOP COUNTER BOX
BRACKET:RETAINING
COVER BOX
5
COVER:BOTTOM C-BOX
PANEL:REAR C-BOX
BRACKET MOUNTING, LEFT C-BOX
BRACKET MOUNTING, RIGHT C-BOX
SCREEN:NIXIE SHIELD
BRACKET:SCREEN
GUIDE:CONNECTOR BOARD
BOARD ASSY:CONNECTOR
STANDOFF:CAPTIVE 0.156" LG 4-43 THREAD
CONNECTOR:PC 44 CONTACTS (2 X 22)
CLAMP:MOTOR 0.750" TO #6 MTG HOLES
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4" DIA HOLE
FAN BLADE:2.500" DIA
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4" DIA HOLE
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4" DIA HOLE
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4" DIA HOLE
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4“ DIA HOLE
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4" DIA HOLE
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4" DIA HOLE
GROMMET:VINYL FITS 1/4” DIA HOLE
CABLE ASSY
BOARD ASSY:LOW FREQ COUNTER
C:FXD CER 2000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 2000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 2.2 UF +80-10% 20VDCW
C:FXD CER 100 UF +80-20% 10VDCW
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/IV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/IV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/IV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/IV
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5700 SERIES
8
7
13
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5700 SERIES
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5700 SERIES
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5700 SERIES
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5700 SERIES
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5730 SERIES
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5700 SERIES
TUBE:NUMERICAL INDICATOR
SOCKET:TUBE FOR 5700 SERIES
COIL/CHOKE 300 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 1.50 UH 10%
COIL:FXD 400 UHY
TSTRI:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
R:FXD COMP 6800 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6800 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 3000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6500 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 3000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6800 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 3000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6800 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 3000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6800 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6800 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6800 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
See introduction to this section for ordering information
6-3
Mfr
Code Mfr Part Number
28480
83594
83594
28480
99800
28480
07263
28480
07263
07263
07263
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
07263
07263
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
83594
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01536
01538
01538
01538
01538
01538
01538
28480
28480
91418
91418
91418
56289
56289
07263
07263
07263
28480
28480
29480
28483
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
71785
91506
01538
04870
B-5750-S
SK 207
9100-1643
1537-16
9140-0051
S17843
1854-0071
S17843
S17843
S17843
CB 6825
CB 6825
CB 3025
CB 6825
CB 3025
CB 6825
CB 3025
FD 2387
FD 2387
B-5750-S
SK 207
B-5750-S
SK 207
B-5750-S
SK 207
B-5750-S
SK 207
B-5750-S
SK 207
B-5750-S
SK 207
B-5750-5
SK 207
CB 6825
CB 3025
CB 6825
CB 6825
CB 6825
CB 3025
08443-00009
08443-00016
08443-00042
08443-00007
08443-00008
08443-00010
08443-00011
08443-00015
08443-40004
08443-00044
08443-60039
DBD
252-22-30-340
2601-20
G250
2-1/2 LMF .0795
G250
G250
G250
G250
G250
G250
G250
08443-60064
08443-60037
TYPE B
TYPE B
TA
1500225X9020A2-DVS
1500107X0010R2-DVS
FD 2387
FD 2387
FD 2387
Section 6
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
0683-3025
0683-3025
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0116
1820-0116
1820-0116
1820-0116
1120-0116
1120-0116
1820-0116
1820-0077
1820-0117
1820-0119
1820-0119
1820-0119
1820-0119
1820-0119
1B20-0174
08443-60070
0180-0155
0160-3451
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0040
1901-0049
1901-0040
1901-0040
1902-3094
3140-0487
1853-0027
1853-0027
1953-0027
1853-0027
1854-0045
1853-0020
1854-0071
0683-0335
0684-3311
0684-3311
0698-7255
0698-7255
0698-7239
0698-7253
08443-60001
A3W2
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5C1
A5C2
ASC3
A1A2R5
A1A2R6
A1A2R7
A2
A2
A2W1
A3
A3
A3W1
A5C4
A5C5
A5C6
A1A2CR4
A1A2CR4
A1A2CR7
A1A2CR8
A1A2M1
A1A2Q1
A1A2Q2
A1A2Q3
A1A2Q4
A1A2Q5
A1A2Q6
A1A2Q7
A1A2R
A1A2R2
A1A2R3
A1A2R4
A1A1U13
A1A1U14
A1A1U15
A1A1U16
A1A1U17
A1A1U18
A1A1U19
A1A1U20
A1A1U21
A1A1U22
A1A2
A1A2C1
A1A2C2
A1A2CR1
A1A2CR2
A1A2CR3
A1A2CR4
A1A1R14
A1A1R15
A1A1U1
A1A1U2
A1A1U3
A1A1U4
A1A1U5
A1A1U6
A1A1U7
A1A1U8
A1A1U9
A1A1U10
A1A1U11
A1A1U12
08443-60102
08443-60002
05443-60049
08443-60050
0960-0079
06443-60048
0163-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2218
0180-0229
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
4
1
2
2
1
1
23
A5C7
A5C8
A5C9
A5C10
A5C11
0180-0116
0160-2055
0180-1735
0160-2139
0160-2055
5
3
10
Description
R:FXD COMP 3000 OHM 51 114w
R:FXD COMP 3330 OHM 5S 1(/4
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECODER-DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECOOER-DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECODER-DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECODER-DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECODER-DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECODER-DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECODER-DIVIDER
IC:4-BIT BUFF STORE GATED OUTS
IC:4-BIT BUFF STORE GATED OUTS
IC:4-BIT BUFF STORE GATED OUTS
IC:4-BIT BUFF STORE GATED OUTS
IC:4-BIT BUFF STORE GATED OUTS
IC:4-BIT BUFF STORE GATED OUTS
IC:4-BIT BUFF STORE GATED OUTS
IC:TTL DUAL D F/F
IC:TTL DEC. COUNTER W/ZERO SUP.
IC:TTL BLANKING DECADE COUNTER
IC:TTL BLANKING DECADE COUNTER
IC:TTL BLANKING DECADE COUNTER
IC:TTL BLANKING DECADE COUNTER
IC:TTL BLANKING DECADE COUNTER
IC:TTL HEX INVERTER
COOLING FAN ASSY
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 20% 20VDCw
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
DIODE:SILICON 30MA 30WV
DIODE:SILICON 30MA 30WV
DIODE:SILICON 30MA 30WV
DIODE:SILICON 30MA 30WV
DIODE:SILICON 50 PIV
DIODE:SILICON 30MA 30WV
DIODE:SILICON 30MA 30WV
DIODE BREAKDOWN:5.11V 2%
MOTOR:DC 10-15 VDC
TSTR:SI PNP
TSTR:SI PNP
TSTR:SI PNP
TSTR:SI PNP
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI PNP (SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN (SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
R:FXD COMP 3.3 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 300 OHM 10% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 300 OHM 10% 1/4W
R:FXD FLM 6.19 OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD FLM 6.19 OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD FLM 1.33K OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 2% 1/8W
ATTENUATOR ASSY:10 DB
NOT FIELD REPAIRABLE
REBUILT 08443-60001,REQUIRES EXCHANGE
ATTENUATOR ASSY:1 DB
NOT FIELD REPAIRABLE
CABLE ASSY:INTERCONNECT, BROWN
CABLE ASSY:OUTPUT. RED
OSCILLATOR-CRYSTAL ASSY: 1.0 MHZ
(8443A ONLY)
BOARD ASSY:TIME BASE
(8443A ONLY)
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER MICA 1000 PF 5%
C:FXD ELECT 33 UF 10% 10VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 6.8 UF 10% 33VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.22 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
See Introduction to this section for ordering Information
6-4
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
56289
56289
56289
28480
28480
56289
56289
28480
91418
56289
Mfr
Code Mfr Part Number
28400
28480
01295
28480
28480
28480
28480
20480
28480
01295
28480
56289
56289
07263
07263
07263
07263
01121
01121
28400
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
284B0
28480
28480
07263
07263
28480
95984
37263
07263
07263
07263
04713
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
1901-0049
FDG1088
FDG1088
1902-3094
1AD20
S1554S
51554S
5 1554S
51554S
2N956
1853-0020
1854-0071
CB 0335
CB 3311
CB 3311
0690-7255
0698-7255
0698-7239
0698-7253
08443-60001
CB 3025
CB 3025
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1820-0092
1920-0092
1920-0092
1820-0016
1820-0116
1820-0116
1820-0016
1820-0116
1820-0116
1820-0016
S97474N
1820-0117
1920-0119
1820-0119
1820-0119
1920-0119
1820-0119
SN7404N
08443-60070
1500225X0020A2-DYS
C023B101F103ZS25-CDH
FDG1088
FDG1088
FDG1088
FDG1088
08443-60102
08443-60002
08443-60049
08443-60050
0960-0079
08443-60048
C023F101F103ZS22-CDH
C023F101F103ZS22-CDH
C023F101F103ZS22-CDH
C023F101F103ZS22-CDH
0160-2218
0180-0229
150D68X903582-DYS
C023F101F301ZS22-CDH
0180-1735
TYPE B
C023F101F103ZS22-CDH
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A5S1
A5TP1
A5TP2
A5TP3
A5TP4
A5TP5
A5TP6
A5U1
A5U2
A5U3 A
A5U3 B
A5U4
A5U5A
A5U5B
A5W1
A6
A6
A5R14
A5R15
A5R16
A5R17
A5R18
A5R19
A5R20
A5R21
A5R22
A5R23
A5R24
A5R25
A5R26
A5R27
A5R28
A5R29
A6C1
A6C2
A6C3
A6C4
A6C5
A6C6
A6C7
A5Q4
A5Q5
A5Q6
A5Q7
A5R1
A5R2
A5R3
A5R4
A5R5
A5R6
A5R7
A5R8
A5R9
A5R10
A5R11
A5R12
A5R13
A5L1
A5L2
A5L3
A514
A5L5
A5Q1
A5Q2
A5Q3
A5C12
A5C13
A5C14
A5CR1
A5CR2
A5CR3
A5CR4
A5J1
A5J2
0757-0420
0683-1025
0698-3441
0757-0438
0757-0159
0683-1025
0683-1025
0683-1025
0683-1025
0683-1025
0683-1025
0683-1025
0683-6225
0698-3441
0757-1094
0698-3441
3101-1213
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
1820-0054
1820-0304
1820-0412
1820-0412
1820-0412
1820-0412
182D-0412
08443-60051
08443-60047
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
0757-0438
0757-0438
0683-5135
0683-1005
0683-7525
0757-0438
0757-0416
0698-0084
0757-0394
0757-0416
0698-3441
0757-0438
0698-0084
0180-1735
0160-3453
0160-2055
1901-0025
1910-0016
1901-0025
1901-0025
1250-1195
1250-1195
9100-1629
9100-1643
9100-1629
9100-1629
9100-1622
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
0160-2327
0160-2327
0180-0376
0180-0197
0160-2930
0160-2930
0160-2327
Description
Mfr
Code
9
5
9
6
1
1
16
10
8
7
2
2
5
1
4
1
7
5
2
1
1
1
14
1
1
11
6
C:FXD ELECT 0.22 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:GERMANIUM 100MA/0.85V 60PIV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERlES
COIL/CHOKE 47.0 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 300 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 47.0 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 47.0 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 24.0 UH 5%
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN[SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 51K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 10 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 7590 OHM 52 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 750 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 1333 OHM 51 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM L8 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1000 OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD COMP 1330 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 6200 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.47K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM 1% 18W
SWITCH:TOGGLE DPST-DB SUB-MINIATURE
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
IC:TTL OUAD 2-INPT NAND GATE
IC:TTL J-K M/S F/F W/CLOCKED & INPTS
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECADE DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECADE DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECADE DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECADE DIVIDER
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DECADE DIVIDER
CABLE ASSY:TIME BA5E INPUT
BOARD ASSY:RF DECADE
(8443A ONLY)
C:FXD CER 1033 PF 20 100IVDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 202 100VDC1
C:FXD ELECT 0.47 UF 1% 35DVCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 102 20VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 1000VUCW
C:FXD CER 0.31 UF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 20% 100VLCW
See introduction to this section for ordering information
6-5
81640
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01295
01295
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
56289
07263
93332
07263
07263
98291
98291
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
96733
96733
56289
56289
91418
91418
96733
Mfr Part Number
0757-0420
CB 1025
0698-3441
0757-0438
0757-0159
CB 1025
CB 1025
CB 1025
CB 1025
CB 1025
CB 1025
CB 1025
CB 6225
0698-3441
0757-1094
0698-3441
T8001
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
SN7400N
SN7472N
1820-0412
1820-0412
1820-0412
1820-0412
1820-0412
08443-60051
08443-60047
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
0757-0438
0757-0438
CB 5135
CB 1005
CB 7525
0757-0438
0757-0416
0698-0084
0757-0394
0757-0416
0698-3441
0757-0438
0698-0084
0180-1735
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
FD 2387
D2361
FD 2387
FD 2387
52-053-0000
52-053-0000
9100-1629
9100-1643
9100-1629
9100-1629
9100-1622
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
B104BX102M
B104BX102M
150D474X9035A2-DYS
150D225X9020A2-DYS
TA
TA
B104BX102M
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A6Q3
A6Q4
A6Q5
A6Q6
A6Q7
A6R1
A6R2
A6R3
A6L5
A6L6
A6L7
A6L8
A6L9
A6L10
A6L11
A6Q1
A6Q2
A6J1
A6J1
A6J2
A6J2
A6L1
A6L2
A6L3
A6L4
A6CR11
A6CR12
A6CR13
A6CR14
A6CR15
A6CR16
A6CR17
A6CR18
A6R4
A6R5
A6R6
A6R7
A6R8
A6R9
A6R10
A6C25
A6C26
A6C27
A6C28
A6C29
A6C30
A6C31
A6CR1
A6CR2
A6CR3
A6CR4
A6CR5
A6CR6
A6CR7
A6CR8
A6CR9
A6CR10
A6C8
A6C9
A6C10
A6C11
A6C12
A6C13
A6C14
A6C15
A6C16
A6C17
A6C18
A6C19
A6C20
A6C21
A6C22
A6C23
A6C24
0160-2327
0180-0197
0180-0376
0180-0197
0180-0116
0160-2930
0160-2930
0160-2327
0180-0376
0180-0197
0180-0376
0160-2930
0180-0197
0180-0376
0180-0197
0160-2327
0180-0197
0160-2327
0160-2327
0160-2327
0160-2327
0180-0197
0160-2204
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0518
1901-0518
1902-0518
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0047
1902-3024
1901-0047
1901-0518
1901-0025
1902-0048
1902-0048
1901-0179
1901-0179
1901-0039
1901-0039
1250-1194
08443-20011
1250-1194
08443-20011
9100-1616
9100-1616
9100-1630
9100-1623
9100-1616
9100-1616
9100-1616
9100-1611
9100-1611
9100-1611
1854-0345
1854-0345
1854-0071
1853-0020
1854-0019
1854-0019
1854-0019
0698-7229
0757-0395
0757-0442
0698-7229
0757-0395
0757-0442
0757-0438
0757-0438
0757-0438
0757-0438
Description
Mfr
Code
3
6
3
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
21
2
1
9
4
4
7
6
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.47 UF 1% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT Z.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 6.8 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
NOT ASSIGNED
C:FXD CER 1000 UF 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.47 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.47 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.31 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.47 UP 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD CER 1033 PP 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10%: 20VDCW
C:FXD MICA 100PF 5%
DIODE JUNCTION:SILICON 20PlV
JUNCTION:SILICON 20PIV
DIDOE:HOT CARRIER
DIODE:HOT CARRIER
DIODE BREAKDOWN:5.11V
JUNCTION:SILICON 20PIV
DIODE JUNCTION:SILICON 20PIV
DIODE JUNCTION:SILICON 20PIV
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 2.87V 5%
DI0DE JUNCTION:SILICON 20PIV
DIODE:HOT CARRIER
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 6.81V 5%
DIODE BREAKDOWN 6.81V 5%
DIODE:SILICON 15WV
DIODE:SILICON 1SWV
DIODE:SILICON 200MA 50WV
DIODE:SILICON 200MA 50WV
CO4NECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
CONNECTOR:RECESS
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
CONNECTOR:RECESS
COIL/CHOKE 1.50 UH 10%
COIL/CHOKE 1.50 UH 10%
C3IL/CHOKE 51.0 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 21.0 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 1.50 UH 10%
COIL/CHOKE 1.50 UH 10%
NOT ASSIGNED
COIL/CHOKE 1.50 UH 10%
COIL:FXD 0.22 UH 20%
COIL:FXD 0.22 UH 20%
COIL:FXD 0.22 UH 20%
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI PNP(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
R:FXD FLM 511 OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 56.2 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.OK OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET 511 OHM 2%1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 56.2 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1%1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
See Introduction to this section for ordering information
6-6
96733
56289
56289
56289
56289
91418
91418
96733
56289
72136
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
28480
28480
07263
04713
04713
96733
56289
56289
56289
91418
56289
56289
56289
96733
56289
96733
96733
96733
28480
28480
28480
28480
98291
28480
98291
28480
99800
99800
28480
99800
99800
99800
99800
28480
28480
28480
80131
80131
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
2B840
28480
20480
28480
Mfr Part Number
B104BX102M
150D225X9020A2-DYS
150D474X9035A2-DYS
150225X902R2-3YST
150D6b85X903532-3S
TA
TA
1537-16
9100-1611
9100-1611
9100-1611
2N5179
2N5179
1854-0071
1853-0020
1854-0019
1854-0019
1854-0019
0698-7229
0757-0395
0757-0442
0698-7229
0757-0395
0757-0442
0757-0438
0757-0438
0757-0438
0757-0438
B104BX102M
150D474X9035A2-DYS
150D225x9020A2-DYS
150D474X903542-DYS
TA
150D225X9020A2-DYS
150D474X9035A2-DYS
150D225X9020A2-DYS
B1046X102M
150D225X902042-DYS
B104BX102M
B104BX102M
B104BX102M
B104BX102M
150D225X9020A2-DYS
RDM15F101J3C
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0518
1901-0518
1902-0518
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0047
SZ10939-26
1901-0047
1901-0518
FD 2387
SZ10939-134
S210939-134
1901-0179
1901-0179
1901-0039
1901-0039
52-045-4610
08443-20011
52-045-4610
08443-20011
1537-16
1537-16
9100-1630
1537-48
1537-16
1537-16
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A7C9
A7C10
A7C11
A7C12
A7C13
A7C14
A7C15
A7C16
A7C17
A7C18
A7C19
A7CR1
A7CR2
A7CR3
A7CR4
A7CR5
A7CR6
A7C1
A7C2
A7C3
A7C4
A7C5
A7C6
A7C7
A7C8
A6U2
A6U3
A6U4
A6U5
A6U6
A6W1
A7
A7
A7CR7
A7CR8
A7CR9
A7CR10
A7CR11
A7CR12
A7CR13
A6R26
A6R27
A6R28
A6R29
A6R30
A6R31
A6R32
A6R33
A6TP1
A6TP2
A6TP3
A6TP3
A6TP4
A6TP5
A6TP6
A6TP7
A6U1
A6R11
A6R12
A6R13
A6R14
A6R15
A6R16
A6R17
A6R18
A6R19
A6R20
A6R21
A6R22
A6R22
A6R23
A6R24
A6R24
A6R25
0757-0280
0757-0438
0698-3151
0698-3151
0698-0083
0757-0405
0698-3434
0698-3444
0698-0083
0757-0279
0757-0405
0698-3434
0757-0416
0698-3435
0757-0416
0698-0083
0757-1001
0698-7236
0698-7236
0698-7236
0757-0442
0698-0083
0757-0274
08443-00041
08443-00041
1250-1194
08443-20011
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
1820-0275
1820-0102
1820-0101
1820-0102
1820-0102
1820-0102
08443-60056
08443-60046
0180-0376
0160-2055
1901-0025
1902-3268
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0159
1901-0025
1901-0025
1910-0016
1910-0016
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0025
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2257
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0180-0197
0180-0197
0180-0197
0180-0098
0180-0116
0160-2139
0160-2143
0180-0116
Description
Mfr
Code
8
3
1
4
1
2
3
5
2
9
2
1
1
1
3
2
8
2
1
2
7
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 13 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.87K OHM 1% /8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.87K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.96K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 162 OHM 1%1 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 34.8 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 316 OHM 1%/ 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.96K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 162 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 34.8 OHM 1% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 18W
R:FXD MET FLM 38.3 OHM 1% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.96K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 56.2 OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD FLM 1K OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD FLM I1K OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD FLM 1K OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% l1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.96K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.21K OHM 1% 1/8W
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
CONNECTOR:RECESS
TERMINAL PIN:SQUARE
TERMINAL PIN:SQUARE
TERMINAL PIN:SQUARE
TERMINAL PIN:SQUARE
IC:ECL TO TTL QUAD 2-INPT OR TRANS
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:J-K FLIP FLOP
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:DIFFERENTIAL AMPL
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:J-K FLIP FLOP
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:J-K FLIP FLOP
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT:J-K FLIP FLOP
CABLE ASSY:TRIGGER GENERATOR COUNTER
MARKER CONTROL ASSY
(8443A ONLY)
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 10 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2.2 UF 10% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT L100 UF 20% 20VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 6.8 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 2000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 6.8 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.47 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE BREAKDOWN:26.1V 5%
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON
DIODE:SILICON 0.75A 400PIV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:GERMANIUM 100MA/0.85V 60PIV
DIODE:GERMANIUM 100MA/0.85V 60PIV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
See Introduction to this section for ordering Information
6-7
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
98291
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
56289
07263
28480
07263
07263
07263
04713
07263
07263
93332
93332
07263
07263
07263
56289
56289
56289
56289
72982
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
91418
91418
56289
Mfr Part Number
0757-0280
0757-0438
0698-3151
0698-3151
0698-0083
0757-0405
0698-3434
0698-3444
0698-0083
0757-0279
0757-0405
0698-3434
0757-0416
0698-3435
0757-0416
0698-0083
0757-1001
0698-7236
0698-7236
0698-7236
0757-0442
0698-0083
0757-0274
08443-00041
08443-00041
52-045-4610
08443-20011
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
MC1019P
MC1013P
MC1034P
MC1013P
MC1013P
MC1013P
08443-60056
08443-60046
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
301-000-00H0-100J
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C03F101F103ZS22-CD-1
1500225X9020A2-DYS
1500225X9020A2-DYS
1500225X9020A2-DYS
150D107X0020S2-DYS
150D685X9035B2-DYS
TYPE B
TYPE B
150D685X9035B2-DYS
150D474X90356A2-DYS
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
FD 2387
1902-3268
FD 2387
FD 2387
FD 2387
SR1358-4
FD 2387
FD 2387
D2361
D2361
FD 2387
FD 2387
PD 2387
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A7R13
A7R14
A7R15
A7R16
A7R17
A7R18
A7R19
A7R20
A7R21
A7R22
A7R23
A7R24
A7R25
A7R26
A7R27
A7R28
A7R29
A7Q17
A7Q18
A7Q19
A7Q20
A7R1
A7R2
A7R3
A7R4
A7R5
A7R6
A7R7
A7R8
A7R9
A7R10
A7R11
A7R12
A7R30
A7R31
A7R32
A7R33
A7R34
A7R35
A7R36
A7R37
A7L7
A7Q1
A7Q2
A7Q3
A7Q4
A7Q5
A7Q6
A7Q7
A7Q8
A7Q9
A7Q10
A7Q11
A7Q12
A7Q13
A7Q14
A7Q15
A7Q16
A7J1
A7J2
A7L1
A7L2
A7L3
A7L4
A7L5
A7L6
A7CR14
A7CR15
A7CR16
A7CR17
A7CR18
A7CR19
A7CR20
A7CR21
A7CR22
0698-0085
0757-0442
0757-0280
0757-0442
0757-0442
0757-0458
0757-0438
0757-0401
0757-0199
0757-0401
0757-0458
0757-0442
0757-0440
0757-0442
0757-0416
0757-0458
0698-3452
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1853-0020
0757-0442
0757-0442
0757-0280
0757-0438
0698-3155
0757-0442
0757-0438
0698-3155
0698-0084
0757-0442
2100-1758
0698-0085
0757-0280
0698-3153
0698-3153
0757-0199
0757-0279
0757-0279
0757-0199
0757-0438
9140-0129
1853-0020
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0221
1854-0221
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1853-0020
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0025
1910-0016
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0025
1910-0016
1250-1195
1250-1195
9140-0129
9100-1629
9100-1629
9100-1629
9140-0129
9140-0129
Description
Mfr
Code
4
4
5
7
7
1
3
3
4
1
4
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:GERMANIUM 100MA/0.85V 60PIV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:GERMANIUM 100MA/0.85V 60PIV
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
COIL:FXD RF 220 UH
COIL/CHOKE 47.3 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 47.0 UH 5%
COIL/CHOKE 47.3 UH 5%
COIL:FXD RF 220 UN
COIL:FXD RF 220 UH
COIL:FXD RF 220 UN
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3732)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(REPL.BY 2N4044)
TSTR:SI NPN(REPL.BY 2N4044)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 4.64K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 4.64K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD WW 1K OHM 5% TYPE V 1W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.61K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.61K OHM 1%1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 100.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 21.5K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 7.50K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 147K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.83K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.83K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 21.5K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 21.5K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
See introduction to this section for ordering information
6-8
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
07263
07263
07263
07263
93332
07263
07263
07263
93332
98291
98291
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
0698-0085
0757-0442
0757-0280
0757-0442
3757-0442
0757-0458
0757-0438
0757-0401
0757-0199
0757-0401
0757-0458
0757-0442
0757-0440
0757-0442
0757-0416
0757-0458
0698-3452
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1853-0020
0757-0442
0757-0442
0757-0280
0757-0438
0698-3155
0757-0442
0757-0438
0698-3155
0698-0084
0757-0442
2100-1758
0698-0085
0757-0280
0698-3153
0698-3153
0757-0199
0757-0279
0757-0279
0757-0199
0757-0438
9142-0129
1853-0020
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0221
1854-0221
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1853-0020
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
FD 2387
FD 2387
FD 2387
FD 2387
D2361
FD 2387
FD 2387
FD 2387
D2361
52-053-0000
52-053-0000
9140-0129
9100-1629
9100-1629
9100-1629
9140-0129
9140-0129
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A8A1C2
A8A1C3
A8A1C4
A8A1C5
A8A1C6
A8A1J1
A8A1R1
A8A1R2
A8A1R3
A8A1R4
A8A1R5
A8A1R6
A8A1R6
A8A1U1
A8A1U2
A9
A9C1
A8R4
A8R5
A8R6
A8R7
A8R8
A8R9
A8R10
A8R11
A8R12
A8R13
A8R14
A8R15
A8R16
A8R17
A8A1
A8A1C1
A9C2
A9C3
A9C4
A9C5
A9C6
A9C7
A8C4
A8C5
A8C6
A8C7
A8J1
A8J2
A8J3
A8L1
A8MP1
A8MP2
A8Q1
A8Q2
A8Q3
A8Q4
A8R1
A8R2
A8R3
A7T4
A7T5
A7U1
A7U2
A8
A8C1
A8C2
A8C3
A7R38
A7R39
A7R40
A7R41
A7R42
A7R43
A7T1
A7T2
A7T3
0683-1045
0683-1315
0683-1315
0683-3035
0683-1135
0683-1025
0683-1135
0683-1135
0757-0459
0757-0440
2100-2489
0683-1025
2100-2517
0683-1315
0443-60022
0160-3060
0160-3060
0180-0160
0160-3060
0160-3036
0160-3036
1251-1556
0683-1005
0683-1005
0699-0001
0757-0394
0757-0421
0698-7222
0757-0289
0757-0401
0698-3260
0757-0442
0757-0199
0757-0279
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
1820-0054
1820-0304
08443-60045
0160-2145
0160-2204
0180-1743
0160-2145
0160-2145
0160-2145
0160-2145
1250-1194
1250-1194
1250-1194
9100-1618
08443-20002
08443-00029
1854-0221
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
0683-1135
0683-1565
0683-1135
5086-7010
5086-7099
08443-60044
0160-2327
0160-2140
0160-2139
0160-2139
0160-3425
0160-2139
0160-2139
Description
Mfr
Code
1
1
1
12
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
1
3
3
5
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
7
1
R:FXD MET FLM 13.3K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FLED MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 464K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM1 % 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 21.5K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
TEST POINT
IC:TTL QUAO 2-INPT NAND GATE
IC:TTL J-K M/S F/F W/CLOCKED & INPTS
VIDEO ASSY:AMPLIFIER ALC
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD MICA 100PF 5%
C:FXD ELECT 0.1 UF k 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
COIL:MOLDED CHOKE 5.60 DH
HOUSING:VIDEO AMPLIFIER
SHIELD:COVER VIDEO AMPLIFIER
TSTR:SI NPN(REPL.BY 2N4044)
TSTR:SI PNP(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSPR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
R:FXD COMP 11K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 15 MEGOHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 11K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 100K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 130 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 130 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 30K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 11K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 11K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 11K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 56.2K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 7.50K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:VAR FLM 5K OHM 10% LIN 1/2W
R:FX0 COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:VAR FLM 50K OHM 10% LIN 1/2W
R:FXD COMP 130 OHM 5% 1/4W
BOARD ASSY:VIDEO AMPLIFIER
C:FXD CER 0.1 UF 23% 25VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.1 UF 20% 25VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 22 UF 20% 35VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.1 UF 23% 25VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 200VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 200VDCW
CONNECTOR:SINGLE CONTACT
R:FXD COMP 10 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 10 OHM 5%1/4W
R:FXD COMP 2.71 OHM 10% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 825 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD FLM 261 OHM 2% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
MC:POWER AMP 130 MHZ
MC:PRE-AMP 2.1-100 MHZ
CONVERTER ASSY:THIRD
C:FXD CER 1000 PF 20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 470 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF ++80-20% 1000VDCW
C FXD CER 33 PF St 500VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
See: Introduction to this section for ordering information
56289
28480
56289
28480
28480
00779
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
01121
28480
56289
91418
91418
91418
91418
98291
98291
98291
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01295
01295
28480
91418
72136
56289
28480
28480
28480
96733
91418
91418
91418
72982
91418
91418
Mfr Part Number
CB 1045
CB 1315
CB 1315
CB 3035
CB 1135
CB 1025
CB 1135
CB 1135
0757-0459
0757-0440
2100-2489
CB 1025
2100-2517
CB 1315
08443-60022
3C42A-CML
3C42A-CML
0180-0160
3042A-CML
0160-3036
0160-3036
2-330808-8
CB 1005
CB 1105
EB 27G1
0757-0394
0757-0421
0698-7222
0751-0289
0757-0401
0698-3260
0757-0442
0757-0199
0157-0279
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
08443-00041
SN7400N
SN7472N
08443-60045
TA
R0M15F101J3C
150D104X9035A2-DYS
TA
TA
TA
TA
52-045-4610
52-045-4610
52-045-4610
9100-1618
08443-20002
08443-00029
1854-0221
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
CB 1135
CB 1565
CB 1135
1820-0267
1820-0403
08443-60044
B104BX102M
TYPE B
TYPE B
TYPE B
301-000- 2G-330J
TYPE B
TYPE B
6-9
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A9W2
A9A1
A9A1CR1
A9A1CR2
A9A1CR3
A9A1CR4
A9A1J1
A9A1R1
A9A1R2
A9A1R3
A9A1T1
A9A1T2
A9A1T3
A9A1T4
A9A1
A9A1
A9A1
A9A1
A9A1
A9A2
A9A2P1
A9A2
A9A2
A9A2
A9R3
A9R4
A9R5
A9R6
A9R7
A9R8
A9R9
A9R10
A9R11
A9R12
A9R13
A9R14
A9R15
A9R16
A9T1
A9T2
A9W1
A9L3
A9L4
A9L5
A9Q1
A9Q2
A9Q3
A9R1
A9R2
A9C8
A9C9
A9C10
A9C11
A9C12
A9J1
A9J1
A9L1
A9L2
1250-0828
0698-3435
0698-3438
0698-3438
08552-6024
08553-6012
08553-6012
08552-6024
0340-0038
0340-0039
08443-00031
08443-00037
08443-30038
08443-60006
1250-0880
08443-00034
08443-00035
08553-0024
0160-2139
0160-2260
0163-2139
0160-2139
0160-2139
1250-1194
08443-20011
9140-0158
9100-2248
9140-0158
9100-2247
9140-0158
1854-0247
1854-0345
1854-0345
0757-0398
0757-0403
0757-0398
0757-0428
0698-0084
0757-0346
0757-0416
0698-3444
0698-3431
0757-0416
0698-3444
0757-0419
0757-0422
0698-3429
0757-1060
0757-0416
08552-6018
08552-6018
08443-60058
08443-60057
08443-60005
5080-0271
Description
Mfr
Code
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
4
1
4
4
2
3
6
1
5
3
3
3
2
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 13 PF 5% 503VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 220 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
CONNECTOR:RECESS
COIL:FXD RF 1 UH 10%
COIL/CHOKE 0.12 UH 10%
COIL:FXD RF 1 UH 10%
COIL:FXD RF 0.10 UH 10%
COIL:FXD RF 10H 10%
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
R:FXD MET FLM 75 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 121 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD 4FT- FLM 75 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM1.62K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 316 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 23.7 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 316 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 681 OHM 1%t 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 909 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 19.6 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 196 OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-RED)
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-RED)
CABLE ASSY:RF. GREEN
CABLE ASSY:RF. VIOLET
MIXER ASSY:THIRD
DIODE:SILICON MATCHED QUAD
PART OF A9A1CR1
PART OF A9A1CR1
PART OF A9A1CR1
CONNECTOR:RF 50-OHM SCREW ON TYPE
R:FXD MET FLM 38.3 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 147 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 147 OHM 1% 1/8W
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-YELLOW)
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-BLUE)
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-BLUE)
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-YELLOW)
FEEDTHRU:TERMINAL
INSULATOR:BUSHING
SHIELD:COVER THIRD MIXER
SHIELD:CAN THIRD MIXER
INSULATOR:THIRD MIXER
FILTER ASSY:120 MHZ
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE
SHIELD:COVER 120 MHZ
SHIELD:CAN 120 MHZ
INSULATOR:SECOND MIXER
See introduction to this section for ordering information
98291
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
98291
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
91418
72982
91418
91418
91418
98291
28480
99800
82142
99800
28480
99800
28480
80131
80131
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
50-043-4610
0698-3435
0698-3438
0698-3438
08552-6024
08553-6012
08553-6012
08552-6024
0340-0038
0340-0039
08443-00031
08443-00037
08443-00038
08443-60006
50-046-0000
08443-00034
08443-00035
08553-0024
TYPE B
301-000-C0G0 130J
TYPE B
TYPE B
TYPE B
52-045-4610
08443-20011
1025-20
09-4416-2K
1025-20
9100-2247
1025-20
1854-0247
2N5179
2N5179
0757-0398
0757-0403
0757-0398
0757-0428
0698-0084
0757-0346
0757-0416
0698-3444
0698-3431
0757-0416
0698-3444
0757-0419
0757-0422
0698-3429
0757-1060
0757-0416
08552-6018
08552-6018
08443-60058
08443-60057
08443-60005
5080-0271
6-10
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A10TP1
A10W1
A10A1
A10A1C1
A10A1C2
A10A1C3
A10A1C4
A10A1C5
A10A1IC6
A10A1C7
A10A1C8
A10A1C9
A10A1J1
A10A1J1
A10A1J1
A10A1L1
A10A1L2
A10L4
A10L5
A10L6
A10L7
A10L8
A10L9
A10L10
A10Q1
A10Q2
A10R1
A10R2
A10R3
A1OR4
AI10RS
A10R6
A10R7
A10A1L3
A10A1
A10A1
A10A1
A10A1
A11
A10C6
A10C7
A10C8
A10C9
A10C10
A10C11
A10C12
A10C13
A10C14
A10C15
A10C16
A10C17
A10CR1
A10CR2
A10L1
A10L2
A10L3
A9A2C1
A9A2C2
A9A2C3
A9A2C4
A9A2C5
A9A2L1
A9A2L2
A9A2L3
A9A2L4
A9A2L5
A9A2L6
A10
A10C1
A10C2
A10C3
A10C4
A10C5
0160-2145
0160-2244
1902-3104
1902-3104
9100-1611
9100-1610
9100-1610
9140-0141
9140-0158
9100-3101
9100-1612
9140-0141
9140-0158
9140-0120
1854-0345
1854-0345
0698-3441
0757-0346
0757-0417
0683-3025
0698-3441
0757-0346
0757-0417
08443-00041
08443-60058
08443-60007
0160-3121
0160-2266
0121-0457
0160-2257
0121-0457
0121-0457
0160-2013
0160-2016
0160-0949
0160-2016
0160-2013
08553-6018
9100-22417
9100-2247
9100-2247
9100-2247
08553-6018
08443-60043
0160-2204
0160-2140
0160-2140
0121-0446
0121-0105
0160-2140
0150-0050
0160-2140
0160-2140
0122-0285
0160-2140
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0160-2266
0160-3121
1250-1194
2190-0057
0590-0060
08553-6018
08553-6017
08553-6018
08443-00039
08553-0026
08553-0027
0380-0810
08443-60042
Description
Mfr
Code
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
4
1
3
3
1
3
1
1
29
1
2
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
C:FXD MICA 39 PF 5% 300VDCW
C:FXD MICA 62 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:FXD MICA 68 PF 5%
C:FXD MICA 62 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:FXD MICA 39 PF 5% 300VDCW
INDUCTOR ASSY:AIR CORE
COIL:FXD RF 0.10 UH 10%
COIL:FXD RF 0.10 UH 10%
COIL:FXD RF 0.10 UH 10%
COIL:FXD RF 0.10 UH 10%
INDUCTOR ASSY:AIR CORE
IF ASSY:200 MHZ
C:FXD MICA 100 PF 5%
C:FXD CER 470 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 470 PF 480-20% 1000VDCW
C:VAR CER 4.5-20 PF 160VDCW N750
C:VAR CER 9-35 PF NP0
C:FXD CER 470 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 470 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 470 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C: VOLTAGE VAR 6.8 PF 5%
C:FXD CER 470 PF .80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF *+80O-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1003 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1003 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
NOT ASSIGNED
C:FXD CER 000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 3.0+/-0.25 PF 500VDCW
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 5.62V 5%
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 5.62V 5%
COIL:FXD 0.22 UH 20%
COIL:MOLDED CHOKE 0.15 UH 20%
COIL:MOLDED CHOKE 0.15 UH 20%
COIL:FXD OF 0.58 UH
COIL:FXD RF 1 UH 10%
COIL:VAR 0.142 TO 0.158 UH
COIL:FXD RF 0.33 UH 20%
COIL:FXD RF O.68 UH
COIL:FXD RF 1 UH 10%
COIL:FXD 0.10 UH 20%
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 562 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 3000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FL4 562 OHM 1% 1/8W
TEST POINT
CABLE ASSY:RF, GREEN
FILTER ASSY:200 MHWZ
C:FXD CER 15 PF 1%1 5OOVDCW
C:FXD CER 24 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:VAR GLASS 0.8-8.5 PF 750VDCW
C:FXD CER 10 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:VAR GLASS 0.8-8.5 PF 750VDCW
C:VAR GLASS 0.8-8.5 PF 750VDCW
NOT ASSIGNED
C: FXD CER 24 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:FXD CER 15 PF 10% 500VDCW
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
WASHER:LOCK FOR #12 HDW
NUT:HEX 12-32 UNEF-2B
INDUCTOR ASSY:AIR CORE
INDUCTOR ASSY:200MHZ
INDUCTOR ASSY:AIR CORE
SHIELD:CAN 200 MLHZ
SHIELD COVER:FIRST MIXER
INSULATOR:FIRST MIXER
STANDOFF:0 .437” LG
CONVERTER ASSY:SECOND
See introduction to this section for ordering Information
80131
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
72982
28480
72982
28480
28480
91418
28480
04713
04713
28480
28480
28480
28480
99800
71279
28480
28480
99800
82142
80131
04062
14655
28480
14655
04062
28490
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
72136
91418
91418
28480
28480
91418
56289
91418
91418
04713
91418
56289
56289
56289
72982
01121
98291
00000
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01255
28480
Mfr Part Number
RMI5E39OJ3S
RDM15E620J5S
0160-0949
RDM15E620J5S
RDM15F390J3S
08553-6018
9100-2247
9100-2247
9100-2247
9100-2247
08553-6018
08443-60043
RM15P101J3C
TYPE B
TYPE B
0121-0446
0121-0105
TYPE B
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
TYPE B
TYPE B
SMV 389-285
TYPE B
C067B102E102ES26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C367D102E102ZS26-CD-11
TA
0160-2244
SZ10939-110
SZ10939-110
9100-1611
9100-1610
9100-1610
9140-0141
1025-20
CDD4003-2
9100-1612
9140-0141
1025-20
10175-B
2N5179
245179
0698-3441
0757-0346
0757-0417
CR 3025
0698-3441
0757-0346
0757-0417
08443-00041
08443-60058
08443-60007
FB2B 1501
301-000-C0G0-240J
0121-0457
301-000-C0H0-100J
0121-0457
0121-0457
301-000-C0G0-240J
FB2B 1501
52-045-4610
08D
M-6377
08553-6018
08553-6017
08553-6018
08443-00039
08553-0026
08553-0027
1530B7/16-11
08443-60042
6-11
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A12C2
A12C3
A12C4
A12C5
A12C6
A12C7
A12C8
A12C9
A12C10
A12C11
A12C12
A12C13
A12C14
A12C15
A12C16
A12C17
A12L1
A11R12
A11R13
A11R14
A11R15
A11R16
A11R17
A11R18
A11R19
A11R20
A11T1
A11T2
A11T3
A11T4
A11W1
A12
A12C1
A12L2
A12L3
A12L4
A12L5
A12L6
A12Q1
A11J2
A11L1
A11L2
A11Q1
A11Q2
A11Q3
A11R1
A11R2
A11R3
A11R4
A11R5
A11R6
A11R7
A11R8
A11R9
A11R10
A11R11
A11C1
A11C2
A11C3
A11C4
A11C5
A11C6
A11C7
A11C8
A11C9
A11C10
A11C11
A11CR1
A11CR2
A11CR3
A11CR4
A11CR5
A11J1
0160-2145
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
1902-3139
5080-0271
0757-0394
0757-0394
0757-0394
0757-0394
0757-0403
0757-0394
08552-6024
08553-6012
08553-6012
08552-6024
08443-63057
08443-60041
0160-2145
0150-0050
0150-0050
0160-2142
0150-0050
0160-2254
0160-2307
0121-0059
0160-2254
0121-0059
0150-0050
0150-0050
0150-0050
0160-2201
0160-2254
1250-1195
1250-1195
9140-0144
9100-1612
1854-0345
1853-0018
1854-0247
0757-0279
0757-0397
0757-0417
0757-0276
0698-3428
0757-0420
0757-02o9
0698-7200
0757-0276
0757-0815
0698-3334
0698-3429
0698-3401
0121-0059
9140-0158
9100-0346
9140-0096
9140-0114
9140-0096
9140-0096
1853-0089
Description
Mfr
Code
2
3
1
2
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 8.25V 5%
DIODE:SILICON MATCHED QUAD
PART OF CR2
PART OF CR2
PART OF CR2
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
COIL:FXD RF 4.7 UH
COIL:FXD RF 0.33 UH 20%
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI PNP(SELECTED FROM 2N4263)
TSTR:51 NPN
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 68.1 OHM 1% 1 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 562 2l’S 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 61.9 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 14.7 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 750 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 270 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD FLM 31.6 OHM 2% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.9 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 562 OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 178 OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 19.6 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM 1% 1/2W
NOT ASSIGNED
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 121 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 51.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE=YELLOW)
TRANSFORMER:RF{CODE=BLUE)
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE=BLUE)
TRANSFORMER:RIF(CODE=YELLOW)
CABLE ASSY:RF, VIOLET
IF ASSY:50 MHZ
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +100-0% 500VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 7.5 PF 500VDCM
C:FXD MICA 47 PF 5%
C:VAR CER 2-8 PF 300VDCW
C:FXD CER 7.5 PF 500 VDCW
C:VAR CER 2-8 PF 300VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD MICA 51 PF 5%
C:FXD CER 7.5 FF 500VDCW
NOT ASSIGNED
C:VAR CER 2-8 PF 300VDCW
COIL:FXD RF I UH 10%
COIL:FXD 0.05 UNH 2%
COIL/CHOKE 1.00 UH 10%
COIL:FXD RF 10 UH
COIL/CHOKE 1.00 UH 10%
COIL/CHOKE 1.00 UH 10%
TSTR:SI PNP
See introduction to this section for ordering information
91418
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
04713
28480
56289
56289
91418
56289
72982
28480
28480
72982
28480
56289
56289
56289
72136
72982
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
91418
98291
98291
28480
28480
80131
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
99800
36196
99800
28480
99800
99800
80131
Mfr Part Number
TA
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
SZ10939-158
5080-0271
52-053-0000
52-053-0000
9140-0144
9100-1612
2N5179
1853-0018
1854-0247
0757-0279
0757-0397
0757-0417
0757-0276
0698-0420
0757-0420
0757-0269
0697-7200
0757-0276
0757-0815
0698-3334
0698-3429
0698-3401
0757-0394
0757-0394
0757-0394
0757-0394
0757-0403
0757-0394
08552-6024
08553-6012
08553-6012
08552-6024
08443-60057
08443-60041
TA
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
TYPE SM
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
0160-2307
0121-0059
301-000-C0H0-759C
0121-0059
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
RDM15B510J1C
301-000-C0H0-759C
0121-0059
1025-20
H-10886
1537-12
9140-0114
1537-12
1537-12
2N4917
6-12
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A13C13
A13C14
A13C15
A13C17
A13C18
A13C19
A13C20
A13C21
A13C22
A13C23
A13C24
A13C25
A13C26
A13C27
A13C28
A13CR1
A13CR2
A12A1
A13
A13
A13
A13C1
A13C2
A13C3
A13C4
A13CS
A13C6
A13C7
A13C8
A13C9
A13C10
A13C11
A13C12
A13CR3
A13CR4
A13CR5
A13CR6
A13CR7
A13J1
A13J2
A12A1C3
AZ2A1C4
A12A1C5
A12A1C6
A12A1C7
A12A1C8
A12A1C9
A12A2C10
A12A1C11
A12A1C12
A12A1J1
A12A1J1
A12A1J1
A12A1L1
A12A1L2
A12A1
A12A1
A1202
A12R2
A12R2
A22R3
A12R4
A12R5
A12R6
A12R7
A12R8
A12R9
A12R10
A12T1
A12T2
A12W1
A12A1
A12A1C1
A12A1C2
1854-0247
0698-3155
0757-0438
0757-0420
0757-0159
0698-3429
0698-3441
0757-1092
0698-3437
0698-3433
0757-0180
08552-6018
08552-6018
08443-60057
08443-60004
0160-0778
0160-0145
0150-0050
0150-0050
0122-0049
0150-0050
0160-3453
0160-2145
0160-2145
0160-3036
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
0160-2055
1902-3139
1901-0050
1901-0050
1901-0050
1901-0050
1901-0050
1901-0050
1250-1195
1250-1195
0160-2258
0121-0036
0121-0036
0160-2258
0160-2258
0121-0036
0121-0036
0160-2258
0160-2362
1250-1194
0590-0060
2190-0057
08552-6023
08552-6017
08443-00032
08443-00033
08552-0023
08443-60077
08443-20046
0624-0097
0160-2145
0150-0050
0160-2145
0150-0050
0150-0050
0160-3453
0160-3453
0150-0050
0160-3453
0160-2229
0160-0157
0150-0050
Description
Mfr
Code
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
5
1
1
6
TSTR:SE NPN
R:FXD MET FLM 4.64K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 750 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1000 OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 19.6 OHM 1% 11/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 215 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2187 OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 133 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 28.7 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 31.6 OHM 1% 1/8W
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-RED)
TRANSFORMER:RF(CODE-RED)
CABLE ASSY:RF. VIOLET
FILTER ASSY:50 MHZ
C:FXD CER 56 PF 10% 500VDCW
C:FXD MICA 82 PF 2% 100VDCW
NOT ASSIGNED
C:FXD CER 11 PF 5% 500VOCw
C:VAR CER 5.5-18 PF
C:VAR CER 5.5-18 PF
C:FXD CER 11 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:FXD CER 11 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:VAR CER 5.5-18 PF
C:VAR CER 5.5-18 PF
C:FXD CER 11 PF 5% 500VDCW
C:FX) MICA 140 PF 2% 300VDCW
CONNECTOR:RF BULKHEAD RECEPTACLE
NUT:HEX 12-32 UNEF-2B
WASHER:LOCK FOR #12 HDW
INDUCTOR ASSY:AIR CORE
INDUCTOR ASSY:50 MHZ
SHIELD:CAN 50 MHZ FL
SHIELD:COVER 50 MHZ
INSULATOR:47 MHZ OSC
CONVERTER ASSY:FIRST
COVER:FIRST CONVERTER
SCREW:TAPPING 4-43 THREAD
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1003 PF +80-20%100VCDW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +50-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD MICA 3000 PF 5%
C:FXD MY 0.0047 UF 10% 200VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCWd
DIODE TUNING:90 PF 10%
C:FXD CER 1000 PF +80-20% 1000VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +50-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 5000 PF +50-20% 200VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.01 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 8.25V 5%
DIODE:SI 200 MA AT IV
DIODE:SI 200 MA AT IV
DIODE:SI 200 MA AT IV
DIODE:SI 200 MA AT IV
DIODE:SI 200 MA AT IV
DIODE:SI 200 MA AT IV
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
See introduction to this section for ordering information
6-13
56289
56289
28480
56289
56289
91418
91418
28480
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
04713
07263
07263
07263
07263
07263
07263
98291
98291
28480
28480
28480
00000
91418
56289
91418
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
28480
56289
56289
72982
28480
28480
72982
72982
28480
28480
72982
04062
98291
01121
00000
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28460
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
25480
01121
84171
Mfr Part Number
1854-0247
0698-3155
0757-0438
0757-0420
0757-0159
0698-3429
0698-3441
0757-1092
0698-3437
0698-3433
0757-0180
08552-6018
08552-6018
08443-60057
08443-60004
FB2B
RDM15E820G1S
301-300-C0G0-110J
0121-0036
0121-0036
301-300-C0G0-110J
301-300-C0G0-110J
0121-0036
0121-0036
301-300-C0G0-110J
RDM15F141G3S
52-045-4610
M-6377
0BD
08552-6023
08552-6017
08443-00032
08443-00033
08552-0023
08443-60077
08443-20046
OBD
TA
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
TA
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
0160-2229
192P47292-PTS
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
0122-0049
C067B102E102ZS26-CD-1
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
TA
TA
0160-3036
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
C023F101F103ZS22-CD-1
SZ10939-158
FDA 6308
FDA 6308
FDA 6308
FDA 6308
FDA 6338
FDA 6308
52-053-0000
52-053-0000
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A13R34
A13T1
A13T2
A13XY1
A13Y1
A14
A14C1
A14C2
A14C3
A14C4
A14C5
A14C6
A14C7
A14C8
A14C9
A14C10
A14CR1
A13R19
A13R20
A13R20
A13R21
A13R22
A13RZ3
A13R24
A13R25
A13R26
A13R27
A13R28
A13R29
A13R30
A13R31
A13R32
A13R33
A14CR2
A14CR3
A14CR4
A14CR5
A14CR6
A14CR7
A14CR8
A13R2
A13R3
A13R4
A13R5
A13R6
A13R7
A13R8
A13R9
A13R10
A13R11
A13R12
A13R13
A13R14
A13R15
A13R16
A13R17
A13R18
A13J3
A13L1
A13L2
A13L3
A13L4
A13L5
A13Q1
A13Q2
A13Q3
A13Q4
A13Q5
A13Q6
A13Q7
AL3Q8
A13Q9
A13R10
A13R1
0757-0288
0757-0199
0757-0279
0757-0279
0757-0401
0757-0288
0757-0401
0757-0280
0757-0280
0757-0279
0757-0440
0757-0401
0757-0288
0757-0280
08443-80001
08443-80001
1200-0770
0410-0474
08443-60015
0160-0163
0180-0116
0180-1743
0180-1743
0180-1735
0180-0291
0180-0291
0160-2208
0180-1747
0180-0291
1901-0200
1902-0048
1902-3193
1884-0012
1902-0033
1901-0025
1901-0025
1901-0025
0757-0397
0757-0416
0757-0416
0757-0417
0757-0276
0698-3429
0757-0420
0757-0288
0683-1045
0698-3443
0698-3431
0757-0815
0698-0082
0757-0401
0757-0438
0683-1005
0698-0085
0757-0288
0757-0280
1250-1195
9100-3102
9100-3103
9100-1612
9140-0144
9140-0144
1854-0019
1853-0034
1853-0020
1854-0023
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0019
1854-0019
1854-0071
0757-0279
Description
Mfr
Code
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
2
3
11
CONNECTOR:RF SUB-MINIATURE SERIES
COIL:VAN 1.42 TO 1.58 UH
COIL:VAR 42.0 TO 51.5 UH
COIL:FXD RF 0.33 UH 2%
COIL:FXD RF 4.7 UH
COIL:FXD RF 4.7 UH
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI PNP(SELECTED FROM 2N3251)
TSTR:SI PNP(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N2484)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
R:FXD MET PLM 3.15K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 68.1 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 562 OHM 1%1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 61.9 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 19.6 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 750 OHM 1% 1/8W
R: FXD MET FLM 9.09K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 100K OHMS 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 287 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 23.7 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 562 OHM I1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 464 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 100K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 10 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.61K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 9.09K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:FXD MET FLM 9.09K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 21.5K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 9.09K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 7.50K OHM 1% 11/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 9.09K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1% 1/8W
TRANSFORMER:RF
TRANSFORMER:RF
SOCKET:CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL:OUARTZ
BOARD ASSY:SENSE AMPLIFIER
C:FXD MY 0.033 UF 10% 200VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 6.8 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.1 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.1 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 0.22 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 1.0 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 1.0 UF 10% 35VDCW
C:FXD MICA 330 PF 5% 300VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 150 UF 20% 15VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 1.0 UF 10% 35VDCW
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 6.81V 5%
DIODE BREAKDOWN 13.3V 5%
RECTIFIER:SILICON CONTROLLED 2N3528
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 6.2V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
See introduction to this section for ordering information
6-14
28480
28480
28480
91506
28480
28480
56289
56289
56289
56289
28480
56289
56289
28480
28480
56289
02735
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
28480
02735
04713
07263
07263
07263
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
98291
71279
71279
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
0757-0288
0757-0199
0757-0279
0757-0279
0757-0401
0757-0288
0757-0401
0757-0280
0757-0280
0757-0279
0757-0440
0157-0401
0757-0288
0757-0280
08443-80001
08443-80001
R000-AG-26
0410-0474
15443-60015
192P33392-PTS
150D68X59035B2-DYS
150D104X9035A2-DYS
150D104X9035A2-DYS
0183-1735
150D105X9035A2-DYS
150D105X903542-DYS
0160-2208
0180-1747
1150D105X9035A2-DYS
1N4998
SZ10939-134
1902-3193
2N352B
1N823
FD 2387
FD 2387
FD 2387
0757-0397
0757-0416
0757-0416
0757-0417
0757-0276
0698-3429
0757-0420
0757-0288
CB 1045
0698-3443
0698-3431
0757-0815
0698-0082
0757-0401
0757-0438
CB 1005
0698-0085
0757-0288
0757-0280
52-053-0000
CDD4003-8
CDD4003-18
9103-1612
9140-0144
9140-0144
1854-0019
1853-0034
1853-0020
1854-0023
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0019
1854-0019
1854-0071
0757-0279
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A14R22
A14R23
A14R24
A14R25
A14R26
A14R27
A14R28
A14R29
A14R30
A14R31
A14R32
A14R33
A14R33
A14R34
A14R35
A14R36
A14R37
A14R5
A14R6
A14R7
A14R8
A14R9
A14R10
A14R12
A14R13
A14R14
A14R15
A14R16
A14R17
A14R18
A14R19
A14R20
A14R21
A14R38
A14R38
A14R39
A14R40
A14R41
A14R42
A14R43
A14Q7
A14Q8
A14Q9
A14Q10
A14Q11
A14Q12
A14Q13
A14Q14
A14Q15
A14Q16
A14Q17
A14Q18
A14Q19
A14R1
A14R2
A14R3
A14R4
A14CR9
A14CR10
A14CR11
A14CR12
A14CR13
A14CA14
A14CR15
A14CR16
A14CR17
A14CR18
A14CR19
A14Q1
A14Q2
A14Q3
A14Q4
A14Q5
A14Q6
0683-5115
0683-1635
0683-1015
0683-5115
0683-5125
0683-1015
0757-0442
0698-0084
0698-0084
0683-5115
0683-6205
0683-1015
0757-0428
0698-3409
0683-1125
0698-0084
0683-0275
0698-3159
0698-3151
0683-0275
0698-3153
0698-3153
0757-0199
0683-6235
0683-5125
0683-1635
0757-0821
0757-0418
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0039
1854-0071
1854-0221
1854-0071
1854-0071
0683-5115
0757-0199
0683-0275
0683-1015
1901-0025
1901-0200
1884-0012
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0200
1902-3268
1902-3256
1902-0049
1854-0039
1854-0039
1854-0039
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
0698-3150
0698-3155
0757-0442
0683-5125
0757-0428
0757-0442
0683-4315
0698-0083
0757-0442
0698-0084
Description
Mfr
Code
1
1
4
5
1
1
2
1
4
4
2
3
2
1
2
2
1
DIDOE:SILICON 1001MA/1V
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
RECTIFIER:SILICON CONTROLLED 2N3528
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:BREAKDOWN:26.1V 5%
DIODE:BREAKDOWN SILICON 23.7V 5%
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 6.19V 5%
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI PNP(SELECTED FROM 2N3702)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(REPL.BY 2N4044)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3734)
R:FXD COMP 510 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 21.5K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 2.7 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 100 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 510 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 16K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 100 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 510 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 5100 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 100 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8w
R:FXD COMP 510 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 62 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 100 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.62K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.37K OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD COMP 1100 OHM 5% 1/4k
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 2.7 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 26.1K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.87K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 2.7 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.83K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 3.83K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 21.5K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 62K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 5100 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 16K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD NET FLM 1.21K OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 519 OHM 1% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:FXD MET FLM 2.37K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 4.64K OHM 1% 1/SW
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 5100 OHM 5% 14W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.62K OHM 1% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 430 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.96K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% 1/8W
See introduction to this section for ordering Information
6-15
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
01121
28450
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
80131
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
01121
01121
07263
02735
02735
02735
02735
02735
02735
02735
28480
28480
04713
80131
80131
80131
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
CB 5115
CB 1635
CB 1015
CB 5115
CB 5125
CB 1015
0757-0442
0698-0084
0698-0084
CB 5115
CB 6205
CB 1015
0757-0428
0698-3409
CB 1125
0698-0084
CB 27G5
0698-3159
0698-3151
CB 27G5
0698-3153
0698-3153
0757-0199
CB 6235
CB 5125
CB 1635
0757-0821
0757-0418
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
1854-0071
2N3053
1854-0071
1854-0221
1854-0071
1854-0071
CB 5115
0757-0199
CB 27G5
CB 1015
FD 2387
1N4998
2N3528
1N4998
1N4998
1N4998
1N4998
1N4998
1902-3268
1902-3256
SZ10939-122
2N3053
2N3053
2N3053
1853-0020
1854-0071
1854-0071
0698-3150
0698-3155
0757-0442
CB 5125
0757-0428
0757-0442
CB 4315
0698-0083
0757-0442
0698-0084
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A15R3
A15R4
A15R5
A15R6
A15R7
A15R8
A15R9
A15R10
A15R11
A15R11
A15R12
A15R13
A15XF1
A15XF2
A15XF3
A15XF4
A15XF5
A15CR7
A15CR8
A15CR9
A15CR10
A15CR11
A15CR2
A15F1
A15F2
A15F3
A15F4
A15F5
A15Q1
415Q2
A15Q3
A15R1
A15R2
A16
A16
A16S1
£16S2
£16S3
A16
A16
A15
A15C1
A15C2
A15C3
A15C4
A15C5
A15C6
A15C7
A15C8
A15C9
A15C10
A15CR1
A15CR2
A15CR3
A15CR4
A15CR5
A15CR6
A14R43
A14R44
A14R45
A14R46
A14R47
A14R48
A14R49
A14R50
A14R51
A14R52
A14R53
A14S1
A14TP1
A14TP2
A14TP3
A14TP4
A14TPS
0757-0442
0698-3150
0698-3155
0683-0275
0683-6235
0698-3409
2100-2632
0757-0421
0683-6205
0683-5115
3101-1277
1901-0159
1901-0159
1901-0159
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0159
1901-0159
1901-0025
1902-0041
2110-0004
2110-0001
2110-0001
2110-0002
2110-0001
1854-0071
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
08443-60014
0160-3043
0160-3043
0180-2212
0170-0040
0170-0040
0160-3453
0160-3453
0160-3453
0160-3453
0160-0168
1901-0159
1854-0232
1854-0232
0812-0012
0757-0063
0757-0063
0757-0063
0683-1025
0757-0442
0683-1025
0757-0855
0683-1045
0757-0442
0757-0274
0757-0442
0653-1855
2110-0269
2110-0269
2110-0269
2110-0269
2110-0269
08443-60038
08443-60073
08443-60072
08443-60072
08443-60138
Description
Mfr
Code
1
1
1
10
1
2
1
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.37K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 4.64K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 2.7 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 62K OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.37K OHM 1% 1/2W
R:VAR FLM 100 OHM 10% LIN 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 825 OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 62 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 510 OHM 5% 1/4W
SWITCH:TOGGLE SPDT MOM.-ON-NONE-ON
NOT ASSIGNED
TERMINAL PIN:SQUARE
TERMINAL PIN:SQUARE
TERMINAL PIN:SOUARE
TERMINAL PIN:SQUARE
BOARD ASSY:RECTIFIER
C:FXD CER 2 X 0.005 UF 20% 250VAC
C:FXD C-R 2 X 0.005 UF 20% 250VAC
C:FXD ELECT 10 UF +50-0% 450VDCW
C:FXD MY 0.047 UF 10% 200VDCW
C:FXD MY 0.047 UF 10% 200VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD MY 0.1 UF 10% 200VDCW
DIODE:SILICON 0.75A 400PIV
DIODE:SILICON 0.75A 400PIV
DIODE:SILICON 0.75A 400PIV
DIODE:SILICON 0.75 400PIV
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 0.75A 400PIV
DIODE:SILICON O.75A 400PIV
DIODE:SILICON 100MA/1V
DIODE:BREAKDOWN 5.11V 5%
FUSE:CARTRIDGE 1/4 AMP 250V
FUSE:1 AMP 250V
FUSE:1 AMP 250V
FUSE:CARTRIDGE 2 AMP 3 AG
FUSE:LAMP 250V
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3704)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3440)
TSTR:SI NPN(SELECTED FROM 2N3440)
R:FXD WW 18 OHM 5% 3W
R:FXD MET FLM 196K OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 196K OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 196K OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 1000 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 68.1K OHM 1% 1/2W
R:FXD COMP 100K OHMS 5% 1/4W
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD MET FLM 1.21K OHM 1% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:FXD MET FLM 10.0K OHM 1% 1/8W
R:FXD COMP 1.8 MEGOHM 5% 1/4W
CLIP:FUSE 0.250" DIA
CLIP:FUSE 0.250” DIA
CLIP:FUSE 0.250" DIA
CLIP:FUSE 0.250" DIA
CLIP:FUSE 0.250” DIA
BOARD ASSY:SWITCH
(8443A ONLY)
SWITCH ASSY:SLIDE
SWITCH ASSY:SLIDE
SWITCH ASSY:SLIDE
BOARD ASSY:SWITCH
(8443B ONLY)
See Introduction to this section for ordering information
6-16
04713
04713
04713
02735
02735
02735
02735
04713
04713
07263
04713
75915
75915
75915
75915
75915
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
04713
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
28480
01121
28480
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
81640
28480
01121
91506
91506
91506
91506
91506
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
3757-0442
0698-3150
3698-3155
CB 27G5
CB 6235
0698-3409
2100-2632
0757-0421
CB 6205
CB 5115
T8003
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
0360-1514
08443-60014
29C147A-CDH
29C147A-CDH
39D106F450FL4-SB
192P47392-PTS
192P47392-PTS
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
C023A101L503ZS25-CD-1
192P10492-PTS
SR1358-4
SR1358-4
SR1358-4
SR1358-4
1N4998
1N4998
1N4998
1N4998
SR1358-4
SR1358-4
FD 2387
SZ10939-98
3AG/CAT. 312.250
312001.
312001.
312.002
312001.
1854-0071
1854-0232
1I54-0232
0812-0012
0757-0063
0737-0063
0757-0063
CB 1025
0757-0442
CB 1025
0157-0855
CB 1045
0757-0442
0757-0274
0757-0442
CB 1855
6008-32CN
6008-32CN
6008-32CN
6008-32CN
6008-32CN
08443-60039
08443-60073
08443-60072
08443-60072
08443-60138
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
A20
A20
A20
A20R1
A20R10
A20R11
A20R12
A20R12
A20R13
A20S1
A20S1
A18XA13
A18XA14
A18XA15
A18XA16
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A19
A19
A19
A19J1
A19S1
A20
A18R2
A18R3
A18R4
A18R5
A18R6
A18R7
A18A1
A18A2
A18XA4
A18XA5
A18XA6
A18XA7
A18XA8
A18XA9
A18XA10
A18XA11
A18XA12
A16S1
A16S2
A16S3
A17
A17
A17
A17J1
A17W1
A17W2
A17W3
A17W4
A17W5
418
A18C1
A18C3
A18C4
A18R1
C1
C2
C2
C3
DS1
J3
J3
J4
J4
DS2
FL1
J1
J2
08443-60072
08443-00123
1251-2366
08443-60052
08443-63055
08443-60054
08443-60053
08443-60063
08443-60016
0150-0050
0683-2005
0811-1666
0811-1666
0811-1661
0811-1666
0683-3615
0683-2015
1251-1887
1251-1626
1251-1626
1251-1626
1251-0472
1251-0472
1251-0472
1251-0472
1251-0472
1251-0472
1251-1626
1251-1626
1251-2091
0360-0124
0380-0756
0380-0884
0380-0895
1251-2229
1251-2313
08443-60068
09443-00023
1251-0087
3101-0070
08443-60003
08443-00014
08443-20009
2100-2066
0698-3154
2100-2898
3101-0070
0180-2181
0180-2290
0180-2181
2140-0253
2140-0253
9100-3121
08553-6063
6960-0002
6960-0002
Description
Mfr
Code
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOT ASSIGNED
SWITCH ASSY:SLIDE
NOT ASSIGNED
JACK ASSY INTERCONNECTION(8443A ONLY)
COVER:BCD HOLE
(8443B ONLY)
CONNECTOR:R AND P 8 POSITIONS
CABLE ASSY:BLANK CONTROL
CABLE ASSYS:THIRD LOCAL OSCILLATOR
CABLE ASSY:SECOND LOCAL OSCILLATOR
CABLE ASSY:SCAN CONTROL
CABLE ASSY:FIRST LOCAL OSCILLATOR
BOARD ASSY:MOTHER
NOT ASSIGNED
NOT ASSIGNED
C:FXD CER 1000 PF .80-20% 1000VDCW
R:FXD COMP 20 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD NW 1.0 OHM 5% 2W
R:FXD WW 1.0 OHM 5% 2W
R:FXD WW 0.39 OHM 5% 2W
R:FXD WW 1.0 OHM 5% 2W
R:FXD COMP 360 OHM 5% 1/4W
R:FXD COMP 200 OHM 5% 1/4W
C0NNECTOR:PC 44 CONTACT(12 X 22)
5
6
1
1
20
2
2
2
8
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
NOT ASSIGNED
CONNECTOR:PC (2 X 12) 24 CONTACT
CONNECTOR:PC (2 X 12) 24 CONTACT
CONNECTOR:PC (2 X 12) 24 CONTACT
CONNECTOR:PC 12 CONTACTS
CONNECTOR:PC 12 CONTACTS
CONNECTOR:PC 12 CONTACTS
CONNECTOR:PC 12 CONTACTS
CONNECTOR:PC 12 CONTACTS
CONNECTOR:PC 12 CONTACTS
CONNECTOR:PC (2 X 12) 24 CONTACT
CONNECTOR:PC (2 X 12) 24 CONTACT
CONNECTOR:PC (1 X 15) 15 CONTACT
TERMINAL:SOLDER LUG
STANDOFF:0.125" LG
STANDOFF:CAPTIVE 4-40 X 0.156" LG
STANDOFF:CAPTIVE 4-40 X 0.312" LG
CONNECTOR:SINGLE CONTACT
CONNECTOR:SINGLE CONTACT
BCD ASSY:DIGITAL OUTPUT
(8443A ONLY)
SHIELD:RCD
CONNECTOR:FEMALE 5O-PIN MINAT
SWITCH:SLIDE
MARKER POSITION ASSY
(8443A ONLY)
BRACKET:MARKER POSITION POT
COUPLER:MARKER POSITION POT
NOT ASSIGNED
NOT ASSIGNED
R:VAR COMP 2K OHM 20% LIN 1/2W
R:FXD MET FLM 4.22K OHM 1% 1/8W
FACTORY SELECTED PART
R:VAR CERMET 5K/50K OHM 20% LIN
SWITCH:SLIDE
(PART OF BRACKET)
CHASSIS PARTS
C:FXD ELECT 1300 UF +75-10% 50VDCW
C:FXD ELECT 2700 UF +75-10% 25VDCW
(8443A ONLY)
C:FXD ELECT 1300 UF +75-10% 5OVDCW
LAMP:INCANDESCENT 28V 0.030A
LAMP:INCANDESCENT 28V 0.030A
FILTER:LINE 50-400 CYCLE 2A
PART OF W1
CAPACITOR ASSY
PART OF W3 (8443B ONLY)
PLUS:HOLE FOR 1/2 DIA
PART OF W4 (8443B ONLY)
PLUS:HOLE FOR 1/2" DIA
See introduction to this section for ordering Information
6-17
28480
56289
01121
28480
28480
28480
28480
01121
01121
71785
28480
71468
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
79727
56289
56289
56289
08717
08717
28480
28480
76530
76530
71785
71785
71785
71785
71785
71785
71785
71785
71785
71785
71785
95354
28480
00000
00000
00000
00779
00779
28480
28480
28480
79727
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
08443-60072
08443-00123
DCM 8W8S
08443-60052
08443-60055
08443-60054
08443-60053
08443-60063
08443-60016
C067B102E102ZS26-CDH
CB 2005
0811-1666
0811-1666
0811-1661
0811-1666
CB 3615
CB 2015
252-22-30-340
252-12-30-300
252-12-30-300
252-12-30-300
252-06-30-300
252-06-30-300
252-06-30-300
252-06-30-300
252-06-30-300
252-06-30-300
252-12-30-300
252-12-30-300
178-118-181
0360-0124
0BD
0BD
0BD
1-331677-3
3-332070-5
08443-60068
08443-00023
1251-0087
G-126
08443-60063
08443-00014
08443-20009
2100-2066
0698-3154
2100-2898
G-126
36D132G050AA2A-DQB
36D272G025AA2A-DQB
36D132G050AA2A-DQB
FB38
FB38
9100-3121
08553-6036
SS-48152
SS-48152
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q5
R1
MP49
MP49
MP50
MP50
MP51
MP51
MP52
MP52
MP43
MP44
MP45
MP45
MP46
MP46
MP47
MP47
MP48
MP37
MP38
MP38
MP39
MP39
MP40
MP41
MP42
MP30
MP31
MP32
MP33
MP34
MP35
MP36
MP37
MP21
MP22
MP23
MP24
MP25
MP26
MP27
MP28
MP29
MP14
MP15
MP15
MP16
MP17
MP18
MP19
MP20
MP8
MP8
MP9
MP9
MP10
MP11
MP12
MP13
J5
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP7
Description
Mfr
Code
08443-00018
08443-00019
08443-00020
08443-00021
08443-00021
08443-00021
08443-00021
08443-00022
08443-00024
08443-00025
08443-00026
08443-00043
08443-00046
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
5040-0331
5040-0331
0370-0084
0370-0084
1251-0218
1251-0218
1410-0112
3150-0214
08443-00048
5060-0254
5060-0254
08443-00004
08443-00005
08443-00006
08443-00012
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20004
08443-20004
08443-20005
08443-20005
08443-20005
08443-20006
08443-40001
08443-40003
5000-0206
08443-40006
NOT ASSIGNED
0380-0793
0380-0793
1854-0063
1854-0063
1854-0063
1854-0063
1854-0324
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
11
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
4
1
PART OF FL1
ABSORBER:RF
ABSORBER:RF
KNOB:ROUND BLK 5/8 DIA
KNOB:ROUND BLK 5/8 DIA
CONNECTOR:LOCK POST SUBMINAT TYPE D
CONNECTOR:LOCK POST SUBMINAT TYPE D
BBUSHIN:5/16-32 THD
(TRACK ADJ)
FILTER:AIR, GRAY POLYURETHANE
(8443A ONLY)
RETAINER:FILTER
(8443A ONLY)
COUPLER:SHAFT
COUPLER:SHAFT
SUPPORT:MOTHER BOARD ,FRONT
SUPPORT:MOTHER BOARD, REAR
DECK:ATTENUATOR MOUNTING
BRACKET MOUNTING:SIDE FRAME
(8443A ONLY)
BRACKET:REGULATOR MOUNTING
BRACKET:CAPACITOR MOUNTING
BRACKET:TRANSFORMER MOUNTING
BRACKET:FRONT PANEL
BRACKET:FRONT PANEL
BRACKET:FRONT PANEL
BRACKET:FRONT PANEL
SHIELD:MOTHER BOARD
DIAL KNOB ASSY:”TENS”
DIAL KNOB ASSY:"UNITS”
DIAL KNOB ASSY:"TENTHS”
COVER, POWER SUPPLY
COVER, SERIES REGULATOR
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
SHIELD:PC BOARD
NOT ASSIGNED (8443B ONLY)
SHIELD:PC BOARD
NOT ASSIGNED (8443B ONLY)
SHIELD:PC BOARD
NOT ASSIGNED (8443B ONLY)
SHAFT:ATTENUATOR KNOB
SHAFT:ATTENUATOR KNOB
BUSHING:KNOB SHAFT(ATTENUATORS)
BJSAINGSKNO8 SHAFT(ATTENUATORS)
BUSHING:KNOB SHAFT(ATTENUATORS)
HEAT SINK
(Q1 THROUGH Q5)
WINDOW:COUNTER
(8443A ONLY)
INSULATOR:REGULATOR
(Q1 THROUGH Q5)
SPRING:WASHER
HANDLE:FUNCTION SWITCH
(8443A ONLY)
SPRING:COMPRESSION-FUNCTION SWITCH
(8443A ONLY)
SPACER:POST 0.156" LG-FUNCTION SWITCH
(8443A ONLY)
SPACER:POST 0.156" LG-FUNCTION SWITCH
(8443A ONLY)
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN (844A ONLY)
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
TSTR:SI NPN
(8443A ONLY)
NOT ASSIGNED
See Introduction to this section for ordering information
6-18
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
76854
76854
80131
80131
80131
80131
80131
28480
28480
28480
28480
71468
71468
28480
00000
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28460
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20004
08443-20004
08443-20005
08443-20005
08443-20005
08443-20006
08443-40001
08443-40003
5000-0206
08443-40006
1460-0297
5040-0331
5040-0331
0370-0084
0370-0084
D53018
D53018
1410-0112
0BD
08443-00048
5060-0254
5060-0254
08443-00004
08443-00005
08443-00006
08443-00012
08443-00018
08443-00019
08443-00020
08443-00021
08443-00021
08443-00021
08443-00021
08443-00022
08443-00024
08443-00025
08443-00326
08443-00043
08443-00046
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
08443-20001
15525-610
15525-610
2N3055
2N3055
2N3055
2N3055
2N3739
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
XA1
XA14
XA15
XA15
XA16
XA17
XA18
XDS1
XDS1
W4
W4
W5
W6
W7
W7
W8
W8
XDSZ2
XDS2
XF1
S2
S2
T1
W1
W1
W2
W3
W3
R7
R8
R8
R8
R9
R10
R10
S1
S1
2100-2886
08443-20008
08443-20010
2100-2501
2100-2729
3101-1234
3101-0070
9100-2886
08443-60061
08443-60059
08443-60060
08443-60009
8120-1348
08443-60079
08443-60080
1251-0198
5040-0327
1251-2400
1450-0153
1450-0493
1450-0153
1450-0157
1400-0084
0624-0268
Description
Mfr
Code
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
512
NOT ASSIGNED
R:VAR WW 5K ORM 5% LIN 2W
MOUNT:TRACK ADJ POT
TRACK ADJ. POT:5K OHM
R:VAR WW 2K OHM 20% LIN 1.5W
R:VAR CERMET 2.5K OHM 20% LIN 2W
(8443A ONLY)
SWITCH:SLIDE DPDT
(PART OF REAR PANEL)
SWITCH:SLIDE- FUNCTION
(8443A ONLY)
TRANSFORMER:POWER
CABLE ASSY:EXT INPUT
(8443A ONLY)
NOT ASSIGNED
CABLE ASSY:1 MHZ INPUT
(84434 ONLY)
CABLE ASSY:1 MHZ OUTPUT
(8443A ONLY)
CABLE ASSY:INTERCONNECT
CABLE ASSY:POWER. DETACHABLE
CABLE ASSY:3 MHZ IF
(8443A ONLY)
CABLE ASSY:FUNCTION SWITCH
(8443A ONLY)
NOT ASSIGNED
NOT ASSIGNED
CONNECTOR:PC EDGE (2 X 6) 12 CONTACT
HOOD:CONNECTOR
NOT ASSIGNED
NOT ASSIGNED
CONNECTOR:PC (2 X 15) 30 CONTACT
LAMP:HOLDER:FOR T-1 SERIES
LENS:PLASTIC
LAMP4OLDERsFOR T-1 SERIES
LENS: LAMPHOLDER
FUSEHOLDER:EXTRACTOR POST TYPE
MISCELLANEOUS
SCREW:PAN HD POZI DR 4-24 X 0.375" LG
See introduction to this section for ordering information
71785
28480
11453
08717
28480
08717
08717
75915
00000
28480
28480
28480
70903
28480
28480
28480
2848o
28480
28480
28480
82389
79727
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
2100-2886
O8443-20008
08443-20010
2100-2501
2100-2729
11A-1242
G-126
9100-2886
08443-60061
08443-60059
08443-60060
08443-60009
KHS-7041
08443-60079
08443-60080
251-06-30-261
5040-0327
610-093-15
102SR
1450-0493
102SR
102XX-W
342014
0BD
6-19
Section 6 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 6-1. Cabinet Parts
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designation HP Part Number Qty
13
14
14
15
12
12
12
13
15
16
17
17
10
10
11
11
12
8
9
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
1
2
5060-0730
08443-00055
08443-00003
5000-0731
5000-8595
08443-00045
08443-00052
5060-0752
5060-8713
5060-0767
1490-0030
5000-0050
5060-0774
5060-8739
08443-00027
08443-00051
08443-00054
08443-00101
08443-00124
08443-00053
08443-00102
08443-00125
5020-0900
5020-6850
5020-0901
5020-6851
08443-40002
5060-0216
5060-8543
Description
Mfr
Code
1
2
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
FRAME ASSY:3 X 16
SUB-PANEL
PANEL:REAR
COVER:SIDE, BLUE GRAY
COVER:SIDE. OLIVE GRAY
COVER:TOP, BLUE GRAY
COVER:TOP, OLIVE GRAY
COVER ASSY:BOTTOM 16L (BLUE GRAY)
COVER:BOTTOM
FOOT ASSY:FM
STAND:TILT
TRIM:SIDES
RACK MOUNTING KIT:3H (LIGHT GRAY)
KIT:RACK MOUNT 3H
CONNECTOR PLATE. BLACK(OPTIONS)
CONNECTOR PLATE:OLIVE BLACK
PANEL:FRONT,LITE GRAYI8443AI
PANEL:RIGHT FRONT, LITE GRAY(8443B)
PANEL:RIGHT FRONT, MINT GRAY(8443B)
PANEL:FRONT, MINT GRAY(8443A)
PANEL:LEFT FRONT,BLACKI44381)
PANEL:LEFT FRONT, OLIVE BLACK(84431B)
TRIM:PANEL, LITE GRAY
TRIM:PANEL, MINT GRAY
TRIM:PANEL, LITE GRAY
TRIM:PANEL, MINT GRAY
WINDOW TRIM STRIP
BRACKET:JOINING KIT, BLUE GRAY
BRACKET:JOINING KIT, OLIVE GRAY
See introduction to this section for ordering information
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Z8480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part Number
5060-0730
08443-00055
08443-00003
5000-0731
5000-8595
08443-00045
08443-00052
5060-3752
5060-8713
5060-0767
1490-0030
5003-0050
5060-0774
5060-8739
083443-00027
08443-00051
08443-00054
08443-00101
08443-00124
08443-00053
08443-00102
08443-00125
5020-0900
5020-6850
5020-0901
5020-6RSI
08443-43D02
5060-0216
5n60-8S43
6-20
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
TABLE 6-4.
PART NUMBER - NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER
CROSS REFERENCE INDEX
NATIONAL NATIONAL
PART FSCM STOCK PART FSCM STOCK
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
B104BX102M 96733 5910-00-244-7171 0160-2139 28480 5910-00-180-7816
D2361 93332 5961-00-954-9182 0160-2140 28480 5910-00-430-5625
D53018 71468 5935-00-570-6119 0160-2142 28480 5910-00-430-5626
FB2B 01121 5910-00-920-3478 0160-2143 28480 5910-00-430-5628
FDG1088 07263 5961-00-928-7939 0160-2145 28480 5910-00-430-5637
G250 01538 5325-00-079-7237 0160-2204 28480 5910-00-463-5949
KHS-7041 70903 6150-01-004-8773 0160-2208 28480 5910-00-430-5685
MC1013P 04713 5962-00-450-8830 0160-2218 28480 5910-00-261-3413
MC1034P 04713 5962-00-405-1385 0160-2229 28480 5910-00-719-9881
MC1039P 04713 5962-00-519-0787 0160-2244 28480 5910-00-008-4451
RDM15E820G1S 84171 5910-00-138-1318 0160-2254 28480 5910-00-043-1371
RDM15F101J3C 72136 5910-00-463-5949 0160-2260 28480 5910-00-789-6956
SN7400N 01295 5962-00-865-4625 0160-2266 28480 5910-00-430-5754
SN7400N 01295 5962-00-922-3138 0160-2307 28480 5910-00-406-9675
SN7404N 01295 5962-00-404-2559 0160-2327 28480 5910-00-244-7171
SN7472N 01295 5962-00-865-4631 0160-2930 28480 5910-00-465-9754
SN7474N 01295 5962-00-106-4287 0160-3036 28480 5910-00-138-1326
SR1358-4 04713 5961-00-496-7363 0160-3043 28480 5910-00-472-5006
SZ10939-110 04713 5960-00-995-2310 0160-3060 28480 5910-00-006-5732
SZ10939-134 04713 5960-00-912-3099 0160-3121 28480 5910-00-138-7268
SZ10939-158 04713 5960-00-845-6458 0160-3451 28480 5910-01-036-1474
S17843 07263 5961-00-917-0660 0170-0040 28480 5910-00-829-0245
T8001 81640 5930-00-237-1160 0180-0098 28480 5910-00-430-5947
0121-0036 28480 5910-00-463-5960 0180-0116 28480 5910-00-809-4701
0121-0059 28480 5910-00-776-4185 0180-0137 28480 5910-00-915-1393
01210105 28480 5910-00-761-1216 0180-0160 28480 5910-00-752-4249
0122-0049 28480 5961-00-329-7671 0180-0197 28480 5910-00-850-5355
0150-0050 28480 5910-00-784-0927 0180-0229 28480 5910-00-403-2449
0160-0145 28480 5910-00-138-1318 0180-0291 28480 5910-00-931-7055
0160-0157 28480 5910-00-961-9591 0180-0376 28480 5910-00-444-6726
0160-0163 28480 5910-00-893-1261 0180-1735 28480 5910-00-430-6016
0160-0168 28480 5910-00-917-0668 0180-1743 28480 5910-00-430-6017
0160-2055 28480 5910-00-211-1611 0340-0038 28480 5940-00-904-0300
6-21
PART
NUMBER
0698-3155
0698-3159
0698-3260
0698-3334
0698-3401
0698-3409
0698-3428
0698-3429
0698-0082
0698-0083
0698-0084
0698-0085
0698-3150
0698-3151
0698-3153
0698-3154
0698-3431
0698-3433
0698-3434
0340-0039
0360-0124
0360-1514
0370-0084
0400-0009
0683-1005
0683-1015
0683-2015
0683-5115
0683-5125
0683-6225
0683-6235
0683-7525
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
FSCM
TABLE 6-4 (cont’d.)
PART NUMBER - NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER
CROSS REFERENCE INDEX
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART
NUMBER
5905-00-974-6075
5905-00-407-0052
5905-00-974-6073
5905-00-998-1814
5905-00-481-1357
5905-00-246-8634
5905-00-974-6081
5905-00-891-4215
5905-00-976-3418
5905-00-407-0053
5905-00-998-1809
5905-00-407-2350
5905-00-252-4219
5905-00-473-3276
5905-00-891-4238
5905-00-407-0075
5905-00-402-7079
5905-00-407-0076
5905-00-997-4071
5970-00-072-1625
5940-00-993-9338
5940-00-150-4513
5355-00-809-9329
5325-00-079-7237
5905-00-960-0099
5905-00-102-5294
5905-00-111-4845
5905-00-801-8272
5905-00-139-1642
5905-00-056-0505
5905-00-542-7776
5905-00-056-0520
0757-0346
0757-0394
0757-0395
0757-0397
0757-0398
0757-0401
0757-0403
0757-0405
0757-0199
0757-0269
0757-0274
0757-0276
0757-0279
0757-0280
0757-0288
0757-0289
0757-0416
0757-0417
0757-0418
0698-3435
0698-3437
0698-3438
0698-3441
0698-3443
0698-3444
0698-3452
0698-7200
0698-7229
0699-0001
0757-0063
0757-0159
0757-0180
6-22
FSCM
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
5905-00-981-7513
5905-00-858-6985
5905-00-858-9105
5905-00-493-0777
5905-00-221-8310
5905-00-853-8190
5905-00-193-4318
5905-00-998-1908
5905-00-998-1906
5905-00-412-4036
5905-00-891-4210
5905-00-232-3125
5905-00-788-0291
5905-00-981-7529
5905-00-412-4023
5905-00-096-4167
5905-00-998-1795
5905-00-858-9417
5905-00-412-4037
5905-00-489-2046
5905-00-402-7080
5905-00-974-6080
5905-00-974-6076
5905-00-194-0341
5905-00-974-6079
5905-00-826-3239
5905-00-161-8936
5905-01-009-7560
5905-00-998-1953
5905-00-244-7182
5905-00-830-6677
5905-00-972-4907
PART
NUMBER
0757-1092
0757-1094
0811-1661
0811-1666
08552-6017
08552-6018
08552-6023
08552-6024
08553-6012
08553-6063
1N4998
1N823
1025-20
1250-1194
1251-0087
1251-0198
1251-1556
1251-1887
1251-2313
0757-0419
0757-0420
0757-0421
0757-0422
0757-0428
0757-0438
0757-0440
0757-0442
0757-0458
0757-0459
0757-0821
0757-0855
0757-1060
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
28480
28480
02735
04713
99800
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
FSCM
TABLE 6-4 (cont’d.)
PART NUMBER - NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER
CROSS REFERENCE INDEX
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART
NUMBER
5905-00-412-0754
5905-00-917-0580
5905-00-222-3549
5905-00-402-7082
5950-00-787-7470
5950-00-430-6816
5950-00-787-7471
5950-00-138-1334
5950-00-138-1335
5910-00-430-6120
5961-00-994-0520
5961-00-103-7417
5950-00-059-5920
5935-00-446-4102
5935-00-043-4067
5935-00-974-6874
5999-00-165-0403
5935-00-147-7384
5935-00-104-1184
5905-00-891-4213
5905-00-493-5404
5905-00-891-4219
5905-00-728-9980
5905-00-998-1794
5905-00-929-2529
5905-00-858-6795
5905-00-998-1792
5905-00-494-4628
5905-00-997-9579
5905-00-828-6705
5905-00-930-7957
5905-00-405-8094
1854-0022
1854-0023
1854-0045
1854-0063
1854-0071
1854-0221
1854-0232
1854-0247
1820-0119
1820-0174
1820-0304
1820-0413
1853-0018
1853-0020
1853-0027
1853-0034
1854-0324
1854-0345
1901-0025
1400-0084
1410-0112
1490-0030
1537-12
1537-16
1537-48
1820-0054
1820-0077
1820-0092
1820-0010
1820-0102
1820-0116
1820-0116
6-23
FSCM
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
99800
99800
99800
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
5962-00-409-3521
5962-00-404-2559
5962-00-270-1961
5962-00-009-6621
5961-00-989-2747
5961-00-904-2540
5961-00-193-4463
5961-00-987-4700
5961-00-917-0660
5961-00-998-1923
5961-00-059-3063
5961-00-985-9074
5961-00-137-4608
5961-00-836-1887
5961-00-229-1963
5961-00-464-4049
5961-00-938-5100
5961-00-401-0507
5961-00-978-7468
5920-00-881-4636
5365-00-417-5217
6625-00-760-9521
5950-00-925-5249
5950-00-835-1513
5950-00-905-1839
5962-00-138-5248
5962-00-138-5250
6350-00-401-9149
5962-00-405-1385
5962-00-450-8830
5962-00-175-3051
6350-00-401-9151
PART
NUMBER
2N3055
2N3528
2N3739
2N4917
2N5179
2100-1758
2100-2066
2100-2489
1902-3094
1902-3193
1902-3256
1902-3268
1910-0016
1970-0042
2-330808-8
2N3053
2100-2501
2100-2517
2100-2632
1901-0039
1901-0040
1901-0047
1901-0049
1901-0050
1901-0159
1901-0179
1901-0200
1901-0518
1902-0041
1902-0048
1902-0049
1902-0518
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
80131
02735
80131
80131
80131
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00779
80131
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
FSCM
TABLE 6-4 (cont’d.)
PART NUMBER - NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER
CROSS REFERENCE INDEX
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART
NUMBER
5961-00-493-5428
5961-00-247-8437
5961-00-412-0957
5961-00-412-0958
5961-00-954-9182
5960-00-477-1203
5935-00-965-9612
5961-00-985-9073
5961-00-985-9074
5961-00-945-3380
5961-00-938-5100
5961-00-179-8478
5961-00-401-0507
5905-00-228-5989
5905-00-236-7416
5905-00-105-1774
5905-00-431-3183
5905-00-161-9090
5905-00-476-5718
5961-00-833-6626
5961-00-965-5917
5961-00-929-7778
5961-00-911-9275
5961-00-914-7496
5961-00-496-7363
5961-00-853-7934
5961-00-994-0520
5961-00-430-6819
5961-00-858-7372
5961-00-912-3099
5961-00-752-6121
5961-00-138-7317
9100-1611
9100-1612
9100-1616
9100-1618
9100-1622
9100-1623
9100-1629
9100-1630
5000-0050
5060-0767
5080-0271
5086-7010
52-0530-0000
8120-1348
9100-0346
9100-1610
9100-1643
9100-2247
9140-0051
2110-0004
2110-0269
2140-0253
251-06-30-261
252-06-30-300
252-12-30-300
252-22-30-340
3-332070-5
3101-0070
3101-1213
3101-1234
342014
50-046-0000
6-24
FSCM
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
98291
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
71785
71785
71785
71785
00779
28480
28480
28480
75915
98291
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
6625-01-014-8071
6625-00-903-0348
5961-00-513-2726
5962-00-483-1953
5935-00-107-2601
6150-01-004-8773
5950-00-780-7332
5950-00-431-3185
5950-00-438-4375
5950-00-438-4376
5950-00-835-1513
5950-00-431-3196
5950-00-431-3197
5950-00-476-5686
5950-00-430-6864
5950-00-431-3198
5950-00-443-9517
5950-00-405-3735
5950-00-069-7747
5920-00-798-5710
5920-00-280-8344
6240-00-078-9094
5935-00-974-6874
5935-00-188-0135
5935-00-448-2236
5935-00-147-7384
5935-00-104-1184
5930-00-919-1755
5930-00-237-1160
5930-00-406-8746
5920-00-881-4636
5935-00-917-9089
PART
NUMBER
9140-0096
9140-0114
9140-0129
9140-0141
9140-0144
9140-0158
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
FSCM
TABLE 6-4 (cont’d.)
PART NUMBER - NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER
CROSS REFERENCE INDEX
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART
NUMBER
5950-00-138-1381
5950-00-657-8167
5950-00-845-6927
5950-00-059-5919
5950-00-837-6029
5950-00-059-5920
6-25/6-26
FSCM
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
Section 7 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
7-3. The information in this section covers the manual changes necessary to backdate this manual so that it directly applies to 8443A Tracking Generator/Counters with serial numbers 1049A00440 and below, and 8443B
Tracking Generators with serial numbers 0973A00120 and below.
7-4. MANUAL BACK-DATING
SECTION VII
MANUAL CHANGES
Table 7-1. 8443A Back-Dating Serial Numbers
7-1. INTRODUCTION
7-2. As changes are made to the 8443A/B, newer instruments may have serial number prefixes not listed in this manual. The manuals for those instruments will be supplied with an additional "Manual Changes" insert containing the required information; contact your local
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office if this sheet is missing.
Serial Number Perform Manual or Prefix Changes (In Sequence)
955- I,H,G,F,E,D,C,B,A
964-00161 I,H,G,F,E,D,C,B to 00200
964-00201 I,H,G,F,E,D,C to 00220
964-00221 I,H,G,F,E,D to 00245
1049A00246 I,H,G,F,E to 00270
1049A00271 I,H,G,F to 00296
1049A00296 I,H,G to 00440
1049A00440 I,H to 1145A00560
1145A00561 I and above
7-5. Table 7-1 lists the serial number history of the
8443A, and Table 7-2 lists the serial number history of
the 8443B. The back-dating changes needed to document any instrument are listed opposite the serial
numbers. Table 7-4 lists the back-dating changes. Use
Table 7-1 or 7-2 to find the changes needed to document
your instrument. Then follow the instructions listed under the changes, perform the changes in the sequence listed
7-6. Table 7-3 is a summary of 8443A/B changes. It
cross references the changes to the assemblies they affect; it also shows whether the factory recommends that instruments be up-dated or not.
Table 7-2. 8443B Back-Dating Serial Numbers
Serial Number Perform Manual or Prefix Changes (In Sequence)
973-00110 I,H,G,F,E,D,C,B and below
973-00111 to I,H,G
0973A00120
0973A00121 I,H to 1142A00130
7-1
Section 7
Changes
A
B
C
D
E
F
A1
Assy
A2
Assy
A2***
A3
Assy
G
H
I
*No instrument up-date recommended.
**New part is preferred replacement part.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
A4
Assy
A5
Assy
R4
**
A6
Assy
Table 7-3. Changes Summary
A7 A8 A9
Assy Assy Assy
A10
Assy
L10
C17
Components Affected
A11
Assy
A12
Assy
A13
Assy
A14
Assy
A15
Assy
A16
Assy
A17
Assy
A18
Assy
A19
Assy
A20
Assy
Chassis
(no prefox)
J5*
FL1*
Covers for
Q1-4*
R19*
R20*
R21*
J1,2**
TR3-7**
MP1,2***
(RF absorbers)
MP8,9***
(fan filter)
MP10,11**
(A2,3 shaft couplers)
C5**
R7,8*
A13***
***This change is recommended for all prior seals.
****Modification to new configuration described in Service Note 8443a-4 (requires modification kit 08843-60078 for light gray front panel or 08443-60081 for mint gray front panel.
7-2
Section 7
CHANGE A
CHANGE B
CHANGE C
CHANGE D
CHANGE E
CHANGE F
CHANGE G
CHANGE H
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 7-4. Manual Back-Dating
Delete:
Add:
Capacitor A10C17 and inductor A10L10.
4 transistor insulating covers (Q1-4) 0349-0486.
Change: Line filter FL1 to 9100-2878.
Change: Power input connector J5 to 1251-2357.
Service Sheet 3 (schematic):
Delete: A10C17 and A10L10.
Change:
Change:
Resistors A11R19 and R21 to 0757-0401 R:FXD MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W
Resistor A11R20 to 0757-0398 R:FXD MET FLM 75 OHM 1% 1/8 W
Service Sheet 2 (schematic):
Change: A11R19 and R21 to 100 ohms.
Change: A11R20 to 75 ohms.
Change: Connectors A6J1, J2 and TP3 to 1250-1195 CONNECTOR: RF SUB-MINIATURE
SERIES
Change: Test point pins A6TP4-7 to 08443-00041
Delete: Cooling Fan Assembly A1A2.
Change: Low Frequency Counter Assembly A1 to 08443-60066.
Delete: Inductor A6L12.
Service Sheet 8 (schematic):
Delete: A6L12.
Delete: RF absorbers MP1 and 2.
Delete: Fan filter MP8 and filter retainer MP9.
Delete: Shaft couplers (for A2 and A3) MP10 and 11.
Add: Coupler yokes (4) 1500-0002 and insulated flexible couplings (2) 5040-0212.
Change capacitor A14C5 to 0180-1743 C:FXD ELECT 0.1 UF 10% 35 VDCW
Service Sheet 4 (schematic):
Change: A14C5 to 0.1 pF.
Change: A5R4 to 0698-3435 R:FXD 38.3 OHMS.
Change: A11R7 to 0698-3443 R:FXD 287 OHMS.
Change: A11R8to 0698-3428 R:FXD 14.7 OHMS.
Service Sheet 2 (schematic):
Change value of A11R7 to 270 ohms, and A11R8 to 31.6 ohms.
Service Sheet 7 (schematic):
Change value of A5R4 to 10 ohms.
7-3
Section 7
CHANGE I
Table 7-4. Manual Back-Dating (cont’d)
Change: A13 to 08443-60040
Delete:
Delete:
NOTE
08443-60112 is exchange assy for 08443-60040.
A13C21-28, A13CR6,7, A13Q5-10, and A13R21-34.
S2, W7, and W8.
Service Sheet 4:
Replace appropriate portions of Figure 8-23 with Figure 7-1.
Replace Figure 8-21 with Figure 7-2.
7-4
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Section 7 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 7-1. Changes for Figure 8-23 (Part of Change I)
7-5
Section 7 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 7-2. Changes for Figure 8-21 (Part of Change I)
7-6
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
8-1. INTRODUCTION
8-2. This section provides instructions for testing, troubleshooting and repairing the HP Model 8443A
Tracking Generator/Counter and the Model 8443B
Tracking Generator.
8- 3. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
8-4. Information relative to the principles of operation appears on the foldout pages opposing the Block
Diagrams, Service Sheet 1 for the Tracking Generator and Service Sheet 5 for the Counter Section (8443A).
This correlation of data will enable the reader to quickly relate functions to specific circuits without having to look in different parts of the manual.
SECTION VIII
SERVICE
troubleshooting tree, is designed to isolate the cause of a malfunction to a circuit or assembly.
8-9. The second maintenance level provides circiut analysis and test procedures to aid in isolating faults to a defective component. Circuit descriptions and test procedures for the second maintenance level are located on the page facing the schematic diagram of the circuit to be repaired.
8-10. After the cause of a malfunction has been found and remedied in any circuit containing adjustable components, the applicable procedure specified in
Section V of this manual should be performed.
8-11. REPAIR
8-5. RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT
8-6. Test equipment and accessories required to
maintain the Model 8443A/B are listed in Table 1-2. If
the equipment listed is not available, equipment that meets the minimum specifications shown may be substituted.
8-7. TROUBLESHOOTING
8-8. Troubleshooting procedures are divided into two maintenance levels in this manual. The first, a
8-12. Module Exchange. For the benefit of those who do not wish to repair at the component level, a module exchange program has been initiated for the Model
8443A/B. These factory-repaired modules are available at a considerable savings in cost over the cost of a new module.
8-13. These exchange modules should be ordered from the nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service
Office using the special part numbers in Table 6-1 of this
manual.
Figure 8-1. Model 8443A with Circuit Board Extended for Maintenance
8-1
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Virtually all orders for replacements received by HP offices are shipped the same day received either from the local office or from a Service Center.
8-14. Line Voltage Requirements. During adjustment and testing the Model 8443A/B must be connected to a source of power capable of delivering 74 watts of power at 115 or 230 volts ac
±
10%, single phase. If adjustment of the dc voltage regulators is required, the Model
8443A/B should be connected to the ac source through an adjustable auto-transformer. The line voltage to the
Model 8443A/B may then be adjusted to check regulator action when the line voltage is changed
±
10%.
8-17. Part Location Aids. The locations of chassis mounted parts and major assemblies are shown in
`Figure 8-18. The location of individual components
mounted on printed circuit boards or other assemblies are shown on the appropriate schematic page or on the page opposite it. The part reference designator is the assembly designation plus the part designation.
(Example: A10R1 is R1 on the A10 assembly.) For specific component description and ordering information
refer to the parts list in Section VI.
8-15. Servicing Aids on Printed Circuit Boards.
Servicing aids on printed circuit boards include test points, transistor designations, adjustment callouts and assembly stock numbers with alpha-numerical revision information.
8-16. Circuit Board Extenders. Circuit board extenders are provided with the Service Kit. These extenders enable the technician to extend the boards clear of the assembly to provide easy access to
components and test points. See Figure 8-1 for a typical
example of extender board use.
8-18. Factory Selected Components. Some component values are selected at the time of final checkout at the factory. Usually these values are not extremely critical; they are selected to provide optimum compatibility with associated component. These components, which are identified on the schematics with
an asterisk, are listed in Table 8-1. The recommended
procedure for replacing a factory selected component is as follows: a. Try the original value, then perform the test
specified in Section V of this manual for the circuit being
repaired.
b. If the specified test cannot be satisfactorily performed, try the typical value shown in the parts list and repeat the test.
Table 8-1. Factory Selected Components
Designation Location Purpose Range of Values
R12 Front Panel To center range of CTR ADJ 3.16 to 4.75K
A5R4 Time Base Adjusts 1 MHz ref. output. 5 to 20Q1
Select for 2.8 Vp-p at J3
(terminated in 50 I )
A6R22 HF Decade Adjust gain 24.6 to 38.3
A6R24 HF Decade Adjust dc level at input to 34.4 to 42.2
decade counter
A8R6 Video Amp Unleveled output adjust 10,23.7, 38.3, 56.2, 75, 100,
121,167,196, 215,261,
287, 348, 383,422,511
(Resistor values given resolve gain in 1 dB steps.)
A13R20 First Conv. Center range of TRACKING 348 to 1.47K
ADJUST potentiometer
A14R33 Sense Amp 20 volt adjust 110 to 1.2 K
A14R38 Sense Amp 6 volt adjust 1.47K to 2.61K
A14R43 Sense Amp -12 volt adjust 1.33K to 1.96K
A15R11 Rectifier +175 volt adjust 619 to 1.78K
8-2
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Table 8-2. Schematic Diagram Notes
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM NOTES
Resistance is in ohms, capacitance is in picofarads, and inductance is in mH unless otherwise noted.
P/O = part of.
*Asterisk denotes a factory-selected value. Value shown is typical. Capacitors may be omitted or resistors jumpered.
Screwdriver adjustment.
Ο
Panel control.
Encloses front panel designations.
Encloses rear panel designation.
Circuit assembly borderline.
Other assembly border line.
Heavy line with arrows indicates path and direction of main signal.
Heavy dashed line with arrows indicates path and direction of main feedback.
Wiper moves toward CW with clockwise rotation of control as viewed from shaft or knob.
Numbers in stars on circuit assemblies show locations of test points.
Encloses wire color code. Code used (MIL-STD-681) is the same as the resistor color code. First number identifies the base color, second number the wider stripe, and the third number identifies the narrower stripe. E.G., (947) denotes white base, yellow wide stripe, violet narrow stripe.
Indicates an output from a schematic that goes to an input identified as on Service Sheet 4.
Indicates an input to a schematic that comes from an output identified as
8-3
on Service Sheet 2.
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
c. If the test results are still not satisfactory, substitute various values within the tolerances specified
in Table 8-1 until the desired result is obtained.
8-19. Diagram Notes. Table 8-2, Schematic
Diagram Notes, provides information relative to symbols and values shown on schematic diagrams.
8-20. GENERAL SERVICE HINTS
b. Do not use a high power soldering iron on etched circuit boards. Excessive heat may lift a conductor or damage the board.
c. Use a suction device (Table 8-3) or wooden
toothpick to remove solder from component mounting holes.
CAUTION
8-21. The etched circuit boards used in Hewlett-Packard equipment are the plated-through type consisting of metallic conductors bonded to both sides of an insulating material. The metallic conductors are extended through the component holes by a plating process. Soldering can be performed on either side of the board with equally
good results. Table 8-3 lists recommended tools and
materials for use in repairing etched circuit boards.
Following are recommendations and precautions pertinent to etched circuit repair work.
a. Avoid unnecessary component substitution; it can result in damage to the circuit board and/or adjacent components.
Do not use a sharp metal object such as an awl or twist drill for this purpose. Sharp objects may damage the plated-through conductor.
d. After soldering, remove excess flux from the soldered areas and apply a protective coating to prevent contamination and corrosion.
8-22. Component Replacement. The following procedures are recommended when component replacement is necessary: a. Remove defective component from board.
Item
Soldering tool
Soldering* Tip
De-soldering aid
Resin (flux) solvent
Solder
Protective
Coating
Use
Soldering
Unsoldering
Table 8-3. Etched Circuit Soldering Equipment
Specification
Wattage rating: 47-1/2
56-1/2
Tip Temp: 850 - 9000
*Shape: pointed Soldering
Unsoldering
To remove molten solder from connection
Suction device
Item Recommended
-Ungar #776 handle with
*Ungar #4037 Heating Unit
*Ungar #PL111
Soldapullt by Edsyn Co., Arleta,
California
Remove excess flux from soldered area before application of protective coating
Must not dissolve etched circuit base board material or conductor bonding agent
Freon
Acetone
Lacquer Thinner
Isopropyl
Alcohol (100% dry)
Component replacement
Circuit board repair
Resin (flux) core, high tin content (60/40 tin/lead), 18 gauge (SWG) preferred
Wiring
Contamination, corrosion protection
Good electrical insulation, corrosion-prevention properties
Krylon R ** #1302
Humiseal Protective Coating,
Type 1B12 by Columbia
Technical Corp., Woodside 77, New York
*For working on etched Poards: for general purpose work, use Ungar #1237 Heating Unit (37.5W, tip temp of 750
B00 ) and Ungar ;;PL113 1/8 inch chisel tip
’*Krylon. Inc., Norristown, Pennsylvanla
8-4
Section 8
b. If component was unsoldered, remove solder
from mounting holes with a suction device (Table 8-3) or
a wooden toothpick.
c. Shape leads of replacement component to match mounting hole spacing.
d. Insert component leads into mounting holes and position component as original was positioned. Do not force leads into mounting holes; sharp lead ends may damage the plated-through conductor.
Note
Although not recommended when both sides of the circuit board are accessible, axial lead components such as resistors and tubular capacitors, can be replaced without unsoldering. Clip leads near body of defective component, remove component and straighten leads left in board. Wrap leads of replacement component one turn around original leads. Solder wrapped connection and clip off excess lead.
8-23. BASIC SERVICE INFORMATION
8-24. Since basic service information appears in the
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Spectrum Analyzer Service Manual, it will not be repeated here.
8-25. LOGIC CIRCUITS AND SYMBOLS
8-26. The following paragraphs and illustrations provide basic information about logic circuits and symbols.
While a complete treatment of the subject is not within the scope of this manual, it is believed that this material will help the technician experienced with analog devices, who has had little or no experience with digital circuits.
8-27. The circuits discussed are digital in nature; their outputs are always in one of two possible states, a "1" or
"0". These two states are also referred to as being either high (H) or low (L). The high and low states are relative; low must be less positive (more negative) than high, both states may be positive or negative, or high may be positive and low negative. In positive logic the more positive (H) state is a logical "1" and the more negative
(L) state is a logical "0". In negative logic the more negative (L) state is a logical "1" and the more positive
(H) state is a logical “0".
8-28. Two of the basic "building blocks" of logic circuits are the AND and OR gates. The symbols and truth tables for basic AND and OR gates are shown in
Figure 8-2. Basic AND and OR Gates.
8-5
Section 8
Table 8-4. Logic Symbology
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
8-6
Section 8
Table 8-4. Logic Symbology (Cont.)
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
8-7
Section 8
Table 8-4. Logic Symbology (Cont.)
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
8-8
Section 8
8-29. Basic AND Gate (Positive logic). The basic AND gate is a circuit which produces an output "1" when, and only when, a "1" is applied to all inputs. As shown in
Figure 8-2, terminal X will be high only when terminals A
and B are both high. The dot (•) shown in the AND gate is the logic term for AND. The term for a simple two input AND gate is X = A • B (X equals A and B). AND gates may be designed to have as many inputs as required to fill a specific requirement.
8-30. Basic OR Gate (Positive logic). The basic OR gate is a circuit which procedures a "1" output when any one, or all of the inputs are in a "1" state. As shown in
Figure 8-2, terminal X will be high when either terminal A
or terminal B, or both are high. The + shown in the OR gate symbol is the logic term for OR. The term for a simple two input OR gate is X = A + B (X equals A or B).
OR gates may be designed to have as many inputs as required for specific needs.
8-31. The symbols for AND and OR gates differ in that
AND gate symbols have a flat input side and a rounded output side while OR gate symbols have a concave input side and a pointed output side.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
8-32. Truth Tables. Truth tables provide a means of presenting the output state of logic devices for any set of inputs in tabular form. Truth tables contain one column for each of the inputs and a column for the output. In basic truth tables the column notations are usually H or L
(for high and low) or, for binary notation, "1" or "0". More complex truth tables use other terms which will be explained where these tables appear in the text.
8-33. Logic Inversion. Adding inversion to AND and
OR gates changes their characteristics. Inversion is usually accomplished by adding an inverter stage
(common emitter) in front of an input or after an output.
A circle added to the input or output leads indicates the portion of the circuit in which the inversion takes place.
The simplest of these devices are AND and OR gates in which the output is inverted. These gates are called
NAND (for Not AND) and NOR (for Not OR). Basic
NAND and NOR gates are shown in Figure 8-3. When
all inputs and outputs of an AND gate are inverted, it functions as an OR gate. When all inputs and outputs of an OR gate are inverted, it functions as an AND gate.
Figure 8-4 provides information relative to various gate
inversion functions.
Figure 8-3. Basic NAND and NOR Gates
8-9
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-4. Logic Comparison Diagrams
8-34. When inversion is used the designation at the inverted terminal is frequently termed A (not A), B (not
B), X (not X), etc. Table 8-4 shows basic logic, circuits
and associated symbology.
8-35. Binary Circuits. Many types of flip-flops are used in binary circuits. Each half of a flip-flop is in one of two states at any given time. The outputs are complementary; when one stage is on, the other is off.
The outputs are termed 1 and 0, high and low, or true and false, by the same rules that apply to AND and OR gates. The outputs may be identified in many different ways. This text identifies these outputs as Q and Q for the sake of uniformity. Basic flip-flops which are particularly adaptable to binary circuits and combinations of flip-flops are discussed in the following paragraphs.
8-36. Basic NOR Gate Flip-Flop. Figure 8-5 illustrates
a flip-flop constructed with two NOR gates. Operation of the circuit is described below. Assume that initially Q is high and Q is low, and A and B are both low. When a high is applied to input A, Q goes low and since there are now two lows applied to NOR gate 2, Q will go high. The
Q high is applied back to NOR gate 1, but since Q is already low, no change in state results. When a high is applied to input B the flip-flop again reverses State.
Since the flip-flop will remain in the last state to which it is set, it "remembers" which signal was last received, and can be used as a memory circuit.
8-37. Triggered Flip-Flop. Figure 8-6 illustrates a
triggered flip-flop which changes state each time a pulse of a given polarity is applied to the input. The output of a triggered flip-flop is a square wave at one half the frequency of the input triggers. In the circuit shown in
Figure 8-6 the input may be negative going triggers or a
square wave. If the input is a square wave it will be differentiated by C2 to produce both negative going and positive going pulses. Assume that initially Q is low (Q2 on) and Q is high Q1 off).
Figure 8-5. Basic NOR Gate Flip-Flop
8-10
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-6. Triggered Flip-Flop
When a negative going trigger appears at the junction of
CR1 and CR2 it has no effect on Q2 through CR2 because output Q is low. However, CR1 is forward biased by the high at Q and the trigger is coupled to the collector of Q1. As the collector of Q1 is driven in a negative direction the trigger is also coupled through C1 to the base of Q2. As Q2 begins to cut off, the positive going collector voltage is coupled to the base of Q1 through C3 to drive Q1 into conduction. The process is regenerative; Q2 cuts off quickly and Q1 goes into saturation. The next negative going trigger reverses the procedure just described.
8-38. Reset-Set (RS) Flip-Flop. Figure 8-7 shows an
RS flip-flop. The RS flip-flop has two inputs, S for Set and R for Reset (sometimes labeled S for set and C for clear). Assume that initially Q is high (Q2 off) and Q is low (Q1 on). In this state the flip-flop is set and a positive pulse at the set input will not affect the circuit. When a positive pulse is applied to the reset input it is coupled through C4 and CR2 to the base of Q2. Q2 begins to conduct and the negative going collector voltage is coupled through C3 to the base of Q1 to cut off Q1. The process is regenerative; Q1 is quickly cut off and Q2 saturates. The flip-flop will remain in the reset state until a positive set pulse is applied through C2 and
CR1 to the base of Q1. Note that operation of the RS flip-flop is the same as operation of the basic NOR gate
flip-flop described in paragraph 8-36.
8-39. RST Flip-Flop. Figure 8-8 illustrates a RST flip-
flop which is a combination of reset-set and triggered flipflops. In the circuit shown, negative trigger pulses will make the flip-flop change states. Positive pulses are required for the set and reset inputs. A positive set input will cause Q. to go high and a positive reset pulse will cause Q to go high.
840. Clocked JK Flip-Flop. A clocked JK flip-flop is triggered by an input clock pulse when certain conditions
prevail at the J and K inputs. Figure 8-9 illustrates the
logic symbol for a JK flip-flop derived from a RS flip-flop
and two three-input AND gates. Figure 8-10 shows a
typical JK flip-flop integrated circuit schematic diagram.
JK flip-flops have three inputs (J, K and Clock) and complementary outputs.
8-11
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
JK flip-flops used as decade counters also have clear or reset inputs, preset and in some cases, a blanking input.
When the J and K inputs are both high the flip-flop changes state every time a clock pulse appears; operation is the same as a triggered flip-flop. When the
J input is high and the K input is low Q will go high; operation is the same as the reset in RS flip-flops. When the J input is low and the K input is high Q will go high; operation is the same as the reset in RS flip-flops. When the J and K inputs are both low clock pulses do not affect the circuit. Frequently JK flip-flops are shown schematically with no connection shown to the J and K inputs; when this occurs, both J and K are actually held high and the circuit functions as a triggered flip-flop.
8-41. Binary Logic. The following paragraphs will explain the basic binary logic required to understand the operation of the dividers and decade counters used in a frequency counter.
8-42. In frequency counters the decimal numbers 0 through 9 are displayed on each readout device. For this reason, only binary numbers 0000 through 1001, which correspond to decimal numbers 0 through 9 will be discussed in this text. The only exception to this is the
discussion of Figure 8-11 which follows.
Figure 8-7. RS Flip-Flop
8-43. Figure 8-11 illustrates four triggered flip-flops in
series, with the Q outputs of the first three driving the trigger inputs of the next flip-flop. Since each flip-flop is triggered only by negative going excursions of the input signal, each provides one cycle of output signal for two cycles of input signal The flip-flops, then are weighted in ascending powers of two. The first flip-flop has a weighted value of 20 (1), the second has a weighted value of 21 (2), the third has a weighted value of 22 (2 x
2 = 4) and the fourth has a weighted value of 23 (2 x 2 x
2 = 8).
8-44. Assume that initially the flip-flops in Figure 8-11
were all set to 0 (Q low). When seven input cycles have been received the flip-flops have operated as follows; the first has been turned on (Q high) by inputs 1, 3, 5 and 7, and turned off (Q low) by inputs 2, 4 and 6. The second flip-flop has been turned on by the first and third outputs of the first flip-flop (coincident with initial inputs 2 and 6) and turned off by the second output of the first flip-flop
(coincident with initial input 4). The third flip-flop has been turned on by the first negative going output of the second flip-flop (coincident with initial input 4). The fourth flip-flop has not been triggered because there has been no negative going output from flip-flop three. The first three flip-flops are now in the 1 state (Q high) and the binary state is 1110.
8-12
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-8. RST Flip-Flop
Their decimal weighted value then is 20 + 21 + 22 = 1 +
2 + 4 = 7. The next negative input to the chain will cause the first three flip-flops to go off and the fourth to go on.
The binary state then is 0001; the decimal weighted value is 0 + 0 + 0 + 23 = 0 + 0 + 0 + 8 = 8.
8-45. As the timing diagram in Figure 8-11 indicates,
four flip-flops in this configuration are capable of counting up to 16. Since only the decimal digits 0 through 9 are used in counter circuits, a means must be provided to limit the count to ten. A means must also be provided to reset the flip-flops to zero before beginning a new count.
The means by which these facilities are provided are discussed in later paragraphs.
8-46. Since binary numbers, like decimal numbers, are written in ascending order from right to left, the weighted values of the flip-flops are easier to understand in 8, 4, 2,
1 order. Table 8-6 lists the true binary numbers for 8, 4,
2, 1 binary weights and their decimal equivalents.
8-47. A Simple 8421 BCD Code Decade Counter.
Figure 8-12 illustrates a simplified decade counter using
triggered RS flip-flops. This circuit operates like the
circuit shown in Figure 8-11 up through decimal count 9
(binary 1001).
Figure 8-9. Clocked JK Flip-Flop
8-13
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-10. JK Master-Slave flip-flop (Typical)
8-14
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-11. 16 Counter Binary Counter Chain
8-15
Section 8
J
1
1
0
0
Table 8-5. JK Flip-Flop Truth Table
K
0
1
0
1
Before Trigger After Trigger
Q
0
0
1
1
Q
1
1
0
0
Q
1
1
1
0
Q
0
0
0
1
8 - 23
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Table 8-6. 16 Count Binary Truth Table
4 = 22
Binary
2 = 21
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
O
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1 = 20
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Decimal
11
12
13
14
15
0
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
When the tenth pulse is received at the input flip-flop point A goes low, flip-flop point B goes high and the flipflops are temporarily in the 1010 state. Almost immediately the output from B causes D to reset and the output from D then causes B to reset. The end result is that all flip-flops are reset to 0 by the tenth pulse and are ready to begin the next count. This circuit is useful as a divide by ten decade. To be used as a frequency counter a reset must be provided to reset all flip-flops to zero when the count ends at a number other than ten.
8-48. Blanking Decade Counter. Figure 8-13
illustrates a blanking decade counter. The circuit will divide by ten and provide BCD (binary coded decimal) outputs for decimal numbers 0 through 9. In addition, the A, B, C and D outputs may be set to 1111 (15) to cause the numerical readout device to be blanked.
8-49. The output of the blanking control NAND gate is normally high. When the JK flip-flops are reset their Q outputs go high. After reset and before the frequency count begins the outputs of the A, D, B and C NAND gates are normally low because both inputs are high.
Now if the blanking control input goes high and Q of the first flip-flop is high, the blanking control NAND gate output goes low and the outputs of the A, D, B and C
NAND gates go high. In actual use, inverter: follow the
A, D, B and C NAND gates to provide a negative logic
BCD output of 1111 (decimal 15) to the decoders which have no gate to accept 1111, so none of the elements in the numerical readout devices are energized.
8-50. Buffer-Store. In frequency counters it is necessary to transfer the information stored in the decade counters to display decoders prior to starting the next count. Isolation must also be provide to prevent
Figure 8-12. 8421 BCD Decade Counter
8-16
Section 8
the display from being affected by a count while it is in
progress. Figure 8-14 shows a typical buffer-store
circuit.
8-51. The terminals labeled A, B, C and D at the bottom
of Figure 8-14 are connected to the outputs of the
decade counters. Operation of the buffer-store is described below. Normally the input labeled TRANSFER is high, the inverter output is low and all of the AND gates between the BCD inputs and the RS flip-flops are disabled. When the transfer pulse appears one of the two AND gates between the inputs and the RS flip-flops goes high. Assume that when the transfer pulse appears the A input is low. The output of the reset AND gate of the first RS flip-flop goes high, the input to the A inverter goes high and the inverter output goes low. If the A, B, C and D outputs are to be used, the GATE input must be high in order for the output NAND gates to function.
With the A input low the input to the A NAND gate from the RS flip-flop will be low and the NAND gate output will be high. When the A input is high the set AND gate output is high, both inputs to the A NAND gate
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
are high and the A output is low. At the same time the input to the A inverter is low, so A is high. Operation of the B, C and D circuits is identical to the A circuit.
Typically the A, B, C and D outputs are used to drive decoders and the A, B, C and D outputs are used to drive recorders, Digital to Analog converters, etc.
8-52. Decoder-Driver. Decoder-drivers provide a means to "translate" the BCD binary code to a decimal equivalent to drive numerical readout devices. Figure 8-
15 shows ten four-input AND gates connected as a decoder. Each AND gate will respond to one, and only one, of the binary equivalents of decimal numbers 0 through 9. Example: the number 1 gate will provide a high output only when A is low and B, C and D are high.
8-53. Integrated Circuits. Many circuits used in counters and other equipment are available as integrated circuits. The last three circuits discussed are all
available as integrated circuits. Figure 8-16 shows some
of the packages used for integrated circuits.
Figure 8-13. Blanking Decade Counter
8-17
Section 8 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-14. Buffer/Store
Figure 8-15. Decoder
8-18
Figure 8-18. Chassis Mounted Parts and Assembly Locations
8-23
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Section 8
SERVICE SHEET 1
General
The HP 8443A Tracking Generator/Counter and the 8443B Tracking
Generator were designed for use in conjunction with the HP 8553/8552
Spectrum Analyzer.
The HP 8443A/B output frequency is swept (or tuned to a fixed frequency) by the three local oscillators in the Spectrum Analyzer. The output frequency of the HP 8443A/B always tracks the frequency to which the analyzer is tuned.
The HP 8443A counter section provides a means of stopping the Spectrum
Analyzer scan and counts the output frequency of the Tracking Generator while the analyzer scan is stopped. The counter may also be used to count the frequency of an external source. BCD information from the frequency counter is available at the rear of the instrument to drive external equipment.
The HP 8443A Counter Section is described in detail on Service Sheet 5.
First Converter (A13)
The first converter assembly consists of a 3 MHz crystal controlled Colpitts oscillator, a 3 MHz buffer amplifier, a 47 MHz buffer amplifier and a diode quad bridge mixer.
The 47 MHz input from the analyzer third local oscillator (approximately -7 dBm) is amplified 14 dB and applied to the bridge mixer. The other input to the bridge is the 3 MHz output of the crystal controlled Colpitts oscillator. The output from the bridge is a 50 MHz fixed frequency or, when the analyzer is operated in the stabilized mode, a swept frequency (up to 200 kHz) centered at 50 MHz. Output signal level is nominally -26 dBm. Detailed operation of the first converter and service instructions appear on Service Sheet 2.
50 MHz Amplifier (A12)
The 50 MHz amplifier consists of a two-stage (approximately 11 dB gain) amplifier and a bandpass filter.
The bandwidth of the bandpass filter at the 3 dB points is approximately 4
MHz. Traps are provided to suppress the 47 MHz input from the analyzer and
44 MHz image response.
Detailed operation of the 50 MHz amplifier and service instructions appear on
Service Sheet 2.
Second Converter (A11)
The second converter assembly consists of a three-stage amplifier and a diode quad bridge mixer.
The amplifier isolates the analyzer second local oscillator from the HP
8443A/B and provides approximately 20 dB of gain.
The diode quad bridge mixes the 150 MHz signal from the analyzer with the signal from the 50 MHz IF to produce an output IF signal of 200 MHz. The output level is about -38 dBm.
Detailed operation and service information is on Service Sheet 2.
200 MHz Amplifier (A10)
The 200 MHz amplifier contains a two-stage variable-gain amplifier and a bandpass filter.
The gain of the amplifier is controlled by the ALC signal from the Video
Amplifier/Automatic Level Control Assembly.
The maximum gain of the 200 MHz amplifier is about 20 dB.
Detailed operation and service information appears on Service Sheet 3.
Third Converter (A9)
The third converter consists of a three-stage fixed-gain 200 to 310 MHz amplifier, a diode quad mixer and a low pass filter.
The amplifier isolates the HP 8443A/B from the analyzer first local oscillator and provides approximately 20 dB of gain.
The bandwidth of the frequencies processed through the amplifier is determined by the position of the SCAN WIDTH switch on the Spectrum
Analyzer RF section.
8-24
SERVICE SHEET 1 (cont'd)
When the analyzer is operated in narrow scan widths (20 kHz per division or less) in the stabilized mode, the analyzer first local oscillator output is a fixed frequency. (The analyzer third local oscillator is swept when the first local oscillator is not.)
The diode quad mixer mixes the input from the analyzer first local oscillator and the output from the 200 MHz amplifier to produce a 0 to 110 MHz signal or any portion of this range of frequencies. When the analyzer is operated in the
ZERO) scan mode the output from the mixer is a fixed frequency.
The 120 MHz low pass filter provides approximately 75 dB rejection to frequencies above 200 MHz. The 3 dB cutoff point is at 120 MHz. Detailed operation and service information appears on Service Sheet 3.
Video Amplifier/ALC (A8)
The Video Amplifier/ALC (automatic level control) circuit consists of two amplifiers and a comparator. The input video amplifier provides 32 dB of gain and the second amplifier provides 20 dB of gain.
The comparator is referenced to a fixed level which is controlled by the 0 to
1.2 dB vernier to provide the automatic level control signal to the 200 MHz amplifier.
When the 0 to 1.2 dB vernier is set to 0 the RF output to the 0 to 120 dB attenuator is a constant +10 dBm. The 0 to 1.2 dB vernier may be used to attenuate the RF output linearly from 0 to 1.2 dB. Detailed operation and service information appears on Service Sheet 3.
RF Attenuators (A2 and A3)
There are two precision step attenuators connected in series with the RF
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
output. The first is a 0 to 120 dB, 10 dB per step attenuator. The second is a
0 to 12 dB, 1 dB per step attenuator. These attenuators, in conjunction with the 0 to 1.2 dB vernier provide accurate control of the output signal at any level between +10 dBm and -123.2 dBm. Detailed operation and service information appears on Service Sheet 3.
Power Supplies and Regulators (A14 and A15)
All dc power supplies use a common power transformer and all are referenced to the +24 volt supply.
When the instrument is in the standby mode the +24 volt supply functions to maintain crystal oven temperature and avoid long warmup periods when the instrument is placed in service. In the standby mode all other power supplies are disabled.
The regulated power supplies provide +170, +24, +20, +6 and -12 volts. A zener circuit in the high frequency decade (A5) reduces the -12 volt level to -6 volts for use in counter circuits.
Silicon controlled rectifier "crowbar" protection is provided for the +24, +20, +6 and -12 volt regulators. A reset feature is provided to reset the "crowbar" should it be tripped by a transient.
Current limiting circuits provide further protection for the 8443A/B circuits.
Detailed operation and service information appears on Service Sheet 4.
Counter Circuits
The 8443A counter circuits are discussed on Service Sheet 5 and Service
Sheets for the individual counter section circuits.
Section 8
Figure 8-16. Integrated Circuit Packing
8-19
Section 8
8443A COUNTER TROUBLE SHOOTING TREE
8443A COUNTER TROUBLESHOOTING TREE
Figure 8-17. Troubleshooting Tree (Sheet 1 of 2)
8-20
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Section 8
8443A/B OVERALL TROUBLESHOOTING TREE
Figure 8-17. Troubleshooting Tree (Sheet 2 of 2)
8-21/8-22
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Section 8
Assembly
A1 Low Frequency Counter
A2 0-120 dB Attenuator
A3 0-12 dB Attenuator
A4 Reference Oscillator
A5 Time Base Assembly
A6 High Frequency Decade
A7 Marker Control
A8 ALC/Video Amplifier
A9 Third Converter
A10 200 MHz IF Amplifier
A11 Second Converter
A12 50 MHz IF Amplifier
A13 First Converter
A14 Sense Amplifiers
A15 Rectifier Assembly
A16 Switch Assembly
A17 Interconnection
Jack Assembly
A18 Mother Board
Assembly
A19 Digital Output
Assembly
A20 Marker Position
Assembly
Table 8-7. Assembly and Component Locations
Schematic
Service Sheet 9, 10
Service Sheet 3
Service Sheet 3
None
Service Sheet 7
Service Sheet 8
Service Sheet 6
Service Sheet 3
Service Sheet 3
Service Sheet 3
Service Sheet 2
Service Sheet 2
Service Sheet 2
Service Sheet 4
Service Sheet 4
Service Sheet 11
Service Sheet 2, 3, 6
Service Sheet 11
Service Sheet 2, 10
Service Sheet 11
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Photo
Service Sheet 9, 10
Service Sheet 7
Service Sheet 8
Service Sheet 6
Service Sheet 3
Service Sheet 3
Service Sheet 3
Service Sheet 2
Service Sheet 2
Service Sheet 2
Service Sheet 4
Service Sheet 4
Service Sheet 11
Figure 8-19. Overall Block Diagram
8-25
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SERVICE SHEET 2
Normally, the cause of a malfunction in the model 8443A/B will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the
Troubleshooting Tree.
When trouble has been isolated to a specific circuit, the circuit board should be removed and reinstalled using an extender board, to provide easy access to test points and components.
All tests are based on the assumption that the model 8443A/B is interconnected with an 8443/8552/140 Spectrum Analyzer which is known to be operating properly.
Equipment Required:
Digital Voltmeter
Shielded Probe
Dummy Load
0 to 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer
Spectrum Analyzer Control Settings:
Service Kit
BNC Tee
BNC to BNC Cable
Power.......................................................................................................... ON
DISPLAY CONTROLS ....................................................... Set for clear display
SCAN WIDTH
PER DIVISION .................................................................................2 MHz
SCAN WIDTH ........................................................................... PER DIVISION
BANDWIDTH ....................................................................................... 300 kHz
INPUT ATTENUATION ............................................................................10 dB
LOG REF LEVEL ....................................................................................0 dBm
LOG/LINEAR ............................................................................................ LOG
SCAN TIME
PER DIVISION ............................................................ 20 MILLISECONDS
VIDEO FILTER ..........................................................................................OFF
Tracking Generator/Counter Control Settings:
POWER ...................................................................................................... ON
RF OUTPUT
LEVEL dBm .................................................................. All controls set to 0
Note
In individual tests only those controls mentioned need to be changed. Other control settings are compatible with previous tests.
First Converter Assembly A13
The first converter assembly consists of a 3 MHz crystal controlled oscillator, a
47 MHz buffer amplifier, a diode quad bridge, a 3 MHz buffer amplifier, and a restore-signal amplifier.
The 3 MHz oscillator is a Colpitts crystal controlled oscillator with a varactor as a fine frequency control element. Since a decrease in the capacity of the varactor results in an increase in oscillator frequency, inductor L2 is tuned as required to lower the frequency and center the range of the varactor control.
The frequency is variable by the varactor approximately 400 Hz. The 3 MHz oscillator supplies approximately 12 mVolts to one side of the diode quad mixer. A buffer stage is provided which isolates the 3 MHz test point to prevent loading the circuit when measurements are taken during maintenance.
The 47 MHz buffer isolates the spectrum analyzer third local oscillator from the model 8443A/B and provides about 14 dB of gain. When the analyzer is operated in wide scan modes (unstabilized) the 47 MHz signal from the analyzer is a fixed frequency. When the analyzer is operated in narrow scan width modes (stabilized) the 47 MHz signal is swept in frequency.
The restore-signal amplifier circuitry disables the 3 MHz oscillator and applies the 3 MHz IF signal from the IF Section to the mixer whenever the FUNCTION switch is set to RESTORE SIGNAL. The signal at the base of Q5 is approximately 0.4 to 4 mVrms; gain from Q5-b to Q7-3 is 100. Q8 and Q9 usually function as a limiter; however, small signal gain is about 10, and the signal at Q9-c is approximately 40 m Vp-p.
The diode quad mixer is a conventional mixer which accepts the 3 MHz and
47 MHz signals and produces a 50 MHz output. (When the analyzer is operated in narrow scan stabilized modes the bridge output is swept, in frequency, by an amount determined by the setting of the SCAN WIDTH control on the analyzer.)
Test Procedure 1
Test 1-a. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the presence of -12 volts and +20 volts at terminals shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 1-b. Connect the 50 MHz output from the A13 assembly to the analyzer
RF INPUT. Tune the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz and center the
50 MHz signal on the CRT. A CRT presentation similar to waveform SS2-1 should be ovserved. If the correct wave-form is observed the assembly is operating properly. If the CRT presentation is not correct, proceed to test 1-c.
When a malfunction is found and corrected in any of the following steps, repeat test 1-b.
Test 1-c. Connect the 47 MHz input to the A13 assembly from the analyzer to the analyzer RF INPUT. Tune the analyzer to 47 MHz. Set analyzer SCAN
WIDTH to .2 MHz. A presentation similar to SS2-2 should be observed on the analyzer CRT. If the CRT presentation is correct, proceed to test 1-d. If not, check the wiring to the analyzer.
Test 1-d. Connect Test Point 2 (Q2-c) to the analyzer RF INPUT and monitor the analyzer CRT for a display similar to that shown in waveform SS2-3. If the
CRT display is correct, proceed to test 1-f. If not, proceed to test 1-e.
Test 1-e. Connect Test Point 3 (Q1-c) to the analyzer RF INPUT and monitor the analyzer CRT for a display similar to, but about 10 dB less than, waveform
SS2-3. If the display is correct check Q2 and associated components. If the display is not correct check Q1 and associated components.
Test 1-f. Connect Test Point 1 to the analyzer RF INPUT and tune the analyzer to display the 3 MHz signal. The CRT display should be similar to waveform SS2-3. Proceed to test 1-g.
Test 1-g. Connect Test Point 4 to the analyzer RF INPUT. The analyzer CRT display should be similar to waveform SS2-3. If the display is not present check Q4 and associated components. If the display is present, but was not present in test 1-f, check Q3 and associated components.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
If the cause of the malfunction has not been found in any of the preceding tests, trouble is probably T1, T2 or the diode quad. Repair as required and repeat test 1-b.
Note
After repairing the first converter assembly it should be adjusted in accordance with instructions in paragraph 5-
14 of this manual to assure reliable operation of the
instrument.
2 50 MHz IF Amplifier Assembly A12
The 50 MHz amplifier assembly consists of a two-stage amplifier and a bandpass filter. Gain of the amplifier is approximately 12 dB. The bandwidth of the 50 MHz bandpass filter at the 3 dB points is about 4 MHz. L3/C6/C8 and L6/C15/C17 are 44 MHz traps. L5/C9/C10 is a 47 MHz trap.
Test Procedure 2
Test 2-a. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the presence of +20 volts at terminals shown on the schematic diagram. Proceed to test 2-b.
Test 2-b. Connect the 50 MHz output from the A12 assembly to the analyzer
RF INPUT and tune the analyzer to 50 MHz. Set the analyzer SCAN WIDTH to .2 MHz/DIV. The analyzer CRT display should be similar to that of waveform SS2-2. If the display is correct the assembly is functioning properly.
If not, proceed to test 2-c.
Test 2-c. Connect Test Point 1 to the analyzer RF INPUT (be sure to ground the coax shield at the A12 assembly). The analyzer CRT display should be similar to that of waveform SS2-2 (about -14 dB). If the analyzer display is correct, proceed to test 2-d. If not, the bandpass filter is probably defective.
Test 2-d. Connect Test Point 2 (Q1-c) to the analyzer RF INPUT. A waveform similar to that shown in waveform SS2-3 should appear on the analyzer CRT (about -27 dB). If the waveform is not present check Q1 and associated components
If the waveform is present but was not in test 2-c, check Q2 and associated components. Repeat test 2-b.
Note
After repairing the 50 MHz amplifier assembly it should be adjusted in accordance with instructions in paragraph 5-
15 of this manual to assure reliable operation of the
instrument.
Second Converter Assembly A11
The second converter assembly contains a three-stage amplifier and a diode quad bridge mixer. The amplifier isolates the analyzer second local oscillator
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
from the model 8443A/B and provides about 20 dB of gain. The diode quad bridge mixes the 150 MHz signal from the analyzer with the 50 MHz signal from the 50 MHz amplifier to produce an output rf signal of 200 MHz.
Test Procedure 3
Test 3-a. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the presence of +20 volts at terminals shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 3-b. Connect the 200 MHz output from the All assembly to the 0 to 1250
MHz analyzer RF INPUT. Be sure that coax shield is grounded at the All assembly. Set the 0 to 1250 MHz analyzer controls to the same positions as the controls on the 8553/8552/140 except set SCAN WIDTH to .5 MHz/DIV.
The 0 to 1250 MHz analyzer CRT should be similar to SS2-4. If the correct display is observed, the All assembly is functioning properly. If not, proceed to test 3-c.
Test 3-c. Connect Test Point 1 (Q3-c) to the 0 to 1250 MHz analyzer RF
INPUT and tune the analyzer to 150 MHz. The analyzer display should be similar to waveform SS2-5. If the correct display is observed trouble is probably in the diode quad bridge mixer or associated components. Repair and repeat test 3b. If the correct display is not observed, proceed to test 3-d.
Test 3-d. Connect Test Point 2 (Q2-c) to the 0 to 1250 MHz analyzer RF
INPUT. The analyzer display should be similar to waveform SS2-6. If the display is correct, check Q3 and associated components and repair as required. After repairs perform test 3-b. If the correct waveform is not observed, proceed to test 3-e.
Test 3-e. Connect Test Point 3 (Q1-c) to the 0 to 1250 MHz analyzer RF
INPUT. The analyzer display should be similar to waveform SS2-5 (about 3 dB lower). If the display is correct, check Q2 and associated components.
After repairs repeat test 3-b. If the display is not correct proceed to test 3-f.
Test 3-f. Connect the 150 MHz input from the analyzer to the RF INPUT of the 0 to 1250 MHz analyzer. The CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS2-6. If the waveform is correct check Q1 and associated components. If the waveform is not correct check the wiring to the analyzer.
After repairs repeat test 1-b.
Note
After repairing the second converter it should be checked
in accordance with paragraph 5-16 of this manual to
assure reliable operation of the instrument.
Figure 8-20. All Second Converter, Cover and Components
8-26
Section 8
Figure 8-21. A13, First Converter, Cover and Components
Figure 8-22. A12, 50 MHz Amplifier, Cover and Components
8-27
Figure 8-23. First and Second Converter and IF Amplifier, Schematic Diagram
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SERVICE SHEET 3
Normally, the cause of a malfunction in the model 8443A/B will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the
Troubleshooting Tree.
When the trouble has been isolated to a specific circuit, the circuit board should be removed and reinstalled using an extender board to provide easy access to test points and components.
All tests are based on the assumption that the model 8443A/B is interconnected with a HP 8553/8552/140 Spectrum Analyzer which is known to be operating properly.
Equipment Required:
Digital Voltmeter
Shielded Probe
Variable Voltage
Power Supply
Spectrum Analyzer Control Settings:
Service Kit
0 - 1250 MHz
Spectrum Analyzer
BNC to BNC coaxial Cable
POWER ...................................................................................................... ON
DISPLAY CONTROLS ....................................................... Set for clear display
SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION ..............................................................10 MHz
SCAN WIDTH ........................................................................... PER DIVISION
BANDWIDTH ....................................................................................... 300 kHz
INPUT ATTENUATION ............................................................................10 dB
LOG REF LEVEL ....................................................................................0 dBm
SCAN TIME
PER DIVISION ............................................................ 20 MILLISECONDS
VIDEO FILTER ..........................................................................................OFF
Tracking Generator/Counter Control Settings:
POWER ...................................................................................................... ON
RF OUTPUT LEVEL dBm ................................................... All controls set to 0
Note
In individual tests only those controls mentioned need to be changed. Other control settings are compatible with previous tests.
1 200 MHz IF Amplifier A10
The 200 MHz IF amplifier assembly contains a two-stage variable-gain amplifier and a bandpass filter. The gain of the amplifier is controlled by the
ALC signal from the Video Amplifier/ Automatic Level Control Assembly, A8.
L10/C17 is a 250 MHz trap. L2/C3 is a 150 MHz trap. L3/C5 is a 100 MHz trap. The gain of the 200 MHz amplifier is about 20 dB.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Section 8
The bandwidth of the 200 MHz IF Bandpass Filter is +2 MHz. Insertion loss is about 2 dB.
Test Procedure 1
Note
Before proceeding with tests disable the ALC signal by
lifting the A8 assembly out of its socket.
Test 1-a. Use the Digital Voltmeter to verify the presence of -12 volts at terminals shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 1-b. Connect the 200 MHz output from the A10 assembly to the RF
INPUT of the 0 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer and tune the CENTER
FREQUENCY MHz to 200 MHz. 0 1250 Spectrum Analyzer controls are set the same as the 8553/8552 except SCAN WIDTH is set to .5 MHz/Div. Center the signal on the analyzer CRT. The CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-1. If the correct display is present, the A10 assembly is functioning properly. If it is not, proceed to test 1-c.
Test 1-c. Connect the input of the bandpass filter (Test Point 2) to the RF
INPUT of the 0 1250 Spectrum Analyzer. The waveform should be similar to that shown in SS3-1. If the correct waveform is present, but was not present in test 1-b, trouble is probably in the bandpass filter. Repair as required and repeat test 1-b. If the correct display is not present, proceed to test 1-d.
Test 1-d. Connect Test Point 3 (junction of C8/C9) to the RF INPUT of the 0
1250 Spectrum Analyzer. The CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-2. If the correct display is present, but was not present in test
1-c, check Q2 and associated components. If the display is not present proceed to test 1-e.
Test 1-e. Connect Test Point 4 (Q1-b) to the RF INPUT of the 0 - 1250 MHz
Spectrum Analyzer. The CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-3. If the correct display is present, but was not in test l-d, check Q1 and associated components. If the display is not present, check the traps for a short and the cabling to the All assembly. Proceed to test 1-f.
Test 1-f. Connect the 200 MHz output from the A10 assembly to the RF
INPUT of the 0 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer and tune the CENTER
FREQUENCY MHz to 200 MHz. Center the signal on the CRT display.
Connect the variable voltage power supply to TP 1 and vary the voltage from
0 to +20 volts. Waveform SS3-4 shows the upper and lower levels of output.
The lower level is with +20 volts applied; the higher level is with 0 volts applied. If the signal level does not vary; or if the levels are not approximately as shown, check C1, R4, C8, C9, C10, L6 and adjustment of L6 as specified in
NOTE
After repairing the 200 MHz amplifier assembly' it should
be adjusted in accordance with paragraph 5-17 of this
manual to assure reliable operation of the instrument.
2 Third Converter Assembly A9
The third converter assembly consists of a three-stage, fixed-gain 200 to 310
MHz amplifier, a diode quad balanced mixer and a low pass filter.
The amplifier isolates the model 8443A/B from the first local oscillator in the analyzer and provides about 20 dB of gain. The bandwidth of the frequencies processed through the amplifier is determined by the position of the SCAN
WIDTH switch on the analyzer. When the analyzer is operated at narrow scan width (20 kHz per division or less) in the stabilized mode, the analyzer first local oscillator output is a fixed frequency. (The frequency is still swept, but now by the third local oscillator).
The diode quad balanced mixer accepts the outputs from the 200 to 310 MHz amplifier and from the 200 MHz amplifier (A10), and mixes them to provide a
0 to 110 MHz signal, or any portion of this range of frequencies. When the analyzer is operated in the ZERO scan mode the output from the mixer is a fixed frequency.
The 120 MHz low-pass filter provides about 75 dB rejection to frequencies above 200 MHz.
Test Procedure 2
Test 2-a. Use the Digital Voltmeter to verify the presence of -12 volts at terminals shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 2-b. Connect the output from the A9 assembly to the RF INPUT of the
8553 analyzer, and set the analyzer frequency to 80 MHz. The analyzer CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-5. If the display is as shown, the assembly is functioning properly. If not, proceed to test 2-c.
Test 2-c. Connect Test Point 3 (LO IN to the mixer) to the RF INPUT of the 0
- 1250 MHz Spectrum Analyzer and tune to 250 MHz. Controls of both analyzers
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
are set as they were initially except that the 8553/8552 SCAN TIME PER
DIVISION is set to .5 MILLISECOND per division and the 0 1250 MHz
Spectrum Analyzer INPUT ATTEN to -20 dB, LOG REF LEVEL set to 1 on linear scale. The 0 1250 MHz CRT should show a display similar to waveform
SS3-6. If the display is correct, proceed to test 2-d. If not, proceed to test 2-e.
Test 2-d. Remove the cover from the third mixer and connect the output to the low pass filter to the 8553 RF INPUT. (Be sure to ground the coax shield close to the pickup point.) Set the 8553/8552 SCAN TIME PER DIVISION to
20 MILLISECONDS. The CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-7. (It should be noted that with the mixer cover removed, the mixer circuit may be affected by radiation from nearby devices. This may cause the CRT display to differ considerably from that shown. If the CRT display shows that the output frequency goes from 0 to 100 MHz, the test is successfully completed.) If the CRT shows that the output is being swept from
0 to 100 MHz, the low pass filter is probably defective. If the mixer output is not present, repair or replace the mixer and repeat test 2-b.
Test 2-e. Connect Test Point 2 (Q2-c) to the RF INPUT of the 0 1250 MHz
Spectrum Analyzer, with all controls set as in test 2-c. The CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-8. If the display is correct, but was not in Lest 2-c, check Q1 and associated components. If The display is not present, proceed to test 2-f.
Test 2-f. Connect Test Point 1 (Q3-c) to the RF INPUT of the 0 1250 MHz
Spectrum Analyzer, with all controls set as in test 2-c. The CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-9. If the display is correct, but was not in Lest 2-e, check Q2 and associated components. If the display is not present, check Q3, associated components and cabling to the analyzer. After repairs repeat test 2-b.
NOTE
After repairing the third converter assembly it should be
adjusted in accordance with paragraph 5-18 of this
manual to assure reliable operation of the instrument.
3 Video Amplifier/ALC Assembly (A8) and Attenuators
The Video Amplifier/ALC (automatic level control) contains two amplifiers and a comparator. The input video amplifier provides 32 dB of gain and the second amplifier provides 20 dB of gain.
The comparator is referenced to a fixed level which is controlled by the 0 to
1.2 dB vernier to provide the automatic level control signal to the200 MHz amplifier.
When the 0 to 1.2 dB vernier is set to 0 the RF output to the 0 to 120 dB attenuator is a constant +10 dBm. The 0 to 1.2 dB vernier may be used to attenuate the RF output linearly from 0 to 1.2 dB.
There are two precision step attenuators connected in series with the RF output. The first is a 0 to 120 dB step attenuator. The second is a 0. to 12 dB, 1 dB per step, attenuator. These attenuators, in conjunction with the 0 to
1.2 dB vernier provide accurate control of the output signal at any level between +10 dBm and -123.6 dBm.
Test Procedure 3
Test 3-a. Use the Digital Voltmeter to check dc input voltages shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 3-b. Connect the Model 8443A/B RF OUTPUT to the analyzer RF
INPUT. A straight line should appear along the LOG REF (top graticule) line on the analyzer CRT. If the correct display is observed, the Tracking
Generator portion of the model 8443 is functioning properly. If the CRT display is not correct proceed to test 3-c.
Test 3-c. Connect the 0 110 MHz OUT from the A8 assembly to the analyzer
RF INPUT and increase the analyzer INPUT ATTENUATION to 20 dB. The analyzer CRT display should be as in test 3-b. If the CRT display is correct, but was not in test 3-b, check the attenuators.
SERVICE SHEET 3 (cont'd)
NOTE
Component selection and placement in the attenuators is extremely critical, factory service is recommended.
If the CRT display is incorrect proceed to test 3-d.
Test 3-d. Connect the A8 output to the HF Decade (A5W1) to the analyzer RF
INPUT and reset the analyzer INPUT ATTENUATION to 0 dB. The analyzer
CRT display should show a straight line across the CRT about -14 dB from the top graticule line. If the display is correct, but was not in test 3-c, U2 is probably defective. After repairs, repeat test 3-b. If the CRT display is not correct, proceed to test 3-e.
Test 3-e. Connect Test Point 1 (A8A1R6) to the analyzer RF INPUT. The analyzer CRT display should be similar to waveform SS3-10. If the correct display is observed, but was not in test 3-d, U2 is probably defective. If the display. is not correct, U1 is probably defective. Replace and repeat test 3-b.
If the assembly is still not functioning properly, proceed to test 3-f
Test 3-f. Connect the analyzer RF INPUT to Test Point 2 (Q1A-b). The analyzer CRT display should be similar to waveform SS3-11. If the waveform is not correct, U2 is probably defective. Repair as required and repeat test 3b. If the waveform is correct and the assembly still does not function properly, proceed to test 3-g.
Test 3-g. Connect the analyzer RF INPUT to TP 3. The analyzer CRT display should be similar to that shown in waveform SS3-12. If the display is incorrect, check Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and associated components. After repairs, repeat test 3-b.
NOTE
After repairs the Video Amplifier/ALC assembly should be
adjusted in accordance with paragraph 5-19 to assure
reliable operation of the instrument.
*These waveforms are typical and may vary greatly between instruments.
8-28
Section 8
Figure 8-24. A8, ALC Video Amplifier Figure 8-25. A9, Third Converter Assembly
Figure 8-26. A10, Bandpass Filter Assembly
8-29
Figure 8-27. 200 MHz IF Amplifier, Third Converter, ALC/Video Amplifier and Attenuator, Schematic Diagram
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SERVICE SHEET 4 TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Section 8
Normally, the cause of a malfunction in the model 8443A/B will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the
Troubleshooting Tree.
Equipment Required
Digital Voltmeter
Volt-ohm-ammeter
Service Kit
1 Rectifier Assembly A15
Spectrum Analyzer
AC Voltmeter
AC power for the four rectifier circuits in the model 8443A/B is supplied by a single transformer with four secondary windings.
When the model 8443A/B is in the standby mode all of the power supplies except the 24 volt (switched) are disabled. The +175 volt, +20 volt, +5.8 volt and -12 volt supplies are all referenced to the 24 volt supply. Placing the model 8443A/B in standby removes the +24 volt reference from the sense amplifiers and disables all of the series regulators except the +24 volt regulator. The +24 volts is used in standby to maintain temperature control in the crystal oscillator assembly A4 (8443A).
A full wave bridge type rectifier is used to provide the +175 volts required to drive the numerical readout devices in the counter section (8443A).
The +24 volt and +20 volt outputs are derived from a single full wave rectifier and two regulator circuits.
The +6 volt and -12 volt outputs are provided by separate full wave rectifiers and regulators (the +6 V regulator is used in the 8443A only).
Test Procedure 1
Test 1-a. Turn the model 8443A/B on and before removing the circuit board, check the voltage levels at the upper end of the fuses mounted on the rectifier board. Check fuse(s) where voltage is not present. If new fuses placed in the
+24 volt, +20 volt, +5.8 volt or -12 volt supplies burn out, trouble is probably not in the power supply circuit; proceed to test procedure 2 . If correct voltages are not present at the +24 volt, +20 volt, +5.8 volt or -12 volt fuses and the fuses are good, proceed to test 1-b. If the +175 volts is not present at
Test Point 6 on the mother board proceed to test 1-d.
Test 1-b. Remove the rectifier board and reconnect it using an extender board.
WARNING
Remove the power cord from the model 8443A/B before removing the board. Voltages are still present when the instrument is placed in standby.
Use the AC voltmeter to measure the ac voltages across the primary and secondary windings of the transformer. If any of the secondary windings do not have voltage present and the primary voltage is present, the transformer is defective. If the transformer primary voltage is not present check the line fuse, the line switch, the line filter and the line cord. If ac voltage is present at all windings proceed to test 1-c.
Test 1-c. If the ac voltages are present, use the digital voltmeter to check for dc voltages shown on the schematic. Check components associated with the power supply that is not functioning and repair as required. (Do not overlook
C1, C2 and C3 on the mother board). After making repairs if the model
8443A/B is still not functioning properly, proceed to Test Procedure 2.
Test 1-d. If the +175 volt supply is not working in the 8443A, remove the rectifier board and reinstall it using the extender board. If the 1/4 amp fuse,
F1, is not burned out check CR1 through CR4 and associated components. If the fuse is burned out check Q1, Q2, Q3 and associated components. If the cause of the trouble is not found, or if trouble is found and the instrument still does not function properly, proceed to test Procedure 2 .
2 Series Regulators
The series regulators are all located on a flange mounted on the inside of the rear panel adjacent to a heat sink located on the outer side of the rear panel.
Series regulators function as a variable resistance in series with the power supply and the load. If the regulated output rises, the series regulators conduct less and cause the output to be lowered. If the regulated output drops, the series regulators conduct more and cause the output voltage to rise.
The control circuits for these regulators are discussed in 3 Sense Amplifiers.
SERVICE SHEET 4 (cont'd)
Test Procedure 2
Since the series regulator connections are difficult to reach when installed, it is recommended that when one is suspected of being defective, it be removed and checked with an ohmmeter. An alternate method is to remove both the rectifier and sense amplifier circuit boards and make measurements from the connectors.
3 Sense Amplifiers A15
The sense amplifier assembly contains circuits to control the operation of the
+24 volt, +20 volt, +5.8 volt and -12 volt series regulators. The +175 volt, +20 volt, +5.8 volt and -12 volt sense amplifiers are all referenced to the +24 volt power supply. Only one adjustable component, R50, is required to set the level of all power supplies.
Each of the sense amplifiers contains a comparator circuit. In the comparator the voltage to be controlled is compared to a fixed reference level derived from the +24 volt supply, The output from the comparator controls the conduction of the series regulators. Two crowbar circuits protect the power' supplies from damage in the event of an overvoltage. Current limiting provides additional protection.
Test Procedure 3.
When a malfunction has been traced to the sense amplifier circuit board, the board should be removed from the frame and reinstalled using an extender board. Checking for the voltages shown on the schematic diagram should enable the technician to quickly isolate the defective component or components.
NOTE
The +175 volt supply and the +5.8 volt supply are used in the 8443A only.
Section 8
Figure 8-28. A14, Sense amplifier Assembly,
Components
2
Figure 8-29. A15, Rectifier Assembly, Components
8-31
Figure 8-30. Power Supplies and Regulators, Schematic Diagram
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SERVICE SHEET 5
The counter section of the HP Model 8443A consists of five major assemblies. These are the Marker Control assembly A7, the Time Base assembly A5, the High
Frequency Decade assembly A6, the Low Frequency
Counter assembly A1 and the Reference Oscillator assembly A4.
General
The marker control circuit stops the scan ramp in the model 8552 IF section when the model 8443A is operated in the MARKER and SCAN HOLD modes. The marker control circuit also provides blanking to the analyzer and, when operated in the MARKER or SCAN HOLD modes, a signal to the time base circuit which is used to initiate the count cycle.
When the model 8443A is operated in the MARKER mode the active clamp in the marker control assembly causes the scan ramp of the analyzer to stop at a point determined by the MARKER POSITION control. Usually, the scan is stopped for a period of time determined by the position of the RESOLUTION control. The scan stop period may be extended, for short count periods, by the
MARKER INTENSITY control.
When the model 8443A is operated in the SCAN HOLD mode the active clamp in the marker control assembly again causes the scan ramp of the analyzer to stop at a point determined by the MARKER POSITION control. In this mode the scan remains stopped until the mode of operation is changed. The operator can manually position the marker to any point on the scan with the
MARKER POSITION control. In the SCAN HOLD mode the counter counts continually.
When the model 8443A is operated in the EXTERNAL mode, the counter section is used to count signals applied to the COUNTER INPUT, J1. The marker control function is not used and the counter counts continually.
When the analyzer is operated in ZERO scan the marker is not used; the counter counts continually.
The time base may be referenced to an internal crystalcontrolled oscillator or to an external 1 MHz source. The time base controls the main gate flip-flop, in the high frequency decade, which enables the counter. The time base also generates the transfer and reset pulses. These pulses transfer the information from the decade counters to the numerical readout device drivers and reset the decade counters in both the high frequency decade and the low frequency counter.
The signal is gated to the high frequency decade by the main gate flip-flop which is toggled by the decade divider circuits in the time base assembly. In addition to dividing the input frequency by ten, the high frequency decade provides BCD information to the buffer store in the low frequency counter for the least significant digit and provides the drive for following decade counter stages.
The low frequency counter receives the A, B, C and D outputs from the high frequency decade. The A, B, C and
D outputs are all used to drive the buffer store for the least significant digit. The D signal (0 to 11 MHz) also drives the blanking decade counter for the 10' readout.
The following decade counters are all triggered by the divide-by-ten output of the preceding decade counter.
The blanking decade counters drive the numerical readout devices (through buffer store and decoder stages) to provide a visual readout of the input frequency.
The buffer store stages also provide BCD information to
'a rear panel connector for use in equipment external to the model 8443A.
Marker Control Assembly A7 (Service Sheet 6)
The marker control circuit has three inputs from the analyzer IF section. These are the scan ramp input, the blanking input and the ZERO scan input. The analyzer provides a ground reference.
The following paragraphs describe the marker control circuit operation when the model 8443A is operated in the
MARKER mode. Differences in circuit operation for other modes of operation are described later in this marker control text.
The scan ramp (a 0 to approximately 8 volt signal) is developed across a capacitor in the spectrum analyzer by current from a constant current source. A comparator in the marker control circuit compares the voltage of the scan ramp to a dc level determined by the position of the
MARKER POSITION control. When the charge on the scan ramp capacitor reaches the predetermined level, the comparator acts as an active clamp to sink the current from the analyzer constant current source at a rate that effectively clamps the scan ramp voltage. The analyzer scan is stopped and the output frequency of the model
8443A RF section is counted once.
In addition to the scan ramp and the dc level from the
MARKER POSITION control, the active clamp has a control input and a control output. The input is from the
Q output (TP 4) of the stop-enable flip-flop which allows the active clamp to operate when the Q output is low. The output provides signal information to other circuits that the scan ramp has been stopped.
The stop-enable flip-flop is reset at the beginning of each scan by the end of the blanking pulse (TP 1) from the analyzer. When the analyzer scan ramp ends, TP 1 goes positive until the next scan ramp begins. At the end of the blanking pulse (1), TP6 is low (more about TP 6 later), AND gate (U1A/B/D) output TP 7 goes low and clocks the stop-enable flip-flop. This makes the stopenable Q (TP 4) low and enables the active clamp.
However, the active clamp will have no effect on the scan ramp voltage until it reaches the level set by the MARKER
POSITION control. When this occurs the spectrum analyzer scan is stopped for a period of time determined by the RESOLUTION control and, in some instances, by the MARKER INTENSITY control.
When the scan ramp is stopped the active clamp stop signal TP8 goes low and causes the output of one-shot
C16/R21, TP 10, the count trigger signal, to go low. It also closes a switch on a current sink which is part of the marker intensity circuit.
The marker intensity control circuit controls the intensity of the marker on the analyzer CRT. This is accomplished by providing blanking for long count periods or by extending the scan stop time for short count periods.
The output from Q18 is applied to NAND gate U1C which provides the CLEAR input to the stop-enable flip-flop and to AND gate U1A/B/D which controls the CLOCK input to the stop-enable flip-flop. The signal at TP6 also causes the analyzer CRT to be blanked as determined by the marker intensity circuit. Blanking is required to protect the analyzer CRT from excessive intensity (blooming) during long count periods. During short count periods, when it is desired to keep the marker on the analyzer
CRT longer than the count period, TP 6 is held low for a period of time determined by the MARKER INTENSITY control and NAND gate U1C is held high. This prevents the stop-enable flip-flop from being cleared.
The period of time the scan is stopped ends when the
CLEAR input to the stop-enable flip-flop goes low, the Q output goes high and the active clamp is disabled. This occurs only when signals at TP 6 and TP 10 are both high. The signal at TP 6 is high only when the model
8443A is causing the analyzer CRT to be blanked. The signal at
TP 10 is the count acknowledge signal from the time base circuit signaling that the frequency count has been completed.
In the EXTERNAL mode the CLEAR input to the stopenable flip-flop is held low. This causes the Q output (TP
4) to remain high and disable the active clamp. The inverted input to NAND gate Q16/Q17 is also held low and since the input to NAND gate Q16/Q17 is normally high the count trigger, TP 9 is held low. When the count acknowledge, TP 10, is received, one-shot C18/R40 provides a 200 millisecond low to disable NAND gate
Q16/17 and inhibit the count trigger (TP 9) for 200 milliseconds.
In the SCAN HOLD mode signals TP 5 and TP 6 will be held low; CLEAR gate U1C cannot reset the stop-enable flip-flop, the active clamp remains active and the counter counts continually. The major difference between the
SCAN HOLD mode and the MARKER mode is that in the
SCAN HOLD mode the scan remains stopped until the operator changes the mode of operation.
In the ZERO scan mode (initiated when the analyzer is placed in ZERO scan), operation is the same as in the external mode, except that the counter counts the output of the model 8443A instead of an external frequency source. Time Base Assembly A5 (Service Sheet 7) The time base circuit controls all timing and control functions of the counter section. The internal reference generator for the timing function is a stable 1 MHz crystal oscillator.
The oscillator is enclosed in a temperature controlled assembly to improve stability. The internal reference signal may be used as a reference for other equipment.
An external reference signal may be used in lieu of the internal reference if desired.
Operation of the time base circuit with the model 8443A operating in the MARKER mode is described in the following paragraphs. During the first 200 microseconds after the marker control circuits stop the analyzer scan, the count trigger signal (TP 2) goes low. When the count trigger goes low the signal at TP 7 will go high provided that the input to the inhibit inverter Q4 is low. This initiates the count cycle.
At the beginning of the timing sequence the time base flip-flop Q output (TP 4) is high and the Q output is low.
The signal at TP 8 will also be high and when the signal at TP 7 goes high, the signal at TP 9 will go low. The signal at TP 5 will go high and all decades will be reset.
The signal at TP 5 will remain high about 50 microseconds.
The time base flip-flop is cleared about 50 microseconds after TP 9 goes low. This causes the time base flip-flop
Q output to go high and the Q output (TP 4) to go low. About 1 microsecond after TP 4 goes low TP 8 goes low, TP 9 goes high and TP 5 goes low to end the reset pulse. The first decade divider in the time base circuit was set to 0 by the reset pulse and the rest of the decade dividers were set to 9. When the time base flip-flop Q output goes high NAND gate U1D couples the 1 MHz reference signal to the first of the five decade dividers. After ten cycles the second decade divider will receive an input. Since the last four decade dividers were set to 9, each will reset to 0 with the first input they receive. The reset output of each divider will reset the following decade divider.
Resolution, which in this case is a function of the time the input signal is counted, is controlled by the three-position
RESOLUTION switch.
When the RESOLUTION switch is set to 1 kHz, a ground is provided to a control gate in the third decade divider which provides an output to toggle the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade. The output signal (TP 6) is, in this case, a square wave with a 1 millisecond period.
When the RESOLUTION switch is set to 100 Hz, a ground is provided to a control gate in the fourth decade divider which provides an output to toggle the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade. The output signal
TP 6 is, in this case, a square wave with a 10 millisecond period.
When the RESOLUTION switch is set to 10 Hz, a ground is provided to a control gate in the fifth decade divider which provides an output to toggle the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade. The output signal TP 6 is, in this case, a square wave with a 100 millisecond period.
The third, fourth and fifth decade divider outputs are wired to perform an OR function. Only one output will be present at any given time; only one control gate is grounded at any given time.
At the end of the count period the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade changes state and provides a low to clock the time base flip-flop. When clocked, the time base flip-flop Q output goes low and the Q output (TP 4) goes high. NAND gate U1D is inhibited and the reference signal can no longer reach the decade dividers. In addition, the signal at TP 4 triggers a 150 microsecond one-shot which drives TP 10 high and TP 3 low to transfer information stored in the decade counters in the low frequency counter to buffer store stages and then to the decoders which drive the numerical readout devices.
The 1 microsecond delay between the time TP 4 goes high and TP 8 goes high prevents generation of a reset before the transfer (TP 3) begins, in the case where TP 7 is still high. Once initiated, the transfer signal at TP 3 prevents generation of a reset signal by forward biasing a diode to keep TP 7 low for the duration of the transfer pulse.
When the Q output (TP 4) of the time base flip-flop goes high it is also used as a signal to the marker control circuit to permit the spectrum analyzer scan to continue.
The time base circuit then becomes dormant until the next count trigger (TP 2) arrives from the marker control circuit.
When the model 8443A is operated in the SCAN HOLD mode the count trigger (TP 2) is held low. Counting periods are separated by the time required for transfer and reset functions.
In the EXTERNAL mode the count trigger (TP 2) is inhibited by a 200 millisecond one-shot in the marker control circuit, which is triggered by the count acknowledge signal at TP 4.
High Frequency Decade A6 (Service Sheet 8) The main gate flip-flop, which is controlled by the gate toggle from the time base, controls the start and stop of the count period. The count duration is controlled by the
RESOLUTION switch.
The input to the high frequency decade may be either the model 8443A Tracking Generator output or any signal within the counter frequency and amplitude range from an external source.
The high frequency decade is a divide-by-ten decade.
The input frequency of 100 kHz to 110 MHz is converted to a 0 to 11 MHz signal and applied to the low frequency counter.
The A, B, C and D outputs of the high frequency decade directly drive the buffer store in the least significant digit circuit. In addition, the D output drives the following blanking decade counter.
Low Frequency Counter A1 (Service Sheet 9)
The least significant digit (100) circuit consists of a buffer store, a decoder driver and a numerical readout device.
When the transfer pulse occurs the numerical readout device displays the count that remained in the high frequency decade when the count period ended.
The circuits for the next six digits are identical in function and configuration. Each circuit has a blanking decade counter which provides a BCD output to the buffer store and a divide-by-ten output to drive the next blanking decade counter. The buffer store circuits store the count remaining in the decade counters when the count period ended until the next transfer pulse appears. When the transfer pulse appears the buffer stores provide BCD information to the decoder drivers (A, B, C and D) and to a rear panel connector (A, B, C and D) for use in external equipment. The decoder driver stages convert the BCD information to an output which drives one of the ten elements in the numerical readout devices. The third, fourth and fifth numerical readout devices (from the right side) have decimal point inputs. The decimal point to be displayed is selected by the RESOLUTION switch.
All leading zeros to the left of the decimal point, which are also to the left of the first significant digit, are blanked.
The eighth display circuit consists of two flip-flops and two amplifiers. It detects and displays an overflow from the previous decades. One of the amplifiers drives the 1 element in the numerical readout device when an overflow is present. The other amplifier provides an overflow BCD output for external use.
8-32
Section 8
8-33
Figure 8-31. Counter Section Logic Diagram.
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SERVICE SHEET 6
Normally, causes of malfunction in the model 8443A circuits will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the Troubleshooting Tree.
When trouble has been isolated to the marker control assembly
(A7), it should be removed from the chassis and reinstalled using an extender board. This will provide easy access to test points and components.
Equipment Required
4 Channel Oscilloscope
10:1 Oscilloscope Probes (4)
General
Digital Voltmeter
Service Kit
The marker control assembly contains circuits which will stop the analyzer scan ramp temporarily, stop the scan ramp for an indefinite period, or enable the counter section to count a signal identical to a signal applied to the analyzer RF INPUT, from an external source. It also contains a circuit which controls the intensity of the marker on the analyzer CRT and a circuit which provides a trigger to start the cycle of the time base circuit.
When the marker control assembly is functioning properly, the waveforms shown in composite waveform SS6-1 will appear at the five test points which are available at the top cover of the assembly.
The timing functions of the waveforms shown are identified in the table below the composite waveform.
Time 1.
Analyzer CRT is being blanked by the analyzer scan generator.
Time 2.
Analyzer blanking ends TP 1; Scan ramp starts TP 2; Active clamp is enabled TP 4.
Time 3.
Analyzer scan ramp is stopped TP 2.
Time 4.
Analyzer CRT is blanked by model
8443A TP 1.
Time 5.
Analyzer scan ramp is released TP 2.
Time 6.
Analyzer scan ramp ends TP 2; Analyzer blanking begins TP 1.
Initial Control Settings (for above timing waveforms)
Spectrum Analyzer: (control settings not listed are not important)
SCAN TIME
PER DIVISION................................ ................. 1 MILLISECOND
SCAN MODE................................ ................................ ........... INT
SCAN TRIGGER ................................ ................................ . AUTO
Tracking Generator/Counter
MODE ................................ ................................ ............ MARKER
RESOLUTION ................................ ................................ .... 100 Hz
MARKER INTENSITY................................ ....................... Full CW
MARKER POSITION KNOB................................ ............Pulled out
Oscilloscope
Triggered by Analyzer Scan IN/OUT
TIME/DIV................................ ................................ . 2 Milliseconds
VOLTS/DIV ................................ ................................ ................. 1
10:1 probes
TIME/DIV
DC input
VERNIER set to show one analyzer scan
1 Active Clamp (Instrument in MARKER mode)
The active clamp consists of a comparator (Q5/Q6/Q7) and a current source (Q4/Q8/Q9). The purpose of the active clamp is to stop the analyzer scan ramp at a predetermined voltage level. The reference level for the comparator portion of the active clamp is established by a MARKER POSITION dual potentiometer (R13), a
CTR ADJ (center adjust) potentiometer (R11) and a MARKER ADJ potentiometer (A7Rll) on the cover of the A7 assembly.
The active clamp is enabled when U2, the stop-enable flip-flop, is clocked by the negative going trailing edge of the analyzer blanking pulse; Q goes low and causes Q20 to conduct, when Q20 conducts, it enables Q9 to provide a path for the current sink and enable the active clamp. Note that Q9 does not actually conduct at this time, it will conduct only when the scan ramp reaches the voltage level predetermined by the MARKER POSITION control.
Enabling the active clamp has no immediate effect on the analyzer scan ramp.
The signal input to the comparator is the scan ramp from the analyzer. When the analyzer scan ramp voltage reaches the reference level established by the MARKER POSITION control it is clamped at that level. When the base of Q5A reaches the reference level, Q5B is turned off, Q5B collector goes high and CR2 biases Q4 on to complete the current sink path. The current from the constant current source in the analyzer scan generator circuit is then sunk to the model 8443A -12 volt supply.
Q8, in addition to being in the current sink path, acts as a detector.
Since the current from the analyzer scan generator must pass through the emitter-base junction of Q8, Q8 conducts while the scan ramp is stopped and turns on Q1. Q1 will be discussed later in this text.
The analyzer scan ramp is stopped until NAND gate U1C, pins 9 and 10, are high. The input to U1C pin 10 is the count acknowledge signal from the time base circuit which signifies that the count has been completed. The input to U1C pin 9 is generated in the marker intensity circuit. Generation of the signal applied to
U1C pin 9 is discussed later in this text.
When both inputs to NAND gate U1C are high the output (pin 8) will go low and clear the stop-enable flip-flop. The Q output of U2 then goes high and turns off Q20; Q9 turns off to open the current sink path and the analyzer scan ramp is permitted to continue.
The shield of the scan ramp coax from the analyzer is not grounded in the model 8443A. The shield is used as a ground reference to ensure a common ground between the analyzer scan generator and the active clamp and to prevent ground loops. CR1 provides protection to Q5 when the connecting cable between the analyzer and the model 8443A is not connected.
Test Procedure 1
Test 1-a. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the presence of dc voltages at terminals 3/C, 4/D and 5/E as shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 1-b. Connect the digital voltmeter between Q5B-b and ground; rotate the MARKER POSITION control through its range.
The dc level at Q5B-b should vary from about ground level (control full ccw) to about +8 volts (control full cw). If observed levels are correct, proceed to test 1-c. If correct levels are not present check
Q5B, Q6B, Q7, the MARKER POSITION control and associated components.
Test 1-c. Connect the oscilloscope as follows: Channel A - TP 2,
Channel B - Q8-b, Channel C - Q7-c and Channel D - Q9-b. Set all controls as shown for waveform SS6-1 except that the oscilloscope
TIME/DIV is 5 Milliseconds and the TIME/DIV VERNIER is in the
CAL position (off). The oscilloscope CRT display should be as shown in waveform SS6-2. If the display is as shown, the marker control circuit is functioning properly. If the display is not as shown, proceed to test 1-d.
Test 1-d. With the equipment connected as in test 1-c, ground TP
4. The analyzer scan should stop and the oscilloscope CRT display should consists of four straight horizontal lines. If the scan does not stop when TP 4 is grounded, place the model 8443A MODE switch in the EXTERNAL position
(remove ground from TP4). The oscilloscope CRT display should be as shown in waveform SS6-3. If the correct waveform is now present, check Q8, Q9, Q20 and U2. If the channel A and channel
C displays are correct, but channel B is not, check CR2, CR3 and
Q4. If the channel A display is as shown, but B and C are not, check Q5, Q6, Q7 and associated components.
Test 1-e. With the equipment connected as in test 1-c, return the model 8443A MODE switch to MARKER. Place the REF switch on the A5 assembly in the EXT position. The oscilloscope CRT display should appear as four horizontal lines and the analyzer
CRT should be blanked. If these conditions exist, proceed to test 1f. If not, check U1A, U1D, U2, Q3 and associated components.
Test 1-f. With test conditions as described in test
1-e, short pin 2 of U2 to ground. The oscilloscope
CRT display should be as shown in waveform SS6-3, and the analyzer CRT baseline should reappear (no marker). If these conditions are met, check U1B, U1C, Q18 and associated components. If trouble persists, the intensity circuit should be checked next. If above conditions are not met, U2 is probably defective.
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
2 Trigger and Marker Intensity.
The following discussion assumes that the model 8443A is operating in the MARKER mode.
When Q1 is turned on as the scan stops, the positive-going signal at Q1-c is coupled through C16 to the base of Q15. Q15 is normally off and the collector is at +5 volts (the +5 volts is provided by the time base circuit). Due to the time constant of C16 and R21, the signal from Q1-c causes Q15 to conduct for about 200 microseconds; this provides a negative-going pulse at Q15-c to trigger the time base flip-flop in the time base circuit.
During the period of time that the analyzer scan ramp is stopped the positive dc level at the collector of Q1 turns on Q12 through the
MARKER INTENSITY control. The junction of Q12-c, Q11-c, Q13b, R29 and C17 will be designated as a "current node" for purposes of discussion in the rest of this text. Q12 acts as a current sink for the current node. The rate at which C17 is discharged is determined by the setting of the MARKER INTENSITY control; the more heavily Q12 conducts, the shorter the discharge time of C17.
When the MARKER INTENSITY control is turned cw, conduction of
Q12 decreases, and more time is required to discharge C17 to the ground reference level; this results in extending the period of time that the scan is stopped to provide a brighter marker. Q13 and
Q14 act as a differential amplifier to sense when C17 has been discharged to ground reference.
Initially (before Q12 is turned on), C17 is charged, Q13 is conducting and Q14 is turned off. Since Q14 is off, so are Q11 and
Q10. When Q12 is turned on C17 begins to discharge. When the current node reaches the ground reference established by Q14, both Q13 and Q14 are conducting. When Q14 conducts, the voltage at the base of Q11 is reduced and Q11 conducts; current is now being sourced to the current node by Q11 and R29 at the same rate that current is being sunk from the current node by Q12.
When Q11 conducts the voltage on the base of Q10 decreases,
Q10 conducts and Q18 is turned on.
When Q18 conducts U1C pin 9 goes high (about +4 volts). If the count acknowledge signal is a high at U1C pin 10, U1C pin 8 goes low and the stop-enable flip-flop, U2, is cleared. This disables the active clamp current sink and permits the analyzer scan to continue. If Q18 conducts before the count acknowledge signal at
U1C pin 10 goes high, the high dc level at Q18-e blanks the analyzer CRT through R33 and CR16 until the count acknowledge signal goes positive. The count acknowledge signal also turns on
Q19 which for all practical purposes provides a ground at the junction of R33
and CR16, this prevents the CRT display in the spectrum analyzer from being blanked when the scan ramp is released and the scan ramp continues to the limits set by the analyzer.
Test Procedure 2
General
When the instrument is functioning properly, the waveforms shown in SS6-4 will appear at the following points: A - Q1-b, B - A5TP2, C - junction of Q11c/Q12-c/Q13-b and D - Q18-b.
Initial Control Settings (for waveform SS6-4)
Spectrum Analyzer: (control settings not listed are
not important)
SCAN TIME
PER DIVISION........................................ 1 MILLISECOND
SCAN MODE . ............................................................ . INT
SCAN TRIGGER .......................................................AUTO
Tracking Generator/Counter
Mode......................................................................MARKER
RESOLUTION ..........................................................100 Hz
MARKER INTENSITY ..............................................Full CW
MARKER POSITION KNOB.................................. Pulled out
Oscilloscope
Triggered by Analyzer SCAN IN/OUT
Time/DIV.........................................................5 Milliseconds
VOLTS/DIV ................................................................... A--.2
B-.5
C- .05
D-5
DC inputs 10:1 probes
Test 2-a. Connect the digital voltmeter form Q13-b to ground. The average dc level measured should vary considerably with rotation of the MARKER
INTENSITY control (the level should be higher when the control is full cw). In the SCAN HOLD and MARKER modes the average voltage read should be below 1 volt. In the EXTERNAL mode the dc level should rise to approximately 18.5 volts. Proceed to test 2-b.
Test 2-b. If the dc level remains at about +18.5 volts in test 2-a in all positions of the MODE control switch, connect a 10K ohm resistor between Q1-b and the -12 volt supply (XA7-5) with the MODE switch in the EXTERNAL position.
The digital voltmeter should indicate the same dc levels specified for the
SCAN HOLD mode shown above. If the voltage level still remains at about
+18.5 volts, check Q1, Q12, the MARKER INTENSITY control and associated components. If the voltage drops to the level specified for the SCAN HOLD mode in test 2-a, and the scan can be stopped in the SCAN HOLD mode, Q8 may be defective. If the dc levels differ greatly from those listed in tests 2-a and 2-b, check Q13, Q14 and associated components.
Test 2-c. If the dc levels for the SCAN HOLD and EXTERNAL modes were as specified in test 3-a and the instrument functions properly in these modes, but will not function in the MARKER mode, check Q10 and Q18. (Q18 may have been checked in test procedure -f.)
3 Blanking, Scan Hold, External and Zero Scan
Whenever the blanking signal is high (from the analyzer or originating in the model 8443A), Q3 conducts. When the blanking is originating in the model
8443A the high input at pin 2 of U1A has no effect because U1B is holding pin
1 of U1A low. When the model 8443A blanking pulse ends, pin 9 of U1C and pin 5 of U1B go low and pin 6 of U1B and pin 1 of U1A go high. However, Q3 has stopped conducting and the output of U1A at pin 3 remains unchanged.
When the analyzer scan ramp ends and the analyzer blanking begins, Q3 again conducts. Now both inputs to U1A are high and the output, pin 3, goes low. The output of U1D pin 11 goes high, but this has no effect on U2 since
U2 is clocked only on negative-going signals. When the analyzer blanking pulse ends, Q3 is turned off, U1A output (pin 3) goes high and pin 11 of U1D goes low. This clocks the stop-enable flip-flop (U2) and enables the active clamp.
In the SCAN HOLD mode CR11 and CR22 cathodes are grounded. CR22 provides a continuous ground (enable) to the count trigger output. CR11 prevents Q18 from conducting. This disables the model 8443A. blanking to the analyzer and also holds pin 9 of U1C low to prevent U2 from being cleared. The count periods are separated only by the time it takes the time base circuit to provide transfer and reset pulses and provide a toggle to the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade. The count acknowledge has no effect on the counter in the scan hold mode.
In the EXTERNAL mode the cathode of CR10 is grounded and U2 cannot be clocked. The counter trigger is held low by Q17, which is initially conducting.
When the count acknowledge signal is received Q16 is turned on. C18 couples the signal to the base of Q17 through CR17 to turn off Q17. This causes the count trigger signal to go high. Q17 stays off for a period of time determined by C18 and R40. When C18 has charged up to approximately 1.4
volts as determined by CR17 and the emitter-base junction of Q17, Q17 again conducts and causes the count trigger to go low. The count periods are separated by the time Q17 is off, the transfer and reset pulse periods and the time required for the time base circuit to toggle the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade.
8-34
SERVICE SHEET 6 (cont'd)
When the analyzer is operated in the ZERO scan mode, and the model 8443A is in the MARKER mode, the marker control circuit works as it did in the
EXTERNAL mode except that the low at test point 3 is provided by CR21 instead of a ground being provided by the MODE switch. When the analyzer is not in the ZERO scan mode, there is about -10 volts on the blanking coax shield. This causes Q2 to conduct and reverse bias CR21. When the analyzer is operating in the ZERO scan mode the -10 volts is no longer on the blanking coax shield, and Q2 is turned off. Q2-c is held slightly below ground by CR20, CR21 is forward biased and test point 3 is essentially at ground potential. Q16 and Q17 operate as they did in the EXTERNAL mode.
Test Procedure 3
General
When this portion of the marker control assembly is functioning properly in the
MARKER mode, the critical points in the circuit will be working as indicated in waveform SS6-5. These waveforms represent the following: A - Q3-e blanking, B - U1C pin 9 internal blanking, C - the count acknowledge signal and D - U1C pin 8.
Initial Control Settings (for waveform SS6-5) Control settings are the same
as those specified for waveform SS6-4 except for oscilloscope VOLTS/ DIV.
A - 1, B - 5, C - .5 and D - 1.
Test 3-a. Connect the oscilloscope as follows: Channel A - U1 pin 9, Channel
B - U1 pin 10, Channel C - U1 pin 8 and Channel D - Q3-e. Set oscilloscope
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
VOLTS/DIV to .5 for all channels. The oscilloscope CRT display should be as shown in waveform SS6-6. (Model 8443A in MARKER mode.) Note that the
Channel C waveform goes negative only during the short period of time that the Channels A and B waveform are both high. If the waveforms are not correct, proceed to test 3-b.
Test 3-b. Connect the digital voltmeter between pin 9 of U1 and ground, and set the RESOLUTION control to 10 Hz. In the EXTERNAL mode the digital voltmeter should indicate about -590 mVolts. In the MARKER mode the digital voltmeter should indicate about +3 volts. In the SCAN HOLD mode the digital voltmeter should indicate about -580 mVolts. If the dc level is high (+4 volts or more) the model 8443A is in the MARKER mode and the scan remains stopped, apply a ground to U1 pin 8; the scan should continue. If the scan does not continue, check U2. If it does, check U1.
Test 3-c. If waveform D is SS6-6 is incorrect, check for the same waveform
(slightly higher in amplitude) at Test Point 1. If the waveform is present at TP
1, but not at Q3-e, Q3 is probably defective. If the waveform is not present at either point, check the cabling to the analyzer.
Test 3-d. If the model 8443A functions properly in the MARKER mode but does not function in the EXTERNAL mode, check Q16, Q17, the MODE switch and associated components.
Test 3-e. If the model 8443A will not function properly in the SCAN HOLD mode, but does in other modes, check CR11, CR22 and the MODE switch.
Test 3-f. If the counter will not work when the analyzer is placed in the ZERO scan mode, check Q2 and associated components.
Section 8
Figure 8-32. A7, Marker Control Assembly, Cover and Components
8-35
Figure 8-33. Marker Counter Circuit, Schematic Diagram
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Section 8
SERVICE SHEET 7
Normally causes of malfunction in the model 8443A circuits will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the Troubleshooting Tree.
When trouble has been isolated to the time base assembly (A5), it should be removed from the chassis and reinstalled using an extender board. This will provide easy access to test points and components.
Equipment Required
4 Channel Oscilloscope
10:1 Oscilloscope
Probes (4)
General
Service Kit
Digital Voltmeter
The time base assembly contains circuits which provide transfer and reset pulses for all decade counters, a count acknowledge signal to the marker control circuit, a gate toggle signal for the high frequency decade, a print command for use in external equipment and a buffer amplifier to provide a 1 MHz output for use in external equipment.
When the time base assembly is functioning properly, the waveforms shown on composite waveform SS7-1 will appear at the six test points which are available at the top cover of the assembly. The functions of the waveforms are listed directly below the composite waveform.
Trace 1.
1 MHz Reference Signal.
Trace 2.
Input Trigger Signal.
Trace 3.
Transfer Pulse.
Trace 4.
Count Acknowledge Signal.
Trace 5.
Reset Pulse.
Trace 6.
Gate Toggle.
Initial Control Settings (for above waveforms)
Spectrum Analyzer (controls not listed may be set anywhere)
SCAN TIME
PER DIVISION................................ ................................ ................................ ............................ 1 MILLISECOND
SCAN MODE................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ....................... INT
SCAN TRIGGER ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ .............AUTO
Tracking Generator/Counter
MODE ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ MARKER
RESOLUTION................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 1 kHz
MARKER INTENSITY................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ...Full CW
MARKER POSITION knob................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ Pulled Out
Note
For all tests using the oscilloscope synchronize the oscilloscope to the analyzer SCAN
IN/OUT unless otherwise noted.
1 Trigger, Transfer and Reset
Q5 is normally conducting; pin A of XA5 is connected to the open collector of a transistor, Q15, in the marker control circuit. When the trigger goes low, Q5 is turned off. Q4 is normally off; it conducts only when the inhibit signal is high.
(The inhibit signal is provided by external equipment connected to the rear panel BCD output connector when such equipment needs more time to process the previous count.)
When Q5-c and NAND gate pin 1 U1A go high, U1A pin 3 goes low because U1A pin 2 is high when the count trigger is received. C10, between pins 1 and 3 of U1A, prevents loop oscillations from occurring. When pin 3 of U1A goes low, pin 6 of NAND gate U1B goes high and turns on Q7 to begin the reset pulse. The reset pulse for U4, U3A, U3B,
U5A and U5B is provided directly from the output of NAND gate U1B because these dividers require that current be sunk from them. Because the decade dividers in the high frequency decade require current to be sourced to their reset inputs, Q7 is required. NAND gate U1B cannot provide enough current for these decades.
The reset signal is a pulse of about 50 microseconds duration, as determined by the time constant of R16 and C12.
R16 and C12 delay the application of the trigger pulse to the clear input of the time base flip-flop, U2, for 50 microseconds. When U2 is cleared the Q output goes low, U1A pin 2 goes low, U1A pin 3 goes high and pin 6 of U1B goes high to end the reset pulse.
When the count has been completed the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade provides a signal to clock the time base flip-flop, U2. C14 delays application of the end-of-count signal to the U2 clock input to assure that the transfer pulse will be applied to U15B in the low frequency counter after the overflow information has been stored. The delay is required because the D input of a type D flip-flop should not be changed while the clock input is low. When U2 is clocked, the Q output goes low and the Q output goes high. NAND gate U1C pin 10 goes high and pin 8 goes low for about 150 microseconds due to the time constant of R10 and C9. This 150 microsecond pulse from U1C transfers the information in the low frequency counter blanking decade counters to the buffer stores. The high Q output of U2 also provides the count acknowledge signal to the marker control circuit.
CR2, CR3 and CR4 prevent the start of the reset pulse while the transfer pulse is present. When the transfer pulse is present, CR3 and CR4 are reverse biased and the -12 volt source forward biases CR2 to prevent a high from appearing on U1A pin 1. When the transfer pulse is not present, CR3 and CR4 are forward biased and CR2 is reverse biased.
Test Procedure 1
Note
These tests assume that trouble has been isolated to the time base assembly as a result of performing the troubleshooting procedures.
Test 1-a. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the presence of dc voltages at terminals 4/D and 5/C as shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 1-b. Connect the oscilloscope as follows: Channel A to Q5-c, Channel B to U1-3, Channel C to U1-6 and
Channel D to Q7-e. All channels set to .5 V/Div, TIME/DIV to 5 mSec. The oscilloscope display should be as shown in Waveform SS7-2. If the display is correct, use one of the oscilloscope channels to check the transfer signal
SERVICE SHEET 7 (cont'd)
at TP-3. The waveform should be as shown in trace 3 of composite waveform SS7-1. If the waveforms are correct proceed to test procedure 2 if not, proceed to test 1-c.
Test 1-c. With the oscilloscope connected as it was for waveform SS7-2, set the oscilloscope TIME/DIV to 1 mSec and sync to internal. Place the model 8443A MODE switch to SCAN HOLD. The oscilloscope display should be as shown in waveform SS7-3, If the display is correct, but was not correct in test 1-b, trouble is in the marker control circuit. If waveform A is correct, and none of the others are correct, check U1A. If waveforms A and B are correct and
C and D are not, check U1B. If only waveform D is incorrect, Q7 is probably defective. Use one of the oscilloscope probes to check the transfer pulse at TP 3. The transfer pulse should occur 1 ms after the input trigger pulse and almost identical to it in appearance. If the waveforms shown in SS7-3 are correct and the transfer pulse is not, check
U1C, CR2, CR3, CR4 and associated components.
2 Reference Signal Amplifiers and Gate
The reference signal (internal or external) is selected by a switch, A5S1, located on the cover of the A5 assembly. L5 and C5 form a 1 MHz series resonant tank. R4 and the intrinsic resistance of Q2 provides a 50 ohm load for the reference source. Q2 is a common base amplifier with a voltage gain of ten. Q3 is a common emitter amplifier which saturates on positive half cycles of the reference signal. Q1 is a buffer amplifier which serves to isolate the time base circuits from external loads when the 1 MHz reference output is used in external equipment.
NAND gate U1D couples the 1 MHz reference signal to the first divide-by-ten circuit, U4, when the Q signal from U2 is high.
Test Procedure 2
Test 2-a. Connect the oscilloscope Channel A to R17/R29 junction, (channel B to U1-13, Channel C to U1-11 and
Channel D to U1-12. The oscilloscope display should be as shown in waveform SS7-4. If the oscilloscope Channel B signal is not present, the other signals cannot be present either, because they are derived from the divide-by-ten circuits. If the Channel B signal is not present check for it first, at the base of Q3, then at the emitter of Q2. After making repairs, if the oscilloscope display .s as shown in SS7-4, and the counter still does not function properly, proceed to test procedure 3.
3 Divide-by-Ten Circuits
The divide-by-ten circuits (U4, U3A, U3B, U5A and U5B) are reset when pin 6 of U1B goes high. U4 is set to zero and the other four dividers are set to nine. When NAND gate U1D couples the reference signal to U4, U4 provides an output to reset the last four dividers to zero on the tenth input pulse. At the lime the last four dividers are set to zero, a pulse from one of the last three dividers (the divider output selected is determined by the position of the RESOLUTION switch) is provided to toggle the main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade.
The outputs from tile last three dividers, which are used to toggle t e main gate flip-flop in the high frequency decade, are wired together in an OR configuration. Only one of the three outputs is available at any given time; the output from the divider selected is enabled by a ground return from the resolution switch. U3B provides the 1 kHz resolution, U5A provides the 100 Hz resolution and U5B provides the 10 Hz resolution. The resolution switch also provides a ground to one of three inputs in the low frequency counter to cause the decimal point in one of three numerical readouts to illuminate.
The 1K resistors in the outputs of the divide-by-ten circuits are the pullup resistors. The outputs in these
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
dividers are open collectors and the resistors are required to provide wired OR capabilities.
When the end-of-count signal from the high frequency decade goes low, Q6 is turned off and a high is provided as an external print command to devices connected to the model 8443A rear panel BCD output connector.
Test Procedure 3
Test 3-a. Composite waveform SS7-5 illustrates the correct gate toggle outputs from the time base circuit for various settings of the RESOLUTION switch referenced to the analyzer scan ramp.
Waveform 1 represents an analyzer scan time of 1 mSec per division, displayed on the oscilloscope at 5 mSec per division. Waveform 2 is the gate toggle pulse with the model 8443A in the 1 kHz resolution mode. Waveform 3 is the gate toggle pulse with the model 8443A in the 100 Hz resolution mode. Waveform 4 is the analyzer scan (1 mSec/Div) displayed on the oscilloscope at 20 mSec/Div and waveform 5 is the gate toggle with the model 8443A in the 10 Hz resolution mode.
Service Note
If the model 8443A works properly in the MARKER mode at 100 Hz and 1 kHz, but not at 10
Hz, U5B is defective. If it works at 1 kHz, but not at 100 Hz or 10 Hz, U5A is defective.
8-36
Section 8
Figure 8-34. A5, Time Base Assembly, Cover and Components
8-37
Figure 8-35. Time Base Circuit, Schematic Diagram
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SERVICE SHEET 8
Normally, causes of malfunction in the model 8443A circuits will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the Troubleshooting Tree.
When trouble has been isolated to the high frequency decade assembly (A6), it should be removed from the chassis and reinstalled using an extender board. This will provide easy access to test points and components.
Equipment Required
4 Channel Oscilloscope
10:1 Oscilloscope
Probes (4)
General
Service Kit
HF Signal Generator
Digital Voltmeter
The major purpose of the high frequency decade is to divide the input frequency by ten and supply suitable signals to drive the circuits in the low frequency counter assembly.
When the high frequency decade is functioning properly, the outputs to the low frequency counter will appear as shown in waveform SS8-1.
Initial Control Settings (for waveform SS8-1)
Spectrum Analyzer (setting of controls not listed is unimportant)
SCAN WIDTH
PER DIVISION ................................ ............................... 10 MHz
SCAN WIDTH................................ ........................ PER DIVISION
FREQUENCY ................................ ................................ .... 10 MHz
SCAN TIME
PER DIVISION ................................ ................ 1 MILLISECOND
SCAN MODE................................ ................................ ........... INT
SCAN TRIGGER................................ ................................ .. AUTO
Tracking Generator/Counter
MODE ................................ ................................ ....... SCAN HOLD
RESOLUTION ................................ ................................ .... 100 Hz
MARKER CONTROL knob................................ ..............Pulled out
Oscilloscope
SYNC................................ ................................ ........ INTERNAL
TIME/DIV................................ ................................ ........... 2 mSec
VOLTS/DIV ................................ ................................ ................ .2
SLOPE ................................ ................................ ........................ --
TRIGGER................................ ................................ ............... ACF
1 Input Amplifier and Switching Matrix
Q1 and Q2 provide flat amplification for signals with frequencies up to 120 MHz. L10 and L11 are peaking inductors to peak the gain at the high frequency end of the bandpass. R22 in the Q2 emitter circuit is selected so that a nominal -18 dBm signal will toggle U3.
The value of R24 is selected to provide a dc level at pin 8 of U3 that is -900 mV +30 mV with no signal input. CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4,
CR6, CR7, CR8, CR10 and CR11 comprise a switching matrix.
When the tracking generator output is used, CR1, CR4, CR6 and
CR11 are all forward biased and CR2, CR3, CR7, CR8 and CR10 are all reverse biased. The signal is coupled through C3, CR1,
CR6, C17 and L9 to the base of Q1. When the EXTERNAL input is used, the diodes mentioned above are biased directly opposite from the way they are when the tracking generator output is counted.
The signal is coupled through C4, C9, C10, CR2, CR7, CR8, CR10,
C17 and L9 to the base of Q1.
Test Procedure
Test 1-a. Connect a 1 MHz source at +10 dBm to the model 8443A
COUNTER INPUT and set the model 8443A MODE switch to
EXTERNAL. Connect the oscilloscope Channel A input to Q1-b, the Channel B input to Q2-b and the Channel C input to U3 pin 8.
Set the oscilloscope VOLTS/DIV to .2 for each channel and the TIME/DIV to 1 µSec, Trigger INT, ACF and
SLOPE +. The waveform should be as shown in waveform SS8-2.
If none of the waveforms are present, check the switching matrix. If waveform A is present and B and C are not, check Q1 and associated components. If waveform A and B are present and C is not, check Q2 and associated components. If all of the waveforms are present, proceed to test procedure .
2 Main Gate Flip-Flop
The main gate flip-flop (U2) is toggled by the output of one of the last three dividers in the time base circuit. When U2 is toggled to start the count, Q goes low to enable U3 and Q goes high. When
U2 is again toggled Q goes high and Q goes low, U3 is no longer enabled and the negative-going trailing edge of the Q output of U2 produces an end-of-count signal to the time base.
Gate toggle translator Q5/Q6/Q7 translates the TTL output from the decade dividers in the time base circuit into the ECL input required by U2. Rise time is critical in U2 so a zener circuit such as that used in the reset translator cannot be used.
End of count translator Q3/Q4 translates the ECL output from U2 Q to the TTL logic required to clock the flip-flop in the time base circuit.
Test Procedure 2
Test 2-a. Set the model 8443A to operate in the
MARKER mode with the RESOLUTION control
1. Q6-b Gate toggle from A5 ................................ .. .2 VOLTS/DIV
2. Translated Gate toggle Q5-e............................... .2 VOLTS/DIV
3. U2 pin 13 Q output ................................ ............. .2 VOLTS/DIV
4. U2 pin 1 Q output ................................ ............... .1 VOLTS/DIV
5. Translated Q output, TP2 ................................ ... .5 VOLTS/DIV set to 100 Hz. Set the analyzer SCAN TIME PER DIVISION to 1
MILLISECOND. Synchronize the oscilloscope to the analyzer scan, triggered on + slope, ACF. Waveform SS8-3 is a composite waveform for the five critical circuit points; these points are identified directly below the composite waveform. Oscilloscope
VOLTS/DIV information follows identification of test points.
If waveforms 1 and 2 are correct and 3, 4, and 5 are not, U2 is probably defective. If waveform 1 is present and 2 is not, check
Q5/Q6/Q7 and associated components. If waveforms 1, 2, 3 and 4 are correct and waveform 5 is not, check Q3/Q4 and associated components.
Note
This test assumes that the time base circuit is functioning properly. If waveforms 1 and 3 do not appear, ground TP2 on the A5 assembly.
Waveform 1 and 2 should appear (at a much faster rate). If they do, U2 is defective.
3 Reset Translator and Divide-By-Ten Decade.
CR9, a 2.87 volt zener diode is used to translate the TTL input from the reset line to an ECL input compatible with the input requirements of the high frequency decade.
U3, U4, U5 and U6 are feedback connected to provide 1-2-4-8 BCD output to the low frequency counter circuit. U1A, U1B, U1C and
U1D comprise a quad ECL to saturated logic translator which makes the ECL output of the decade compatible with TTL used in the low frequency counter circuits. R28/C24, R29/C26 and
R30/C27 serve as RFI filters.
The decade dividers convert the 100 kHz to 110 MHz input frequency to an output frequency of 10 kHz to 11 MHz. The A, B, C and D outputs directly drive the buffer/store for the least significant digit in the low frequency counter. In addition the D output drives the following blanking decade counter.
Test Procedure 3
Test 3-a. Use the oscilloscope to check for the reset pulse at XA6 pin 9 and at the junction of R11/CR12. The reset pulses should be positive-going, three to four volts in amplitude.
Test 3-b. Set the model 8443A to operate in the MARKER mode
100 Hz resolution. Set the analyzer SCAN TIME PER DIVISION to
1 MILLISECOND. Connect the oscilloscope Channel A, B, C and D inputs to test points 4, 5, 6 and 7 respectively. Set oscilloscope
TIME/DIV to 5 mSec and VOLTS/DIV to .5 for all channels. The oscilloscope display
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
should appear as shown in waveform SS8-4. Since the gate toggle
U2 and the input amplifiers have been checked, an output which is not as shown must be due to a defective flip-flop or an associated
OR gate. Note that if an output is missing (TP 5 for instance) and following outputs are present (in this instance, TP 6 and TP 7), the only possible cause of trouble is a defective OR gate (U1B).
8-38
Section 8
Figure 8-36. A6, High Frequency Decade Assembly, Cover and Components
8-39
Figure 8-37. High Frequency Decade Assembly, Schematic Diagram
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SERVICE SHEET 9
Normally causes of malfunctions in the model 8443A circuits will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the
Troubleshooting Tree.
When trouble has been isolated to the low frequency counter assembly (Al), it should be removed from the chassis and reinstalled using an extender board. This will provide easy access to test points and components.
Equipment Required
4 Channel Oscilloscope Service Kit
10:1 Oscilloscope Digital Voltmeter
Probes (4)
1 DS1 Drive Circuit
The least significant digit is displayed on DS1. When the transfer pulse from the time base is applied to buffer/store U8, the information in the high frequency decade is transferred to decoder/driver U1. U1 decodes the 1-2-4-8 information to cause the appropriate number in the numerical readout to be illuminated. U8 also provides a BCD output to a rear panel connector for use in external equipment.
Test Procedure 1
Test 1-a. Use the digital voltmeter to verify the presence of dc levels at pins A and B/2 shown on the schematic diagram.
Test 1-b. If the A, B, C and D inputs are as shown in
Waveform SS9-1, and none of the numerical readouts illuminate, trouble is probably in the +175 volt or +5 volt circuits. Check for an open circuit in L1, L2 or L3.
Waveform SS9-1
(See Test 1-c)
Test 1-c. If some, or all of the other numerical readouts illuminate, trouble is probably in DS1, U1 or
U8. Isolate the cause of trouble as follows:
Ground (one at a time) pins 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15 and 16 of U1. Refer to the schematic and verify that the proper number illuminates for each pin as they are grounded. If none of the numbers illuminate, check R1. If R1 is providing power to DS1, DS1 is defective.
If DS1 numbers illuminate as they should in the previous test, connect the oscilloscope to U8 as follows: Channel A - pin 14, Channel B - pin 1,
Channel C - pin 3 and Channel D - pin 16. Set the oscilloscope TIME/DIV to .5 second and the Volts/Div to .5. Operate the model 8443A in the MARKER mode at 10 Hz resolution. Place the analyzer SCAN WIDTH
PER DIVISION to 10 MHz, SCAN WIDTH to PER
DIVISION and SCAN TIME PER DIVISION to 1
MILLISECOND. At these analyzer settings, the least significant digit of the counter will change numbers quite rapidly; as a result, the output from the buffer store will also change rapidly. The oscilloscope display should appear (to the/eye) as four dots moving from left to right and changing in amplitude erratically.
A time exposure of the oscilloscope CRT should be similar to that shown in waveform SS9-1. If the oscilloscope display is correct, U1 is defective. If the display is not correct, U8 is defective.
2 DS2 through DS7 Drive Circuits
The six counter circuits following that of the least significant digit each consist of a blanking decade counter, a buffer/store, a decoder/driver and a numerical readout device. DS3, DS4 and DS5 have inputs that will cause a decimal point to illuminate in one of them; the position of the RESOLUTION switch determines which decimal point is illuminated.
Blanking inputs are provided to the circuits driving
DS4, DS5, DS6 and DS7.
Each of the last five blanking decade counters is driven by the divide-by-ten output of the blanking decade counter which precedes it. The first blanking decade counter (U16) is driven by the D output of the high frequency decade. When the transfer pulse is received, each buffer/store transfers the count information from the blanking decade counter to the decoder/driver and to a BCD output connector on the rear panel. The decoder/drivers operate on negative logic; the rear panel BCD outputs are positive logic. When the reset pulse appears all of the blanking decade counters and the high frequency decade are set to zero.
Test Procedure 2
General
The numerical readout indicators, in many instances, will help to localize a problem to a specific area within the low frequency counter circuits.
If any one of the numerical readouts does not function, but numerical readouts to the left of it do, the trouble is likely to be the readout itself, the decoder/driver, or the buffer/store associated with that readout. It is not likely that the associated blanking decade counter is defective.
If any numerical readout is blank or reads only one number and the readouts to the left consistently read
0, the blanking decade counter for the first readout affected (from the right) is probably defective.
Test 2-a. If a single numerical readout is not functioning, ground (one at a time) pins 1, 2, 3, 4, 11,
12, 13, 14; 15 and 16 of the decoder/driver which drives it. Refer to the schematic diagram to verify that the right number is illuminating.
If none of the numbers illuminate, check the 6800 ohm resistor associated with that readout. If the 6800 ohm resistor is supplying power, the readout device is defective.
If the readout device illuminates correctly when the specified pins are grounded, proceed to test 2-b.
Test 2-b. Connect the oscilloscope to the buffer/store associated with the malfunctioning readout as follows:
Channel A - pin 14, Channel B - pin 1, Channel C - pin
3 and Channel D - pin 16. Set the oscilloscope
TIME/DIV to 1 second and the VOLTS/DIV to .5.
Operate the model 8443A in the EXTERNAL mode at
10 Hz resolution with the RF OUTPUT connected to the COUNTER INPUT. Set the analyzer SCAN
WIDTH PER DIVISION to 10 MHz, the SCAN WIDTH to PER
Waveform SS9-2
(See Test 2-c)
DIVISION and the SCAN TIME PER DIVISION to 1 second. The oscilloscope CRT display should appear
(to the eye) as four dots moving from left to right and changing erratically in amplitude. A time exposure of the oscilloscope CRT should be similar to waveform
SS9-1. If the oscilloscope CRT display is as shown, the decoder/driver is defective. If the display is not correct, proceed to test 2-c.
Test 2-c. Connect the oscilloscope to the blanking decade counter associated with the malfunctioning readout as follows: Channel A - pin 15, Channel B pin 1, Channel C - pin 2 and Channel D -- pin 16.
With all equipment operating as it was in test 2-b, the oscilloscope CRT should again show four dots moving from left to right and varying erratically in amplitude. If the signal is present, but was not in test 2-b, the buffer/store is defective. If the signal is not present, connect one channel of the oscilloscope to pin 9 of the blanking decade counter. All controls remain the same except that the oscilloscope CRT trace is centered and VOLTS/DIV is set to .2. The oscilloscope CRT presentation should be similar to that shown in Waveform SS9-2. If this waveform is present and the previous one was not, the blanking decade counter is probably defective. If the signal is not present, the preceeding blanking decade counter is defective.
3 DS8 Drive Circuit
The most significant digit, displayed by DS8 in the 10
Hz resolution mode, is used only when the input frequency to the high frequency decade is 100 MHz or higher. Below 100 MHz, DS8 is blanked because there is no positive-going output from U21. The output of U21 changes state on a count of 8 (representative of 80 MHz), but since this transition is negative-going, it has no effect on U15A. When U2 receives a tenth input pulse
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
(representative of [D MHz), it again changes state and the positive-going transition clocks U15A. The Q output of U15A goes high and is applied to the D input of U15B, which acts as a buffer/store. When the transfer pulse appears and the D input to U15B is high, U15B is clocked and the Q output is used to turn on Q1. When Q1 conducts it completes the circuit for the numeral 1 in DS8. The Q output of U15B is inverted by Q2 and applied as a BCD bit to the rear panel BCD connector.
Test Procedure 3
Test 3-a. Connect the oscilloscope to U15 as follows:
Channel A - pin 11, Channel B - pin 9, Channel C pin 5 and Channel D - pin 6. Set the oscilloscope
SWEEP MODE to NORM, INTernal Sync, 5 mSec/Div,
.5 VOLTS/DIV and DC inputs. Set the mode 8443A to operate in the SCAN HOLD mode, MARKER
POSITION knob pulled out, 10 Hz resolution. Operate the analyzer in the ZERO scan mode at 95 MHz. The oscilloscope CRT display should be as shown in waveform SS9-3.
Change the analyzer FREQUENCY to 105 MHz. Note that U15A Channel B Q output (pin 9) goes high when the frequency reaches 100 MHz. The Q output of
U15B (Channel C), goes high and the Q output of
U15B (Channel D) goes low. The oscilloscope CRT display should now be as shown in Waveform SS9-4.
In the above tests, if the Channel A and B waveforms were correct and the Channel C and/or D were not, proceed to test 3-b. If all waveforms were correct and the numeral 1 did not light in DS8 when the frequency was over 100 MHz, proceed to test 3-c. If the Channel
A waveform was correct, but channel B was not, U15 is defective.
Waveform SS9-4
(See Test 3-a)
Test 3-b. Leave Channel A and B of the oscilloscope connected as they were in the above tests. Connect the Channel C input to U15 pin 13 and the Channel D input to U15 pin 3. The oscilloscope CRT display should be as shown in waveform SS9-5. If either the transfer or reset pulses are missing and the other counter digits function properly, U22 is defective.
Test 3-c. Apply a ground to Q1-c. If DS8 numeral 1 illuminates, Q1 is defective. If it does not, DS8 is defective.
4 Blanking
When the UNBLANKED-BLANKED switch on the rear panel is in the BLANKED position, all zeros which are to the left of the decimal point and also to the left of the first significant digit are blanked.
Waveform SS9-3
(See Test 3-a)
Waveform SS9-5
(See Test 3-b)
8-40
Section 8
Figure 8-38. A1A1, Low frequency Counter Board Assembly, Components
8-41
Figure 8-39. Low Frequency Counter Circuit Schematic Diagram
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Section 8
SERVICE SHEET 10
Normally, the cause of a malfunction in the model 8443A will be isolated to a circuit board or assembly as a result of performing the tests specified in the troubleshooting tree.
Equipment Required
Digital Voltmeter
Volt-ohm-ammeter
Spectrum Analyzer
Fan Motor Assembly A1A2
M1 is a brushless, dc motor comprising a cylindrical, permanent magnet rotor and a four section stator winding. It also has two Hall generators (marked "X" on the schematic); the generators are mounted 900 apart on the stator. The Hall generators have two outputs each, and the two outputs are 1800 out of phase with each other. Each output drives a transistor (Q1-4) and each transistor drives one of the stator windings.
As the rotor turns, an evenly rotating signal is produced by the Hall generators. This signal is four sine waves relatively spaced at 0°, 90°,
180°, and 270°. The sine waves are amplified by the transistors (Q1-4) and applied to the stator windings (W1-4). The relationship between the
Hall generators and the stator windings causes the rotor to turn whenever power is applied to the circuit.
Motor speed is dependent upon the dc current through the Hall generators. This current is controlled by Q5. Q6, Q7 and CR8 provide a reference voltage for Q5. Q5 is also referenced to the voltage produced by CR1-4; this voltage is the rectified counter EMF of the motor and is proportional to motor speed. If motor speed varies, the counter EMF voltage changes; this changes the conduction of Q5, which changes the dc current through the Hall generators, which stabilizes motor speed.
Test Procedure
Use the digital voltmeter to check the voltages shown on the schematic.
8-42
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SERVICE SHEET 10 (cont'd)
Table 8-8. Signal Path for BCD Information from Low Frequency Counter to Rear Panel
Low Frequency
Counter AA1
08443-60037
Connector
Board AIMP5
08443-60039
Mother Board
A18
08443-60016
BCD Board
A19
08443-60068
A3
B3
C3
D3
A4
B4
A2
B2
C2
D2
C4
D4
A5
B5
C5
D5
A6
B6
C6'
D6
Signal
A0
B0
C0
D0
A1
B1
C1
D1
A7
Blanking
Inhibit
+5
Switch
Gnd
XA1A1
Connector
Pin No
9
10
L
M
15
R
14
S
17
T
13
N
12
P
J
8
K
11
16
U
W
V
18
19
21
X
20
Y
22
Z
XA5, 1
XA5, 2
8
F
7
J
9
K
L
11
M
10
5
E
D
B
3
C
2
H
6
4
AIMP5
Connector
Pin No
R
15
S
14
N
P
13
12
A
1
1
2
11
L
10
M
13
N
9
J
8
K
12
P
S
R
14
15
17
T
16
U
XA19
Connector
Pin No
5
D
4
E
7
6
F
H
18
V
A
B
25, Blanking
24, 50, 16, 40,
Digital Output
Connector
Pin No.
1
2
26
27
3
4
28
29
7
8
32
33
9
10
5
6
30
31
34
35
11
12
36
37
13
14
38
39
15
Blanking
Switch
48
22
41, Blanking
Switch
Blanked
Unblanked
Note
Signals A0, B0, C0 and
D0 are right-most digit.
Gnd
+5
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 8-40. A1, Low Frequency Counter Assembly, Components
Figure 8-41. A1A2, Fan Motor Assembly, Components
8-43
Figure 8-42. Fan Motor Credits, Schematic Diagram
10
Figure 8-44. A16, Switch Assembly (8443A)
8-44
Figure 8-43. Overall Wiring Diagram, Including Chassis Mounted Parts
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SERVICE SHEET 4 (CHANGE 12)
1. Rectifier Assembly A15
The Rectifier Assembly contains three two-diode, fullwave rectifiers; a regulator circuit; and four fuses. The rectifiers on this board assembly supply the dc voltages that are regulated by the sense amplifier (regulator control) circuits on Sense Amplifier Assembly A14 and the series regulator transistors mounted inside the HP 8443A rear panel. All together, these components make up four dc power supplies to furnish regulated dc power levels of +24 volts,
+6 volts, +20 volts, and -12 volts.
Full-wave rectifier CR1-CR2 supplies +39 volts to the +24 volts and +20 volts series regulators, Q3 and Q1 respectively, both of which are controlled by sense amplifiers on Sense Amplifier Assembly A14. Full-wave rectifiers CR3-CR4 and CR5-CR6 furnish +13.2 volts and
+8.8 volts to transistors Q2 and Q4 respectively, the +6 volts and -12 volts regulators. Q2 and Q4 are also each controlled by a separate sense amplifier circuit on the
Sense Amplifier Assembly. The regulator circuit comprising CR7, Q1, R2 and R3 taps off the +39 volts output of rectifier CR1-CR2 to provide a +25.3 volts reference for the +24 volts sense amplifier. The output of the +24 volts sense amplifier, switched through the
POWER STBY-ON switch, serves as the reference for the other three sense amplifier circuits.
Test Procedure 1
Test 1-a. Check the voltage levels at the upper ends of the fuses mounted on the Rectifier Board Assembly. (See
Service Sheet 4 for fuse locations and voltage levels.)
Test 1-b. If there is no voltage present at the upper end of a fuse, check the fuse. If you replace a blown fuse with a new one, and it too burns out, the problem is most likely in the associated sense amplifier circuit on Sense Amplifier
Assembly A14.
Test 1-c. If the problem is not a blown fuse, set the frontpanel POWER switch to STBY, disconnect the ac power cable, and place the Rectifier Assembly on an extender circuit board. Then reconnect the ac power cable and set the POWER switch to ON.
Test 1-d. With an ac voltmeter, measure the voltages across the primary and secondary windings of the ac input power transformer. If there is voltage across the transformer primary, but none across one or more of the secondary windings in use, replace the transformer. If there is no voltage across the transformer primary, check the ac line fuse and the LINE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel, the front-panel POWER switch, the line filter
(FL1), and the ac power cable.
Test 1-e. If the voltage across the transformer secondary windings is normal, use the digital voltmeter to check for the dc voltages shown on the schematic diagram.
3 Sense Amplifier Assembly A14
The Sense Amplifier Assembly contains four sense amplifier (series regulator control) circuits. Each sense amplifier controls the series regulator transistor for a particular one of the dc outputs: +24V, +20V, +6V, and
12V. In each sense amplifier, a comparator circuit compares the output voltage of its associated regulator transistor with a fixed dc reference derived from the +24 volts supply. Any variation in the output is translated by the comparator and an amplifier circuit into a signal which causes the series regulator to counteract the change in output level.
The sense amplifier circuits and their associated series regulators are made up as follows:
+24V sense amplifier A14Q14 through A14Q19 controls series regulator Q3.
+20V sense amplifier A14Q1, A14Q5, A14Q6, and
A14Q11 controls series regulator Q1.
+6V sense amplifier A14Q2, A14Q7, A14Q8, and
A14Q12 controls series regulator Q2.
-12V sense amplifier A14Q3, A14Q9, A14Q10, and A14Q13 controls series regulator Q4.
The Sense Amplifier Assembly also contains two crowbar circuits, one (CR11 through CR19) for the +dc supplies, and one (CR2 through CR4, and Q4) for the -12V supply.
Reset switch S1 on the Sense Amplifier Assembly is a momentary push button used to reset the +dc crowbar.
The -12V crowbar rests automatically.
Test Procedure 3
To test the Sense Amplifier Assembly, place it on an extender circuit board and use a digital voltmeter to check for the voltage levels shown in the assembly schematic diagram on Service Sheet 4.
NOTE
The voltages shown on the Sense Amplifier assembly schematic diagram are nominal values and may vary slightly from instrument to instrument.
Change 1 8-29
Figure 8-29. A15, Rectifier Assembly, Components (CHANGE 12)
Change 1 8-30
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (CHANGE 13)
Reference HP Part C Mfr
Designation Number D Qty Description Code Mfr Part Number
A5 08443-60094 5 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY-TIME BASE 26480 08443-60094
A5C1 0160-2055 9 25 CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 28480 0160-2055
A5C2 0160-2055 9 CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 28480 0160-2055
A5C3 0160-2055 9 CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 28480 0160-2055
A5C4 0160-2055 9 CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 23480 0160-2055
A5C5 0160-0174 9 1 CAPACITOR-FXD .47UF +80 -20% 25VDC CER 28480 0160-0174
A5C6 0160-0229 7 1 CAPACITOR-FXD 33UF + -10% 10VDC TA 56289 150D336X9010B2
A5C7 0180-0116 1 6 CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF + -10% 35VDC TA 56289 150D685X9035B2
A5C8 0160-2055 9 CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 24804 0160-2055
A5C9 0180-1735 2 CAPACITOR-FXD .22UF + -10% 35VDC CER 56289 150D224X9035A2
A5C10* 0160-3456 6 9 CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF + -10% 1KVDC CER 28460 0160-3456
A5C11 0160-2055 9 CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 28480 0160-2055
A5C12 0180-1735 2 CAPACITOR-FXD .22UF -10% 35VDC CER 56289 150D224X9035A2
A5C13 0160-3453 3 9 CAPACITOR-FXD .05UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 28480 0160-3453
A5C14-C17 0160-2055 9 CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80 -20% 100VDC CER 28480 0160-2055
A5CR1 1901-0025 2 DIODE-GEN PRP 100V 200MA DO-7 28480 1901-0025
A5CR2 1910-0016 0 5 DIODE-GE 60V 60MA 1US DO-7 28480 1910-0016
A5CR3 1901-0025 2 DIODE-GEN PRP 100V 200MA DO-7 28480 1901-0025
A5CR4 1901-0025 2 DIODE-GEN PRP 100V 200HA DO-7 28480 1901-0025
A5CR5 1901-0535 9 DIODE-SM SIG SCHOTTKY 26480 1901-0535
A5E1 8159-0005 0 2 WIRE 22AWG W PVC 1X22 80C 28480 8159-0005
A5E2 8159-0005 WIRE 22AWG W PVC 1X22 80C 28480 8159-0005
A5J1 1250-1195 8 9 CONNECTOR-RF SM-SLD M PC 50-OHM 28480 1250-1195
A5J2 1250-1195 8 CONNECTOR-RF SM-SLD M PC 50-OHM 28480 1250-1195
A5L1 9100-1629 4 6 INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 47UH 5% .166DX .385LG 28480 9100-1629
A5L2 9100-1629 4 INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 47UH 5% .166DX .385LG 28480 9100-1629
A5L3 9100-1629 4 INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 47UH 5% .166DX .385LG 26480 9100-1629
A5L4 9100-1643 2 INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 300UH 5%.166DX .385LG 28480 9100-1643
A5Q1 1854-0404 0 3 TRANSISTOR NPN SI TO-18 PD=360MW 28480 1854-0404
A5Q2 1854-0404 0 TRANSISTOR NPN SI TO-18 PD=360MW 28480 1854-0404
A5Q3 1854-0404 0 TRANSISTOR NPN SI TO-18 PD=360MW 28480 1854-0404
A5Q4 1854-0071 7 TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ 28480 1854-0071
A5Q5 1854-0071 7 TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ 28480 1854-0071
A5Q6 1854-0071 7 TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD:300MW FT=200MHZ 28480 1654-0071
A5Q7 1854-0071 7 TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD 300MW FT=200MHZ 28480 1854-0071
A5R1 0757-0438 3 8 RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
A5R2 0757-0438 3 RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
A5R3 0757-0458 7 1 RESISTOR 51.1K 1% .125W FC TC = 400/+800 28480 0757-0458
A5R4* 0757-0316 6 1 RESISTOR 42.2 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-42R2-F
A5R5 0757-0440 7 1 RESISTOR 7.5K 1%.125W FC TC = 400/+700 28480 0757-0440
A5R6 0757-0438 3 RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
A5R7 0757-0416 7 11 RESISTOR 511 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-511R-F
A5R8 0698-0084 9 RESISTOR 2.15K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-2151-F
A5R9 0757-0394 0 6 RESISTOR 5.1K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-51R1-F
A5R10 0757-0416 7 RESISTOR 511 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-511R-F
A5R11 0698-3441 8 7 RESISTOR 215 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-215R-F
A5R12 0757-0438 3 RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
A5R13 0698-0084 9 RESISTOR 2.15K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-2151-F
A5R14* 0757-0420 3 7 RESISTOR 750 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-751-F
A5R15 0757-0280 4 RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W FC TC = 400/+ 600 28480 0757-0280
A5R16 0698-3441 8 RESISTOR 215 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-215R-F
A5R17 0757-0438 3 RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC = 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
A5R18 0757-0159 5 2 RESISTOR 1K 1% .5W F TC = 0 + -100 28480 0757-0159
A5R19 0757-0280 3 RESISTOR 1K 1%.125W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0757-0280
A5R20 0757-1094 9 RESISTOR 1.47K 1%.125W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0757-1094
A5R21 0698-3441 8 RESISTOR 1K 1%.125W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0693-3441
A5R22 0757-0280 3 RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0757-0280
A5R23 0757-0290 5 RESISTOR 6.19K 1% .125W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0757-0290
A5R24 0698-3441 8 RESISTOR 1K 1%.125W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0698-3441
A5R25 0757-0438 3 RESISTOR 5.11K 1%.25W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0757-0438
A5R26 0757-0438 3 1 RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .25W FC TC= -400/+700 28480 0757-0438
A5R27 0757-0438 3 RESISTOR 5.11K 1%.125W F TC= 0 +-100 28480 0757-0438
A5R28 0757-0280 3 RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W FC TC= -400/+600 28480 0757-0280
A5R29 0698-8821 8 1 RESISTOR 5.62 OHM 1% .125W F TC= 0 + -100 24546 C4-1/8-TO-5R62-F
A5S1 3101-1213 8 1 SWITCH-TGL SUBMIN DPST .5A 120VAC PC 28480 3101-1213
A5TP1 08443-00041 6 16 TEST POINT 28480 08443-00041
A5TP2 08443-00041 6 TEST POINT 28480 08443-00041
A5TP3 08443-00041 6 TEST POINT 28400 08443-00041
A5TP4 08443-00041 6 TEST POINT 28460 08443-00041
A5TP5 06443-00041 6 TEST POINT 28480 08443-00041
A5TP6 08443-00041 6 TEST POINT 28480 08443-00041
A5U1 1820-0054 5 2 IC GATE TTL NAND QUAD 2-INP 01295 SN7400N
A5U2 1820-0304 8 2 IC FF TTL J-K M/S PULSE PRESET/CLEAR 01295 SN7472N
A5U3 1820-2078 7 5 IC 74LS 490 P2 CNTR 28480 1820-2078
A5U4 1820-2078 7 IC 74LS 490 P2 CNTR 28480 1820-2078
A5U6 1820-2078 7 IC 74LS 490 P2 CNTR 28480 1820-2078
A5U6 1820-1217 0 IC 74LS 151P MUXR 28480 1820-1217
Change 1 8-31
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
NATIONAL NATIONAL
PART STOCK PART STOCK
NUMBER FSCM NUMBER NUMBER FSCM NUMBER
CB1555 01121 5905-00-841-8307 0698-3454 28480 5905-00-974-6077
C023A101L503ZS25 56289 5910-00-544-6063 0698-7229 28480 5905-01-009-7560
C3-1/8-TO-1001-G 24546 5905-01-109-5428 0698-7236 28480 5905-01-015-8085
C4-1/8-TO-511R-F 24546 5905-01-033-3492 0698-7240 28480 5905-00-163-0847
MC10102P 04713 5962-00-496-2209 0698-8821 28480 5905-01-158-9776
MC10125L 04713 5962-00-626-3626 0757-0159 28480 5905-00-830-6677
MC10135L 04713 5962-01-014-9638 0757-0279 28480 5905-00-221-8310
MC10138L 04713 5962-00-059-2590 0757-0280 28480 5905-00-853-8190
MLM324P 04713 5962-01-029-4500 0757-0288 28480 5905-00-193-4318
P8155 34649 5962-01-083-2249 0757-0316 28480 5905-00-981-7475
P8243 34649 5962-01-102-1633 0757-0317 28480 5905-00-244-7189
SN74LS00N 01295 5962-00-056-4888 0757-0394 28480 5905-00-412-4036
SN74LS138N 01295 5962-01-004-1270 0757-0395 28480 5905-00-891-4210
SN74LS248N 01295 5962-01-150-8841 0757-0405 28480 5905-00-493-0738
SN74LS290N 01295 5962-01-064-8075 0757-0416 28480 5905-00-998-1795
SN74LS373N 01295 5962-01-107-6934 0757-0420 28480 5905-00-493-5404
SN7400N 01295 5962-01-096-2153 0757-0438 28480 5905-00-929-2529
SN7472N 01295 5962-00-865-4631 0757-0440 28480 5905-00-858-6795
0160-0127 28480 5910-00-809-5484 0757-0442 28480 5905-00-998-1792
0160-0174 28480 5910-00-234-9817 0757-0458 28480 5905-00-494-4628
0160-0575 28480 5910-01-091-0106 0757-0465 28480 5905-00-904-4412
0160-2055 28480 5910-00-211-1611 0757-1000 28480 5905-00-057-8480
0160-2204 28480 5910-00-463-5949 0757-1094 28480 5905-00-917-0580
0160-2327 28480 5910-00-244-7171 0812-0012 28480 5905-00-581-6437
0160-2930 28480 5910-00-465-9754 08443-00041 28480 6625-00-581-8806
0160-3453 28480 5910-00-544-6063 08443-60047 28480 6625-00-355-4855
0160-3456 28480 5910-01-014-2874 08443-60056 28480 6625-01-109-3488
0160-3875 28480 5910-01-056-2163 08443-60064 28480 6625-01-109-3482
0160-3877 28480 5910-01-035-6720 08443-60067 28480 5995-01-137-3129
0160-3879 28480 5910-00-477-8011 1N4004 01295 5961-00-106-6991
0160-4084 28480 5910-00-057-8158 1N4998 02735 5961-00-994-0520
0170-0040 28480 5910-00-829-0245 1N5338B 04713 5961-00-409-3632
0180-0116 28480 5910-00-809-4701 1200-0565 28480 5935-01-082-4293
0180-0197 28480 5910-00-850-5355 1200-0694 28480 5935-01-082-1765
0180-0229 28480 5910-00-403-2449 1250-1194 28480 5935-00-446-4102
0180-0376 28480 5910-00-444-6726 1250-1195 28480 6625-01-110-4142
0180-1735 28480 5910-00-430-6016 1251-0600 28480 5905-01-082-1966
0180-2215 28480 5910-00-187-2609 1251-1887 28480 5935-00-147-7384
0340-0140 28480 5970-00-088-5074 1251-2035 28480 5935-01-087-8437
0360-0124 28480 5940-00-993-9338 1400-0084 28480 5920-00-881-4636
0683-1555 28480 5905-00-111-1684 1480-0059 28480 5315-01-082-1814
0698-0082 28480 5905-00-974-6075 150-110-X5R-102M 51642 5910-00-244-7171
0698-0083 28480 5905-00-407-0052 150D224X9035A2 56289 5910-00-141-5862
0698-0084 28480 5905-00-974-6073 150D225X9020A2 56289 5910-00-850-5355
0698-0085 28480 5905-00-998-1814 150D336X9010B2 56289 5910-00-722-4117
0698-3132 28480 5905-00-828-0388 150D474X9035A2 56289 5910-00-069-5340
0698-3151 28480 5905-00-246-8634 150D685X9035B2 56289 5910-00-809-4701
0698-3429 28480 5905-00-407-0075 1810-0037 28480 5905-00-931-5084
0698-3434 28480 5905-00-997-4071 1810-0204 28480 5905-01-133-3422
0698-3438 28480 5905-00-974-6080 1820-0054 28480 5962-00-138-5248
0698-3439 28480 5905-00-407-0059 1820-0304 28480 5962-00-270-1961
0698-3441 28480 5905-00-974-6076 1820-0802 28480 5962-00-496-2209
0698-3442 28480 5905-00-489-6773 1820-1052 28480 5962-00-626-3626
0698-3444 28480 5905-00-339-7209 1820-1197 28480 5962-01-004-1272
0698-3447 28480 5905-00-828-0404 1820-1216 28480 5962-01-004-1270
Change 1 8-32
NATIONAL
PART STOCK
NUMBER FSCM NUMBER
1820-1383 28480 5962-01-154-1072
1820-1442 28480 5962-01-093-6941
1820-1644 28480 5962-01-150-8841
1826-0161 28480 5961-01-008-4826
1853-0007 28480 5961-00-765-6071
1853-0020 28480 5961-00-904-2540
1853-0213 28480 5961-00-937-1409
1853-0281 28480 5961-00-904-4262
1854-0019 28480 5961-00-108-4783
1854-0071 28480 5961-00-137-4608
1854-0345 28480 5961-00-401-0507
1854-0404 28480 5961-00-408-9807
1854-0477 28480 5961-00-951-8757
1901-0039 28480 5961-00-833-6626
1901-0047 28480 5961-00-929-7778
1901-0050 28480 5961-00-914-7496
1901-0200 28480 5961-00-994-0520
1901-0518 28480 5961-00-430-6819
1901-0535 28480 5961-00-451-8685
1901-0539 28480 5961-00-577-0558
1901-0743 28480 5961-00-496-7364
1902-0048 28480 5961-00-912-3099
1902-0126 28480 5961-00-780-8330
1902-1291 28480 5961-00-138-7317
1902-3002 28480 5961-00-252-1307
1910-0016 28480 5961-00-954-9182
192P47392PTS 56289 5910-00-889-4462
2N2222A 04713 5961-00-136-8280
2N2907A 04713 5961-00-477-7364
2N4236 04713 5961-00-937-1409
2N5179 04713 5961-01-082-1003
208A102 01121 5905-01-133-3422
2110-0001 28480 5920-01-076-5560
2110-0002 28480 5920-00-280-4960
2110-0269 28480 5999-00-333-9620
2110-0564 28480 5920-01-087-1951
2110-0565 28480 5920-01-087-0836
2110-0569 28480 5310-01-097-7987
2200-0103 28480 5305-00-492-8796
2360-0121 28480 5305-01-083-3907
30D177G015DD2 56289 5910-00-187-2609
3050-0010 28480 5310-01-096-5618
3101-1213 28480 5930-00-237-1160
312-002 75915 5920-01-082-3333
312-001 75915 5920-00-280-8342
4040-0750 28480 5999-00-415-1213
5086-7010 28480 5962-00-483-1953
5086-7099 28480 5962-00-504-0511
5086-7357 28480 5985-00-357-3713
5086-7358 28480 5985-00-357-3712
761-3-R1K 11236 5905-00-931-5084
8159-0005 28480 6625-01-014-3446
Change 1 8-33/(B-34 blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
APPENDIX C
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION
Section I. INTRODUCTION
C-1. General.
This appendix provides a summary of the maintenance operations for Generator, Signal SG-1122/U. It authorizes categories of maintenance for specific maintenance functions on repairable items and components and the tools and equipment required to perform each function. This appendix may be used as an aid in planning maintenance operations.
C-2. Maintenance Function.
Maintenance functions will be limited to and defined as follows:
a. Inspect.
To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or electrical characteristics with established standards through examination.
b. Test.
To verify serviceability and to detect incipient failure by measuring the mechanical or electrical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards.
c. Service.
Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition, i.e., to clean
(decontaminate), to preserve, to drain, to paint, or to replenish fuel, lubricants, hydraulic fluids, or compressed air supplies.
d. Adjust.
To maintain, within prescribed limits, by bringing into proper or exact position, or by setting the operating characteristics to the specified parameters.
e. Align
. To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance.
f. Calibrate
. To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments or test measuring and diagnostic equipments used in precision measurement. Consists of comparisons of two instruments, one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared.
g. Install.
The act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position an item, part, module (component or assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of the equipment or system.
h. Replace.
The act of substituting a serviceable like type part, subassembly, or module (component or assembly) for an unserviceable counterpart.
i. Repair.
The application of maintenance services (inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate, replace) or other maintenance actions (welding, grinding, riveting, straightening, facing, remachining, or resurfacing) to restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage, fault, malfunction, or failure in a part, subassembly, module (component or assembly), end item, or system.
j. Overhaul.
That maintenance effort (service/action) necessary to restore an item to a completely serviceable/operational condition as prescribed by maintenance standards (i.e., DMWR) in appropriate technical publications. Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army. Overhaul does not normally return an item to like new condition.
k. Rebuild
. Consists of those services/actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild is the highest degree of materiel maintenance applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age measurements (hours, miles, etc.) considered in classifying Army equipments/components.
Change 2 C-1
C-3. Column Entries.
a. Column 1, Group Number.
Column 1 lists group numbers, the purpose of which is to identify components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with the next higher assembly.
b. Column 2, Component/Assembly.
Column 2 contains the noun names of components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules for which maintenance is authorized.
c. Column 3, Maintenance Functions.
Column 3 lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in column 2.
When items are listed without maintenance functions, it is solely for the purpose of having the group numbers in the MAC and RPSTL coincide.
d. Column 4, Maintenance Category.
Column 4 specifies, by the listing of a "work time" figure in the appropriate subcolumn(s), the lowest level of maintenance authorized to perform the function listed in column 3. This figure represents the active time required to perform that maintenance function at the indicated category of maintenance. If the number or complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function vary at different maintenance categories, appropriate "work time" figures will be shown for each category. The number of task-hours specified by the "work time" figure represents the average time required to restore an item (assembly, subassembly, component, module, end item or system) to a serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions. This time includes preparation time, troubleshooting time, and quality assurance/quality control time in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the maintenance allocation chart. Subcolumns of column 4 are as follows:
C Operator/Crew
O Organizational
F Direct Support
H General Support
D Depot
e. Column 5, Tools and Equipment.
Column 5 specifies by code, those common tool sets (not individual tools) and special tools, test, and support equipment required to perform the designated function.
f. Column 6, Remarks
. Column 6 contains an alphabetic code which leads to the remark in section IV, Remarks,
which is pertinent to the item opposite the particular code.
C-4. Tool and Test Equipment Requirements (Sect. III).
a. Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code
. The numbers in this column coincide with the numbers used in the tools and equipment column of the MAC. The numbers indicate the applicable tool or test equipment for the maintenance functions.
b. Maintenance Category
. The codes in this column indicate the maintenance category allocated the tool or test equipment.
c. Nomenclature
. This column lists the noun name and nomenclature of the tools and test equipment required to perform the maintenance functions.
d. National/NATO Stock Number.
This column lists the National/NATO stock number of the specific tool or test equipment.
e. Tool Number.
This column lists the manufacturer’s part number of the tool followed by the Federal Supply Code for manufacturers (5-digit) in parentheses.
a. Reference Code.
This code refers to the appropriate item in section II, column 6.
b. Remarks.
This column provides the required explanatory information necessary to clarify items appearing in
Change 2 C-2
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SECTION II MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
GENERATOR, SIGNAL SG-1122/U
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
GROUP MAINT. MAINTENANCE LEVEL TOOLS AND
NUMBER COMPONENT ASSEMBLY FUNCTION C O F H D EQUIPMENT REMARKS
00 SIGNAL GENERATOR SG-1122/U Inspect 0.2 A
Test 0.3 B
Test 0.6
Repair 0.3 1 C
Adjust 2.0 2 thru 16
Repair 9.0 D
Calibrate 4.0 2 thru 16
01 LOW FREQUENCY COUNTER ASSEMBLY A1 Inspect 0.2
Test 1.0 2 thru 16
Repair 1.0 E
02 VIDEO ASSEMBLY: AMPLIFIER ALC A8 Inspect 0.2
Test 2.0
Repair 3.0 2 thru 16 F
03 BOARD ASSY: RECTIFIER A15 Inspect 0.2
Test 0.5
Repair 0.5 16 G
04 MOTHERBOARD ASSEMBLY A18 Inspect 0.5
Test 0.5
Repair 3.0
Change 2 C-3
TOOL OR TEST
EQUIPMENT
REF CODE
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SECTION III TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
FOR
GENERATOR, SIGNAL SG-1122/U
MAINTENANCE
CATEGORY NOMENCLATURE
NATIONAL/NATO
STOCK NUMBER TOOL NUMBER
O
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
TOOL KIT, ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT TK-101/G
TOOL KIT, JTK-17
MULTIMETER, DIGITAL
OSCILLOSCOPE AND
PLUG-IN UNIT
GENERATOR, SIGNAL
COUNTER, FREQUENCY, SYSTEM
POWER SUPPLY PLUG-IN
SPECTRUM ANALYZER CONSISTING OF:
DISPLAY SECTION
IF
RF SECTION PLUG IN
FREQUENCY MEASURING SYSTEM CONSISTING OF:
RECEIVER, STANDARD
OSCILLATOR
METER, FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE
AMPLIFIER, POWER
DETECTOR, CRYSTAL
OSCILLATOR, TEST
VOLTMETER, AC
RECORDER, X-Y
ATTENUATOR
MULTIMETER
5180-00-064-5178
4931-01-073-3845
6625-01-010-9255
6625-01-034-3269
4931-01-008-1479
6625-00-318-6304
6625-00-531-4752
6130-01-004-6705
6625-00-424-4370
6625-00-431-9339
6625-00-140-0156
6625-00-528-6773
4931-00-113-2942
6625-01-085-7707
4931-00-128-1444
6625-00-880-4978
6625-00-054-3483
6625-00-229-0457
6625-00-463-6042
5985-00-993-1377
6625-00-238-1274
HP3490A
TEK 5440
TEK 5S14N
HP8640B
HP5345A
TEK PS 805A
HP141T
HP8552B
HP8554B
TRACOR 599K
HP105A
TRACOR 527E
RF 815
HP 423A
HP652A
HP4D0EL
HP7O35B
HP355C
SIMPSON 260-6
DRSEL-MA Form
1 Oct 77 6013
(Edition of 1 Oct 74 may be used until exhausted )
Change 2 C-4
HISA-FM 2132-77
D
E
F
G
REFERENCE
CODE
A
B
C
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
SECTION IV. REMARKS
REMARKS
VISUAL INSPECTION OF EXTERNAL SURFACE ONLY.
NORMAL OPERATIONAL TEST.
REPLACEMENT OF FUSES, KNOBS, AND ANY OTHER MAINTENANCE ON THE EXTERNAL
SURFACE OF THE SG-1122/U.
REPAIR BY REPLACEMENT OF ASSEMBLIES: A2, A3, A4, AS, A6, A7, A9, A10, A11, A12, A13,
A14, A16, A17, A19, A20, T-1, W-1, W3 thru W8.
A1 REPAIRED BY REPLACEMENT OF A1A1, A1A2, A1A3.
A8 REPAIRED TO COMPONENT LEVEL AND REPLACEMENT OF A8A1, A8A1U1, ABA1U2.
LIMITED TO REPLACEMENT OF A15F1 thru A15F4.
AMSEL-ME Form 6228, 1 Jul 76
Change 3 C-5/(C-6 blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
APPENDIX D
OPERATOR, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL
SUPPORT MAINTENANCE REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LISTS
Refer to Section, Replaceable Parts, for all parts required for the operation and repair of the Generator, Signal SG-1122/U.
D-1
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1995 O - 392-950
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 8-39. Low Frequency Counter Assembly A1 and Digital Output Assembly A19 Schematic Diagram, Sheet 1 of 2 (CHANGE 9)
Change 1 8-35/(B-36 blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 8-39. Low Frequency Counter Assembly A1 and Digital Output Assembly A19 Schematic Diagram, Sheet 2 of 2 (CHANGE 9)
Change 1 8-37/(B-38 blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 8-37. High Frequency Decade Assembly, A6 Schematic Diagram (CHANGE 10)
Change 1 8-39/(B-40 blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 8-30. Power Supplies and Regulators, Schematic Diagram (CHANGE 12)
Change 1 8-41/(B-42 blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
Figure 8-34. A5 Time Base Assembly, Cover and Components (CHANGE 13)
Change 1 8-43/(B-42 blank)
Figure 8-35. Time Base Circuit, Schematic Diagram (CHANGE 13)
TM 11-6625-2858-14&P
DA Pam 310-1
DA Pam 738-750
TM 750-244-2
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms.
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS)
Procedures for Destruction of Electronics Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use
(Electronics Command).
Change 1 A-1/(A-2 blank)
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
APPENDIX B
DIFFERENCE DATA SHEETS
B-1. Production Changes.
The following changes MUST be made to the technical manual as a result of instrument production changes.
The extent of the manual changes depends upon the serial prefix of the instrument.
B-2.
Technical Manual Changes.
a.
Make all appropriate serial number related changes indicated in the table shown below:
Model 8443A
Serial prefix or number
Make
Manual changes
1217A00786 through
1217A00910
1217A00911 through
1217A01010
1334A01011 through
1334A01585
1334A01586 through
1334A01785
1
1,2
1-3
1-4
Model 8443B
Serial Prefix or number
1228A00151 through
1228A00190
1228A00191 through
1228A00310
1228A00311 through
1228A00330
1228A00331 through
1228A00350,
1633A,
1719A
Make Manual changes
1
1,2
1,2,4
1,2,4,5
1334A01786 through
1334A02035,
1631A,
1714A
1732A
1732A02436 through
1742A
1821A
2044A
2101A
2140A
2141A
2204A
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
b.
Errata for all models and serial numbers:
(1)
Delete RACK MOUNTING KIT.
Change 1 B-1
(1.1)
(a)
Change Power specification under
General to read: 115V ±10% 48-440 Hz or 230V ± 10%
4866 Hz, 75 Watts, (When the instrument is in standby, power consumption is 30 watts.)
(b)
Change Time Base Aging Rate specification (number 8) to read: 3 x .000000001 per day
(0.003 Hz/day) after warmup (seven days of continuous operation or 72 hours of continuous operation after an off time of less than 72 hours).
(2)
(a)
Delete all references to Rack
Mounting Kit.
(3)
Page 1-4, Paragraph 1-30: Add: "A Rack
Mounting Kit is available to install the instrument in a 19-inch rack. Rack
Mounting Kits may be obtained through your nearest Hewlett-Packard Office by ordering HP Part Number 5060-8739."
(4)
Page 3-6, Figure 3-3: Add the following at
the end of step O: "Return analyzer SCAN
WIDTH to PER DIVISION."
(4.1)
(a)
Change Spectrum Analyzer SCAN
WIDTH (step 1) to ZERO.
(b)
Delete SCAN WIDTH PER
DIVISION...5 kHz under Spectrum
Analyzer in step 1.
(4.2)
Page 4-3, Figure 4-2: Reverse the symbol
for the 100 µF capacitor in the Low Pass
Filter Detail. Show positive side (+) connected to ground and curved plate connected to VERT OUT line.
(5)
(a)
Change third item under
EQUIPMENT to "RF Amplifier (20 dB gain, 30 MHz)."
(b)
Add the following under step I of
PROCEDURE, Tracking
Generator/Counter: FUNCTION
TRACK ANALYZER
(6)
(a)
Change RF Amplifier setting to
"Power ON 20 dB gain."
(b)
Change first sentence in step 4 of
PROCEDURE to read: "Use the Model 8552 LOG REF
LEVEL vernier control to set the digital voltmeter reading to 300 mV.
(c)
Change first sentence in step 6 of
PROCEDURE to read: "If necessary, reset the Model
8552 LOG REF LEVEL vernier control to obtain a reading of 300 mV on the digital voltmeter."
(d)
Change Spectrum Analyzer
BANDWIDTH to 100 Hz in step 1 of PROCEDURE.
(e)
Change test limits of DVM reading in steps 5, 6, and 7 of PROCEDURE (ten places in step 7) to 294 mV 307 mV.
(a)
Change last sentence in step 8 of
PROCEDURE to read: "Adjust the Model 8552 LOG REF
LEVEL vernier control to obtain a reading of 300 mV on the digital voltmeter."
(b)
Change test limits of DVM reading in steps 9 and 10 of PROCEDURE to 296 mV 304 mV.
(8)
Page 4-6, Paragraph 4-12: Change
MARKER POSITION in step 1 of
PROCEDURE to "Full CW."
(9)
Page 4-7, Paragraph 4-12: Change step 4
of PROCEDURE to read: "Set analyzer to
SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION at 10 MHz and tune the analyzer to approximately 50
MHz. If SCANNING light is on, press the
SINGLE scan button on the analyzer. Set the 8443A MODE switch to SCAN HOLD and carefully tune the analyzer to indicate a 100 kHz readout on the Model 8443A.
Make sure you have set the frequency to the positive side of zero frequency and not to negative 100 kHz. (On the 8443B, use..."
(9.1)
Page 4-7, Paragraph 4-13: Change
information in parentheses at end of
DESCRIPTION to: (Rs by Zo if Rs is greater than Zo.)
(9.2)
Page 4-8, Paragraph 4-13: Change
information in parentheses for step 5 of
PROCEDURE to read: (Rs/Zo if Rs is greater than Zo.)
(10)
Page 4-9, Paragraph 4-15: Add the
following between the first and second sentences of the PROCEDURE: "The rear-panel UNBLANKED/BLANKED switch should be in the BLANKED position."
(11)
Page 6-1, Paragraph 6-2: Delete entire
paragraph.
(12)
Page 6-1, Table 6-1: Delete entire table.
(13)
(a) Delete third A1, HP Part Number
0844360101, REBUILT 08443-60071.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
(b)
Add A1MP14, HP Part Number
0460-0198, TAPE: CORK.
(c)
Add A4W1, HP Part Number 08443-
60067, Check Digit 2, CABLE +24V OSC PWR
WHTBLK.
(14)
(a)
Delete third A2, HP Part Number
0844360102, REBUILT 08443-60001.
(b)
Delete third A3, 08443-60103,
REBUILT 08443-60002.
(c)
Delete third A5, 08443-60104,
REBUILT 08443-60048.
(d)
Change first A2 to HP Part Number
50867358, Check Digit 2.
(e)
Change first A3 to HP Part Number
50867357, Check Digit 1.
(15)
(a)
Change first ASU3 to A5U3A.
(b)
Change second A5U3 to ASU3B.
(c)
Change first A5U5 to A5U5A.
(d)
Change second A5U5 to A5U5B.
(e)
Delete third A6, HP Part Number
0855460105, REBUILT 08443-60047.
(16)
(a)
Delete third A7, HP Part Number
0844360106, REBUILT 08443-60046.
(b)
Change A7CR6 to HP Part Number
19010743, DIODE-PWR RECT 400V 750 MA DO41.
(17)
(a)
Change A8A1U1 to HP Part Number
50867010.
(b)
Change A8A1U1 to HP Part Number
50867099.
(c)
Delete second A8, HP Part Number
0844360107, REBUILT 08443-60045.
(d)
Delete second A9, HP Part Number
0844360108, REBUILT 08443-60044.
(17.1)
Page 6-10, Table 6-3: Change last entry
for A9A2 to HP Part Number 08443-
00068, INSULATOR: 120 MHz FILTER
(recommended replacement).
(18)
(a)
Delete second A10, HP Part
Number 0844360109, REBUILT 08443-60043.
(b)
Delete second A11, HP Part
Number 0844360110, REBUILT 08443-60842.
(19)
Page 6-12, Table 6-3: Delete second A12,
HP Part Number 0844360111, REBUILT
08443-60041.
(20)
Page 6-13, Table 6-3: Delete second A12,
HP Part Number 0844360115, REBUILT
08443-60077.
Change 1 B-2
(21)
(a)
Change A13R29 to HP Part Number
07570288, R:FXD MET FLM 9.09K OHM 1% 1/8W.
(b)
Change A13R30 and A13R31 to HP
Part Number 0757-0280, R:FXD MET FLM 1K OHM 1%
1/8W.
(c)
Change A13R32 to HP Part Number
07570440, R:FXD MET FLM 7.50K OHM 1% 1/8W.
(d)
Change A13R33 to HP Part Number
07570401, R:FXD MET FLM 100 OHM 1% 1/8W.
(e)
Change A13R34 to HP Part Number
07570279, R:FXD MET FLM 3.16K OHM 1% 1/8W.
(f)
Delete second A14, HP Part
Number 0844360113, REBUILT 08443-60015.
(22)
(a)
Change A14R8 to HP Part Number
07570420, R:FXD MET FLM 750 OHM 1% 1/8W.
(b)
Change A14R11 to HP Part Number
06835115, R:FXD COMP 510 OHM 5% 1/4W.
(c)
Change A14R12 to HP Part Number
07570288, R:FXD MET FLM 9.09K OHM 1% 1/8W.
(23)
(a)
Delete second A15, HP Part
Number 0844360114, REBUILT 08443-60014.
(b)
Change A15CR1 thru CR4, CR9 and CR10 to HP Part Number 1901-0743, DIODE-PWR
RECT 400V 750 MA DO-41.
(24)
(a)
Add F1, HP Part Number 2110-
0002, FUSE, CARTRIDGE 2A 3AG.
(b)
Add E1, HP Part Number 0340-
0140, INSULATOR TO-66 (FOR XSTR Q5).
change description to NOT ASSIGNED.
(b)
Add "(8443A only)" after description for Q2.
(25)
(a)
Delete MP50 HP Part Number and
(c)
Delete second Q4 (entire line).
(25.1)
(a)
Add to WS, HP Part Number 08443-
60009: HP Part Number 5031-0906, SLEEVE, RF PIN
POSITIONING.
(b)
Delete HP Part Number 1400-0084 for fuseholder XF1 and add the following parts:
HP Part Number 2110-0564, BODY,
HIGH PROFILE.
HP Part Number 2110-0565,
CARRIER.
HP Part Number 2110-0569, NUT,
HEX-PLASTIC.
(25.2)
Page 6-20, Table 6-3: Delete the following
items (entire line): First No. 4, first No. 5, first No. 6, first No. 11, first No. 12, second
No. 12, first No. 13, first No. 14, first No.
15, No. 16, and first No. 17.
(26)
Page 8-13, Figure 8-9: Change bottom "Q"
of JK Flip Flop to "O".
Change 1 B-3
located between A13TP4 and junction of A13R15 and A
13T2 center tap.
(b)
Add CR1 to 8.25V breakdown diode on A11.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
(27)
(a)
Add R14 464 ohms to resistor
(28)
(a)
Change A8A1U1 to HP Part Number
50867010.
(b)
Change A8A1U2 to HP Part Number
50867099.
(29)
(a)
Change chassis-mounted Q2
(between Q5 and Q1) to Q3.
(b)
Change A14R47 to 2.7 ohms.
(c)
Change A14R12 (bottom of A14 schematic) to 9.09K.
(30)
(a)
Change C19 in upper left corner to
C14.
(b)
Change CR3 between R16 and C18 to CR13.
(c)
Change R29 located directly below
CR12 to C29.
(31)
(a)
Change +20V to +24V on A16S1
(A18XA6 pin F).
(b)
Change A6U3 bottom pin 11 (Vcc1) to pin 1.
(d)
Change C29 to R25.
(e)
Change R25 to C25.
(32)
(a)
Change A18R6 to 360 ohms.
(b)
Change A18R7 to 200 ohms.
(c)
Change the statement "TO
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR" to read "TO CRYSTAL
OSCILLATOR VIA +24V OSCILLATOR POWER CABLE
A4W1."
c.
Change 1.
(1)
Page 6-14, Table 6-3: Change A14C5 to
HP Part Number 0180-1745, C:FXD
ELECT 1.5UF 10% 20 VDCW.
(2)
Page 8-31, Figure 8-30 (Service Sheet 4):
Change A14C5 to 1.5 lF.
d
. Change 2.
(1)
Page 6-5, Table 6-3: Change A5R14 to
HP Part Number 0698-0083, R:FXD MET
FLM 1.96K OHM 1% 1/8W.
(2)
(a)
Change A11R19 and A11R21 to HP
Part Number 0698-3438, R:FXD MET FLM 147 OHM 1%
1/8W.
(b)
Change A1 1R20 to HP Part
Number 06983435, R:FXD MET FLM 38.3 OHM 1%
1/8W.
(3)
Page 8-27, Figure 8-23 (Service Sheet 2):
(a)
Change A11R19 and A11R21 to 147 ohms.
(b)
Change A11R20 to 38.3 ohms.
(4)
Page 8-37, Figure 8-35 (Service Sheet 7):
Change A5R14 to 1960 ohms.
e.
Change 3.
(1)
Page 6-5, Table 6-3: Change A5U3A,
ASU3B, ASU4, A5U5A, and A5U5B to HP
Part Number 1820-0413.
(2)
Page 8-37, Figure 8-35: Change A5U3A,
A5U3B, A5U4, A5U5A, and A5U5B to HP
Part Number 1820-0413.
f
. Change 4.
(1)
(a)
Change MP24 to HP Part Number
0844300061.
(b)
Change MP25 to HP Part Number
0844300062.
(c)
Change MP26 to HP Part Number
0844300063.
g.
Change 5.
(1)
(a)
Change A2W1 to HP Part Number
0035560005.
(b)
Change A3W1 to HP Part Number
0035560004.
(c)
Change A3W2 to HP Part Number
0035560006.
h.
Change 6.
(1)
Page 6-3, Table 6-3: Add A1E1, HP Part
Number 08443-00069, INSULATOR
FREQ COUNTER.
j.
Change 7.
(1)
Page 6-4, Table 6-3: Change A5CS to HP
Part Number 0160-0174, C:FXD CER
.47UF +80-20% 25VDC.
(2)
(a)
Add A5CR5, HP Part Number 1901-
0535, DIODE-SCHOTTKY.
(b)
Add A5E1, HP Part Number 8159-
0005, JUMPER (REPLACES A5L5).
(c)
Delete A5L5 (entire line).
(d)
Change A5Q1, A5Q2, and A5Q3 to
HP Part Number 1854-0404 TSTR:SI NPN TO-18 PD
360MW.
(e)
Change A5R4 to A5R4*, HP Part
Number 0757-0316, R:FXD MET FLM 42.2 OHM 1%
1/8W FACTORY SELECTED PART.
(f)
Change A5R14 to A5R14*, HP Part
Number 0757-0420, R:FXD MET FLM 750 OHM 1%
1/8W FACTORY SELECTED PART.
(3)
Page 8-37, Figure 8-35 (Service Sheet 7):
(a)
Delete L5 (bottom left-hand side of schematic) and show as jumper E1.
Change 1 B-4
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
(b)
Change value of C5 to .47 µF.
(c)
Change A5R4 to A5R4* 42.2 ohms.
(d)
Change A5R14 to A5R14* 750 ohms.
(e)
Change A5Q1, A5Q2, and A5Q3 to
HP Part Number 1854-0404.
(f)
Add Schottky diode from base to collector of A5Q3 as shown below in the partial schematic.
P/O Figure 8-35. Time Base Circuit, Schematic
Diagram (CHANGE 7) k.
Change 8.
(1)
Page 6-17, Table 6-3: Change A19 to HP
Part Number 08443-60089
(2)
(a)
Change information at A18XAS-2
(left-hand edge of AS schematic) to read: TO A19JI-23 L
PRINT.
(b)
Change connector information at
A18XA5-1 (right-hand edge of AS schematic) to
A19J148.
(3)
(a)
Change HP Part Number of BCD
Board A19 in table heading to 08443-60089.
(b)
Change "Inhibit" to L Print in Signal column.
(c)
Change Digital Output Connector
Pin No. (A19) for L Print from 22 to 23.
l.
Change 9.
(1)
Pages 6-3 and 6-4, Table 6-3: Replace
entire A1 listing (from Al thru A1A2R27) with new A1 Low Frequency Counter
Assembly list (CHANGE 9) included in this
appendix on pages B-7 and B-8.
(2)
Page 6-4, Table 6-3: Change A5C10 to
A5C10* HP Part Number 0160-3456,
Check Digit 6, C:FXD 1000pF 1000V CER
FACTORY SELECTED PART.
(3)
Page 6-9, Table 6-3: Change A7R43 to
HP Part Number 0757-0317, Check Digit
7, R:FXD 1.33K OHM 1% .125W.
(4)
Page 8-20, Figure 8-17, Sheet 1 of 2:
Delete Sheet 1 (Counter Troubleshooting
(5)
Page 8-32, SERVICE SHEET 5, General:
(a)
Change the seventh and eighth paragraphs under "General" to read as follows: "The counter signal input is gated to the high frequency decade by the main gate flip-flop, which is toggled by the decade divider circuits in Time Base Assembly A5.
Besides dividing the input frequency by 10, High
Frequency Decade Board A6 provides BCD information
(A, B, C, D) to Low Frequency Counter Board A1A1.
Low Frequency Counter Board A1A1 uses the BCD inputs (A, B, C, D) to drive its timer and BCD driver circuit. The D Signal input also drives the prescaler, which develops four additional BCD inputs for the timer and BCD driver. The signals derived from the eight level
BCD light segments in the numerical display IC’s on
Counter Display Board A1A2, and are supplied to Digital
Output Assembly A19 on the rear of the 8443A."
(6)
Page 8-32, SERVICE SHEET 5, Time
Base Assembly A5: Change description starting with line 9 of paragraph 12 to "...
150 µsec one-shot which drives TP10 high and TP3 low to start the transfer pulse.
The transfer input starts the transfer of information from the low frequency counter board to the counter display board
(A1A2). It also initiates the transfer of digital information from the Low Frequency
Counter Board (A1A1) to the Digital
Output Assembly (A19) on the 8443A rear panel."
(7)
Page 8-32, SERVICE SHEET 5, High
Frequency Decade A6: Delete the fourth paragraph under "High Frequency Decade
A6."
(8)
Page 8-32, SERVICE SHEET 5, Low
Frequency Counter A1: Delete all text pertaining to Low Frequency Counter A1 and insert new text, SERVICE SHEET 5
(CHANGE 9) Low Frequency Counter
A1A1 and Counter Display A1A2, included
in this appendix on pages B-9 and B-10.
(9)
Page 8-33, Figure 8-31: Change Low
Frequency Counter portion of Counter
Section Logic Diagram as shown in partial
P/O Fig 8-31, Low Frequency Counter
portion of Logic Diagram (CHANGE 9),
included in this appendix on page B-10.
(10)
(a)
Change R8 (in collector circuit of
Q5B) so that its top end connects to cathode of CR4 instead of to +20VF.
Change 1 B-5
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
(b)
Change emitter of Q16 so that it connects to switched ground, same as Q17, instead of to circuit board ground.
(c)
Change value of R43 to 1.33K
ohms.
(11)
Page 8-37, Figure 8-35: Change value of
capacitor C10 to 1000pF and place an asterisk (*) next to it to indicate it is a factory selected part.
(12)
Page 8-38, "Reset Translator and Divide-
By-Ten Decade": Change third paragraph to read: "The decade dividers convert the
100KHz to 110MHz input frequency to an output frequency of 10KHz to 11MHz. The
A, B, C, and D outputs are fed to the Low
Frequency Counter."
(13)
Page 8-40, SERVICE SHEET 9: Delete all text and the waveforms shown on page 8-
40, and replace them with the new
SERVICE SHEET (CHANGE 9) text
included in this appendix on pages B-11
(14)
Page 8-40, Figure 8-38: Replace Figure 8-
38 with the new parts locations diagrams,
Figures 8-38A, 8-38B, and 8-38C
(CHANGE 9) included in this appendix on
(15)
Page 8-41, Figure 8-39: Replace Figure 8-39/
with the new Figure 8-39 (CHANGE 9)
included in this appendix on pages 8-35
(16)
Pages 8-42 and 8-43, SERVICE SHEET
10:
(a)
Delete text and Table 8-8 on page 8-
(b)
Delete Figures 8-40, 8-41, and 8-42 on page 8-43.
m.
Change 10.
(1)
Pages 6-5 thru 6-7, Table 6-3: Replace
entire A6 listing (from A6 thru A6W1) with new A6 High Frequency Decade Assembly list (CHANGE 10) included in this
appendix on pages B-19 and B-20.
(2)
Page 8-33, Figure 8-31: Change High
Frequency Decade A6 section of Counter
Logic Diagram as shown in the partial
logic diagram P/O Figure 8-31 (CHANGE
10) included in this appendix on page B-
(3)
Page 8-38, SERVICE SHEET 8: Replace
all text and waveforms shown in page 838,
SERVICE SHEET 8, with the new
SERVICE SHEET 8 (CHANGE 10) text and waveform illustrations included in this
appendix on pages B-22 thru B-26.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
(4)
Page 8-39, Figure 8-36: Replace Figure 8-
36 with new parts location diagram, Figure
8-36 (CHANGE 10) included in this
(5)
Page 8-39, Figure 8-37: Replace Figure 8-
37 with new High Frequency Decade
Assembly Schematic Diagram, Figure 837
(CHANGE 10) included in this appendix on
n.
Change 11.
(1)
(a)
Change A6R13 to HP Part Number
06980083, Check Digit 8, R:FXD MET FLM 1.96K
OHMS 1% 1/8W.
(b)
Change A6R14 to HP Part Number
06980085, Check Digit 0, R:FXD MET FLM 2.61K
OHMS 1% 1/8W.
(c)
Change A6R18 to HP Part Number
07570416, Check Digit 7, R:FXD MET FLM 511 OHMS
1% 1/8W.
(d)
Change A6R25 to HP Part Number
06980082, Check Digit 7, R:FXD MET FLM 464 OHMS
1% 1/8W.
(e)
Change A6R33 to HP Part Number
06987240, Check Digit 3, R:FXD MET FLM 1.47K
OHMS 1% 1/20W.
p.
Change 12.
(1)
Page 6-16, Table 6-3: Replace entire A15
listing (from A15 thru A15XF5) with new
A15 Rectifier Assembly list (CHANGE 12)
included in this appendix on page B-28.
(2)
Page 6-17, Table 6-3: Delete A18C4 and
A18R1.
(3)
Page 6-18, Table 6-3: Delete Q5.
Change 1 B-6
(4)
Page 8-30, Service SHEET 4: Replace all
text following "Rectifier Assembly A15" with new SERVICE SHEET 4 (CHANGE
12) text included in this appendix on page
(5)
Page 8-31, Figure 8-29: Replace Figure
8-29 (A15 Rectifier Assembly) component location with new Figure 8-29 (CHANGE
12) included in this appendix on page 8-30.
(6)
Page 8-31, Figure 8-30: Replace Figure
8-30 (Power Supplies and Regulators
Schematic Diagram) with new Figure 8-30
(CHANGE 12) included in this appendix on page B-41.
(7)
Page 8-44, Figure 8-43: Delete C4, Q5,
and R1 from Motherboard Assembly A18 portion of wiring diagram.
q.
Change 13.
(1)
Pages 6-4 and 6-5, Table 6-3: Replace
entire A5 listing (from A5 thru A5W1) with new A5 Time Base Assembly list
(CHANGE 13) included in this appendix on page B-31.
(2)
Page 8-37, Figure 8-34: Replace Figure
Component location with new Figure 8-34
(CHANGE 13) included in this appendix on
(3)
Page 8-37, Figure 8-35: Replace Figure
8-35 (A5 Time Base Assembly Schematic
Diagram) with new Figure 8-35 (CHANGE
13) included in this appendix on page 8-43.
HP Part
Number
1854-0477
1853-0281
0757-0465
0757-0465
0757-0465
0757-0465
0757-0465
0683-1555
0757-0420
0757-0420
0698-3132
0698-3132
0698-0085
0698-3153
0757-0280
0360-0124
0360-0124
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1853-0281
18S3-0281
1853-0281
1853-0281
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
0360-0124
0360-0124
1810-0422
1810-0037
1820-1442
1820-1644
1820-1197
0160-0575
1901-0535
1901-0535
1901-0743
9100-1616
9100-1618
9100-1616
9100-1621
1853-0281
1853-0281
1853-0281
1853.0281
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
1854-0477
08443-60117
08443-60090
0160--4084
0180-2215
0160-4084
0160-4084
0160-0127
0160-3879
0180-0197
0160-3875
0160-3875
0160-4084
0160-4084
0160-4084
Reference
Designation
A1A1Q27
A1A1Q28
A1A1R1
A1A1R2
A1A1R3
A1A1R4
A1A1R5
A1A1R6
A1A1R7
A1A1R8
A1A1R9
A1A1R10
A1A1R11
A1A1R12
A1A1R13
A1A1TP1
A1A1TP2
A1A1Q9
A1A1Q10
A1A1Q11
A1A1Q12
A1A1Q13
A1A1Q14
A1A1Q15
A1A1Q16
A1A1Q17
A1A1Q18
A1A1Q19
A1A1Q20
A1A1Q21
A1A1Q22
A1A1Q23
A1A1Q25
A1A1Q26
A1A1TP3
A1A1TP4
A1A1U1
A1A1U2
A1A1U3
A1A1U4
A1A1U5
A1A1C13
A1A1CH1
A1A1CH2
A1A1CH3
A1A1L1
A1A1L2
A1A1L3
A1A1L4
A1A1Q1
A1A1Q2
A1A1Q3
A1A1Q4
A1A1Q5
A1A1Q6
A1A1Q7
A1A1Q8
A1
A1A1
A1A1C1
A1A1C2
A1A1C3
A1A1C4
A1A1C5
A1A1C6
A1A1C7
A1A1C8
A1A1C9
A1A1C10
A1A1C11
A1A1C12
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (CHANGE 9)
C
D Qty
9
3
3
3
4
9
3
3
0
9
0
9
9
6
9
7
9
7
1
9
0
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
9
7
9
9
7
7
7
7
9
7
7
7
7
9
9
9
9
9
6
9
1
9
1
4
9
8
8
3
8
7
8
8
2
3
3
5
8
1
8
1
1
6
1
20
2
1
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
1
9
1
2
1
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
Description
LOW FREQUENCY COUNTER ASSEMBLY
LOW FREQUENCY COUNTER BOARD ASSEMBLY
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 170UF+75-10% 15VDC AL
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1 UF *-20% 20VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF.+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 22PF+-5% 200VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD 22PF +-5% 200VDC CER 0+-30
CAPACITOR-FXD 01UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .1UF +-20% 50VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .047UF +-20% 50 VDC CER
DIODE.SCHOTTKY
DIODE.SCHOTTKY
DIODE.SCHOTTKY 1N404 400v 1A DO-41
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 1.5UH 10%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 5.6UH 10%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 1.5UH 10%
INDUCTOR RF.-CH-MLD 18UH 10% .166DX.385LD
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO.18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD=500MW
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N2907A SI TO-18 PD=400MW
RESISTOR 100K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 237 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 237 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 237 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR1.5M 5% .25W F TC=900/+1000
RESISTOR 750 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 750 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 261 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 3.83K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.61K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 3.83K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN .04-IN-BSC-SZ RND
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN .04-IN-BSC-SZ RND
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN .04-IN-BSC-SZ RND
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN .04-IN-BSC-SZ RND
NETWORK-RES 10-SIP10.0 OHM X 9
NETWORK-RES 16-DIP1.0K OHM X 8
IC CNTR TTL LS DECO ASYNCHRO
IC DCDR TTL LS BCD-TO-7.SEG .4-TO-7-LINE
IC GATE TTL LS NAND QUAD 2-INP
Change 1 B-7
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Mfr
Code Mfr Part Number
04713
071t3
24546
24546
24S46
24546
24546
01111
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
28480
28480
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
28480
28480
01121
11236
01295
01295
01295
28480
28480
28480
01295
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
04713
0713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
56289
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2907A
2N2907A
2N2907A
2N2907A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2907A
C4-1/8-TO-1003-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-237R-F
C4-1/8-TO-237R-F
C4-1/8-TO-237R-F
CS1555
C4-1/8-TO-750R-F
C4-1/8-TO-750R-F
C4-1/8-TO-261R-F
C4-1/8.TO-3831-F
C4-1/8.TO-2611-F
C4-1/8.TO-3831-F
C4-1/8.TO-1001-F
0360-0124
0360-0124
0360-0124
0360-0124
210A100
761-3-R1K
SN74LS290N
SN74LS248N
SN74LS00N
0160-0575
1901-0535
1901-0535
1N4004
9100-1616
9100-1618
9100-1016
9100-1621
2N2907A
2N2907A
2N2907A
2N2907A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
2N2222A
08443-60117
08443-0090
0160-4084
30D177G015DD2
0160-4084
0160-4084
0160-0127
0160-3879
150D225X9020A2
0160-3875
0160-3875
0160-4084
0160-4084
0160-4084
A1A3
A1A3C1
A1A3CR1
A1A3CR2
A1A3MP1
A1A3MP2
A1A3Q1
A1A3Q2
A1A3R1
A1A3R2
A1A3R3
A1A3R4
A1A3R5
A1A3R6
A1A3R7
A1A3TP1
A1A3TP2
A1A3TP3
A1A3TP4
A1A3U1
A1A33VR1
A1A33VR1
Reference
Designation
A1A1U6
A1A1U7
A1A1U8
A1A1U9
A1A1U10
A1A1U11
A1A1XA2
A1A1XU7
A1A1XU9
A1A1XU10
A1A2
A1A2DS1
A1A2DS2
A1A2DS3
A1A2DS4
A1A2DS5
A1A2DS6
A1A2DS7
A1A2DS8
HP Part
Number
1820-1216
1820-2271
1820-2102
1820-80002
1820-0735
1820-2177
1251-2035
1200-0694
1200-0565
1200-0694
08443-60091
1990-0725
1990-0725
1990-0725
1990-0725
1990-0725
1990-0725
1990-0725
1990-0725
A1MP1
A1W1
A1W2
4040-0749
4040-0749
1480-0059
08443-60095
0180-2620
1901-0050
1901-0535
0380-0885
0380-0885
1853-0213
1854-0477
0757-1000
0757-1094
0698-3439
0757-0405
0757-0442
0757-0442
0698-3454
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1826-0161
1902-0126
1251-1887
08443-00072
08443-60064
8150-0453
08443-00044
0460-0079
2200-0103
2360-0121
3050-0010
08443-40009
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (CHANGE 9)
3
9
9
9
4
2
0
2
2
9
9
4
4
7
7
5
7
9
9
5
6
3
8
6
4
7
6
7
0
7
0
0
3
0
6
6
2
6
5
9
7
9
5
3
7
4
2
8
6
6
6
6
6
C
D Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
2
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
6
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
Description
IC DCDR TTL LS 3-TO-8-LINE 3-1NP
IC MlCPROC NMOS 8-B1T
IC LCN TTL LS D-TYPE OCTL
IC-PROGRAMMED ROM
IC 2K RAM 400-NS
IC MICPROC-ACCESS NMOS 4-BIT
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 15-CONT/ROW 2-ROWS
SOCKET-IC 40.CONT DIP DIP-SLDR
SOCKET-IC 24-CONT DIP-SLDR
SOCKET-IC 40-CONT DIP DIP-SLDR
COUNTER DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
DISPLAY-NUM-SEG 1-CHAR .43-H YEL
COUNTER DISPLAY MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
EXTR.PC BD BRN POLYC .062.BD.THKN8
EXTR.PC BD BRN POLYC .062.BD.THKN8
PIN ROLL .062-.IN-DIA .25-IN-LG STL
+6V SWITCHED BOARD ASSEMBLY
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF+-10% 50VDC TA
DIODE-SWITCHING 80V 200 MA 2NS D0-35
DIODE-SCHOTTKY
STANDOFF-RVT-ON .156-IN-LG 4-40THD
STANDOFF-RVT-ON .156-IN-LG 4-40THD
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N4236 SI TO-5 PD=1W
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N2222A SI TO-18 PD-500MW
RESISTOR 51.1 1% .5F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.47K 1% .125F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 178 1% .125F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 162 1% .125F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 215K 1% .125F TC=0+-100
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-BSC SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-BSC SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-BSC SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-BSC SZ SQ
IC OP AMP GP QUAD 14-DIP-P
DIODE-ZNP 2.61V 5% 00-7 PD=.4W TC=.072%
CONNECTOR-PC EDGE 22.CONT/ROW 2.ROWS
MISC. MECHANICAL & ATTACHING PARTS
LF COUNTER ENCLOSURE
CABLE ASSEMBLY HF DECADE D OUTPUT
WIRE-24AWG, HF DECADE D INPUT, 0.1FT.
GUIDE +-6v SWITCH B0ARD ASSEMBLY
BUSHING: RUBBER, ADHESIVE, 0.2 FT
SCREW-MACH 4-40 .25-IN-LG PAN.-HD-POZI
SCREW-MACH 6-52 .5-IN-LG PAN-HD-POZI
WASHER-FL MTLC NO. 6 .147-IN-lD
WINDOW, COUNTER DISPLAY, YELLOW
Change 1 B-8
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Mfr
Code Mfr Part Number
01295
34649
01295
28480
34649
34649
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28a80
28480
28480
28480
SN74LS138N
D8039
SN74LS373N
08443-80002
P8155
P8243
1251-2035
1200-0694
1200-0565
1200-0694
08443.60091
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4130
HDSP-4130
28480
28480
28480
28480
25088
28480
28480
00000
00000
04713
04713
28480
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
28480
28480
4040-0749
4040-0750
1480-0059
08443-60095
D2R2GS1B50K
1901-0050
1901-0535
ORDER By DESCRIPTION
ORDER By DESCRIPTION
2N4236
2N2222A
0757-1000
C4-1/8-TO-1471-F
C4-1/8-TO-178R-F
C4-1/8-TO-162R-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-2153-F
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
SN74LS138N
1902-0126
1251-1887
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
00000
28480
28480
08443-00072
08443-60064
8150-0453
08443-60064
8150-0453
ORDER BY DESCRlPTION
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
3050-0010
08443-40009
SERVICE SHEET 5 (CHANGE 9)
Low Frequency Counter A1A1 and Counter Display
A1A2 (Service Sheet 9)
The Low Frequency Counter develops two kinds of outputs using the inputs it receives from High Frequency
Decade Assembly A6 and Time Base Assembly A5.
Twenty-nine digital outputs make up the first group.
These are supplied to Digital Output Assembly A19 on the 8443A rear panel for use in external equipment. The second group of outputs drives the numeric display ICs on Counter Display Assembly A1A2, which plugs into a socket on the Low Frequency Counter Board Assembly.
The functions of the inputs to the Low Frequency
Counter are described below:
Transfer. The Transfer input is a negative-going pulse which interrupts the central processing unit (CPU) in microcomputer U7’s microprocessor. This interruption permits the transfer of readout data from U7 to the readout decoders (U4 and U6), and digital data to rearpanel connector assembly A19. During the "write" portion of the CPU cycle, a negative-going WR (activelow write) input to transfer flip-flop U5A-U5B resets the interrupt function.
Resolution Control. There are three resolution inputs.
In a standard 8443A they are 1000 Hz, 100 Hz, and 10
Hz. If, however, the 8443A has been modified to equip it with the 1 Hz resolution option, the resolution inputs are
100 Hz, 10 Hz, and 1 Hz. Notice that the 1 Hz resolution option deletes the 1000 Hz resolution selection available in the standard instrument.
These inputs determine the placement of the decimal point in the numerical display (display indicates frequency in MHz). If the front-panel RESOLUTION switch is set to 1000 Hz, the 1000 Hz line is grounded and the other two resolution input lines (100 Hz and 10
Hz) are open. In the display, the decimal point appears five places to the right of the far left numeral (e.g.,
00105.555). Similarly, if 100 Hz or 10 Hz resolution is selected, the 100 Hz or 10 Hz line is grounded and the other two lines are open. For 100 Hz resolution the decimal point appears four places to the right of the far left numeral (e.g., 0105.5555), and for 10 Hz resolution it is three places to the right (e.g., 105.55555). The optional 1 Hz resolution sets the decimal point two places to the right of the far left numeral and is usable for frequency counts up to 99.999999 MHz.
Blanked/Unblanked. When the blanking selector switch on the 8443A rear panel is set to UNBLANKED, all eight of the numeric display ICs light, with those to the left of the most significant digit showing a zero.
If the blanking selector switch is set to BLANKED, numeric display ICs to the left of the most significant
Change 1 B-9
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
digit, or to the left of the decimal point if it precedes the most significant digit, are blanked. Thus, if the display in the UNBLANKED mode shows 00105.555 MHz, setting the blanking switch to BLANKED changes the display to
105.555 MHz. An unblanked display of 00000.500 MHz, if blanked, changes to .500 MHz.
Reset. The Reset input is a positive-going pulse approximately 50 microseconds wide that sets the counter to zero and holds it there for its 50-microsecond duration. At the end of the Reset pulse a new sampling of the input frequency is taken and the counter develops a new readout display.
A
,
B
,
C
,.
D
. Inputs
A
,
B
,
C
, and
D
make up a 1-
2-4-8 BCD input to Timer and BCD Driver circuit U10-
U11.
The BCD represents the counter input frequency divided by 10. The D input is also fed to the Prescaler where it is transformed into four more BCD levels: 16, 32, 64, and
128, which are also fed to the Timer and BCD Driver
(U10-U11). In the Timer and BCD Driver ICs, the eightlevel BCD and the inputs from the microcomputer (U7) are translated into two groups of signals: the first group comprises 29 digital signals which are fed to rear-panel connector assembly A19. The second group consists of eight address signals which are fed via the counter address bus to microcomputer IC U7.
In U7 the signals received from the Timer and BCD
Driver via the address bus are converted into two groups of BCD. The first group is a four-level BCD which is translated in the LED Segment Driver circuit into seven lines, each for a particular numerical display IC segment.
These lines are connected in parallel to all eight of the numerical display ICs on the Counter Display Assembly
(A1A2).
The second group is a three-level BCD which is converted into eight numerical display IC turn-on outputs.
Each of these outputs is fed, one at a time, to a particular one of the eight numerical display ICs on the Counter
Display Assembly. Their purpose is to turn the numerical display ICs on and off sequentially so that only one of the eight is on at a time. Thus, although the segment drives are applied simultaneously to all eight numerical display
ICs, only one IC actually displays a numeral in a given instant.
For example, if the input to the counter is a frequency of
105.72348 MHz, the segments drive for a "1" is received at the eight display ICs at the same time as the turn-on signal for the far left IC. This causes the "1" to appear on the far left IC only. The next numeral generated by the BCD-to-7 Segment Decoder is the "0", and this output to
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SERVICE SHEET 5 (CHANGE 9) (Cont’d)
the display ICs coincides with the enable signal to the second display IC. The second IC, therefore, displays an
"0", and the seven other display ICs are blanked.
This sequence continues until the entire eight-digit number has been displayed. Then, following a brief delay (equal to the "on" period of one numerical display), the cycle starts over again. Although each display IC is turned on for only an instant during a single readout cycle, the sequencing occurs so fast that all eight display ICs appear to be on simultaneously.
P/O Figure 8-31. Counter Section Logic Diagram (Low Frequency Counter Portion) (CHANGE 9)
Change 1 B-10
SERVICE SHEET 9 (CHANGE 9)
A malfunction in the Low Frequency Counter is normally brought to the attention of the operator by some abnormal behavior of the counter display or the digital output to external equipment. The nature of the abnormality usually indicates a possible source or sources of the failure; and in some events, it may point out the failed component. In all events, to successfully troubleshoot the Counter, you must be familiar with the
Counter circuits and with digital troubleshooting techniques.
Equipment Required
Dual-Channel Oscilloscope
Digital Voltmeter
10:1 Oscilloscope Probes (2)
General
The complete Low Frequency Counter Assembly (A1) comprises three plug-in board assemblies surrounded by an aluminum shield. The board assemblies are:
Low Frequency Counter Board Assembly A1A1
Counter Display Board Assembly A1A2
+ 6V Switch Board Assembly A1A3
Counter Display Board Assembly A1A2 contains eight seven-segment digital display ICs. It plugs into a pc board edge connector on the front edge of the horizontally-mounted Low Frequency Counter Board
Assembly A1A1. The Low Frequency Counter Board
Assembly contains the electronic circuits that drive the counter digital display ICs, and which supply digital signals to the 8443A rear panel DIGITAL OUTPUT connector. It plugs into a pc board edge connector receptacle on + 6V Switch Board Assembly A1A3.
Board Assembly A1A3 plugs into a pc board edge connector receptacle on the 8443A Motherboard
Assembly (A18). Its purpose is to provide interconnections between the Low Frequency Counter
Board Assembly and the Motherboard. It also contains a
+6V switching circuit. When the ac line POWER is switched on at the 8443A front panel, the +6V switching circuit delays the dc power input (+5.5V nominal) to the counter circuits until the dc power input to the switching circuits stabilizes.
For Counter troubleshooting, the A1A3 board, with the
A1A1 board plugged into it, and with A1A2 plugged into
A1 A1, is extended above the Motherboard on an extender board (included in the Service Kit).
Counter Circuits Operation
The Low Frequency Counter receives four BCD inputs,
A
-
B
-
C
-
D
,
corresponding to 1-2-4-8, from High
Change 1 B-11
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Frequency Decade Board Assembly A6; a reset and a transfer input from Time Base Board Assembly A5; three control inputs from the front-panel RESOLUTION switch; and a blanking input from the rear-panel BLANKED-
UNBLANKED switch. In the Low Frequency Counter circuits, these inputs are transformed into signals which light the seven-segment numeric display ICs, and into digital signals for use in external equipment.
Prescaler U3 is a divide-by-ten counter which is clocked by the active-low D (D) input. NAND gate U5D is connected as an inverter to reverse the polarity of the D input so it conforms with the active-high input requirements of U3. The four outputs of U3, corresponding to BCD 1-2-4-8, are fed to four port A inputs, PA4 through PA7, of U10 (pins 25-28). The BCD
8 (PA7) output is also fed through another NAND gateturned-inverter, U5C, to the T.I. input (pin 3) of U10.
The reset input to U3 precedes each counting period to clear U3 of any count remaining in it. If the count remaining in U3 is any digit from 0 through 7, the reset operates normally to clear it out. If, however, U3 has a remaining count of 8 or 9, the reset input, in the act of clearing U3, toggles it an additional count. If this inconsistency were not compensated for, the next counting period would produce an erroneous number.
To prevent such counting errors, the PC5 output of U10 is fed back to pin 3 of U3 at the end of each counting period to preset U3 to a count of 9. With this arrangement, the reset input always toggles U3 an additional count. Thus, the state of U3 immediately following the preset input and preceding the counting period is always the same, and the software program deletes the purposely-introduced error. For the duration of the preset (PC5) input, the U3 outputs are shut off.
In addition to the four BCD outputs of U3, which are derived from the D (MSB) input, port A of U10 receives the active-low A-B-C-D inputs at its PAO through PA3 input terminals (pins 21-24). The eight port A inputs are continually read by U10 and, subject to a "read" or "write" request from microcomputer U7, are available to the address data bus.
The input from NAND gate-inverter U5C to U10 pin 3
(T.I.) drives a 14-bit binary event counter which keeps track of the number of 8-bit counts received at port A.
This particular counting function starts on the first D input and continues through successive D inputs until the
8443A is turned off. The event counter is reset to its count-start state each time the 8443A line POWER switch is set from STBY to ON by a sharply rising output from power-up circuit Q26, Q27, and Q28.
SERVICE SHEET 9 (CHANGE 9) (Cont’d)
The event counter overflows out U10 pin 6 (T.O.) to microcomputer U7 pin 39 (T.I.) where it feeds a software overflow register. The presence of the overflow output from U10 verifies proper operation of the event counter and of prescaler U3. The U7 software keeps track of the total event count. When the transfer input is received, the U7 software reads the event count for the new readout and does the arithmetic to determine how many counts have occurred since the last readout.
I/O expander and timer U10 communicates with microcomputer U7 over the two-way multiplex address data bus in response to read (RD), write (SR), and address latch enable (ALE) commands from the microcomputer.
The transfer input to the Low Frequency Counter
Assembly is a negative-going pulse which signals the end of the counting period and the start of the "read" and display update period. It is latched low in a flip-flop made up of two cross-coupled NAND gates, U5A and U5B. At the end of the read and update period, the negativegoing write pulse (WR) from U7 resets the transfer flipflop.
The three control inputs to U7 pins 36, 37, and 38 originate at the front-panel RESOLUTION switch. The active input line is grounded through the switch; the two inactive control lines are open-circuited. Microcomputer
U7 reads these three inputs at the beginning of each readupdate period to determine which numerical display
IC requires a lighted decimal point. A fourth control input to U7 at pin 35 is unconnected unless the 1 Hz control option is built into the instrument.
Simultaneously grounding all four of the control input test points, TP1 through TP4, causes the counter to count from 00000000 through 99999999, lighting the decimal points on the even numbers, then blank the display, and finally show a four-character group on the four inner display ICs (DS3, DS4, DS5, and DS6), with the four outer ICs (DS1, DS2, DS7, and DS8) blank. This cycle continues as long as the four test points remain grounded. (The four-character display is shown below in the Low Frequency Counter Troubleshooting.)
The blanking input originates at the BLANKED/
UNBLANKED switch on the 8443A rear panel. With the switch set to BLANKED, the input is approximately +6 volts. When the switch is set to UNBLANKED, the input is an open circuit. The blanking input drives NPN transistor Q25, which inverts the input and drives pin I of microcomputer U7. By setting U7 pin 1 solidly to either
(blanked) or +5 volts (unblanked), Q25 makes sure the open-circuit input is not misinterpreted by U7. An unblanked input causes all the numeric display ICs to be
Change 1 B-12
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
lighted during the display pdate. A blanked input, however, causes all zeros preceding the most significant digit or the decimal point (whichever occurs first) to be blanked. The microcomputer reads this input during each read-update period to determine whether or not to eliminate the leading zeros.
The multiplexed address data on the address data bus is latched into address latch U8 by the ALE (address latch enable) output from U7. U8 then provides 8 lines of the
11-line address required by programmed read-only memory (PROM) U9. The three upper address lines to
U9 are from port 2 (P20, P21, P22) of U7. Shortly after the addresses are latched by U8, the address data bus clears and becomes ready to function as an input bus instead of an output bus. Next, the active-low PSEN output from U7 pin 9 is strobed low, which causes the 8bit instruction from U9 to be placed on the address data bus and fed back to U7. U7 then performs the action dictated by the i-bit instruction output of U9.
There are 29 digit outputs from the I/O expander circuits in U10 and U1 11. Thirteen of these outputs are from ports B and C of U10; the remaining sixteen are from ports 4, 5, 6, and 7 of U11. Fed to a rear-panel connector through Digital Output Assembly A19, they provide seven and one-half digits to external equipment.
The eight numeric display ICs on Counter Display
Assembly A1A2 are controlled by eight outputs from port
1 of microcomputer U7. U7 outputs P10, P11, P12, and
P13 provide a four-line BCD input to BCD-to-7-segment decoder U4. Outputs P14, P15, and P16 drive 3-to-8 decoder U6; and P17 controls the lighting of the decimal point.
BCD-to-7-segment decoder U4 translates the levels on its four inputs into seven outputs, each one driving a particular alphabetically designated segment in all eight numerical display ICs. A dual-transistor current source in each segment drive line provides the segment turn-on power (U4 outputs are open-collector with internal pull-up resistors). This portion of the display drive circuitry determines the numeral that is to be displayed.
Decoder U6 translates the levels on its three inputs into eight digit-drive signals, each on at a different time. The
"on" output turns on one of the eight display ICs, which then shows the numeral selected by the BCD-to-7segment decoder circuit. The transistors in the digit drive outputs from U6 function as digit drive current switches.
Output P17 from U7 represents the most significant bit output from U7 port 1. It is fed in parallel to the decimal point inputs of the eight display ICs. Its state, on or off, determines whether or not the "on" display IC shows a
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SERVICE SHEET 9 (CHANGE 9) (Cont’d)
decimal point. Transistors Q12 and Q24 make up a dual transistor current source for the decimal point drive.
Although there are eight numerical display ICs, and each is on for a different period, the counter is set to run as if there were nine display periods with the display blanked during the ninth.
There is also a short display blanking period that occurs with each transfer input. This allows the microcomputer to make the transfer without affecting the display.
When the 8443A line POWER switch is first on, and after a brief delay purposely introduced by the +6 volt switch circuit on board assembly A1A3, the counter automatically performs a confidence check. At the start of this check, the counter display shows all zeros, then it changes to all ones, then to all twos, and so on up through all nines. The counter does the confidence check once before displaying the frequency count.
If the confidence check repeats, it is because the software has detected an apparent error in the event count arithmetic. This sometimes happens when the event counter in U10 is not far enough along in the operation cycle to have produced an overflow output to the microcomputer when the count update begins, a condition regarded as an "underflow". Therefore, when the software overflow register in the microcomputer does the arithmetic required to determine the number of counts since the last readout, it obtains a negative number, an answer it views as an arithmetic error. It then returns the counter to its start-up condition, initiating another confidence check. Usually the period of one additional confidence check is enough to establish the event counter overflow and start normal counter operation.
+6 Volts Switch (Part of A1A3) Operation
Board assembly A1A3 serves as an interconnect device between the Low Frequency Counter and the 8443A
Motherboard Assembly. It also contains a power-up switching circuit which supplies +5.5 volts to the Low
Frequency Counter. The purpose of this power-up switch is to hold off the counter operating power until the power stabilizes and is relatively free of "switch-bounce" glitches.
When the ac line power is first turned on, the dc input to the switching circuit appears across two parallel resistive voltage dividers. Voltage divider R5-R6 applies a voltage equal to one-one-half the input level to the minus input
(pin 2) of comparator U1A and the plus input (pin 5) of comparator U1B.
At the same time, voltage divider R3-R4 applies a voltage that is just slightly more than one-half the input level, but never exceeding +2.61 volts, to the minus input
(pin 6) of U1B. Since at first (that is, until the input dc reaches about +5 volts) the minus input of U1B is more positive than its plus input, U1B produces a zero output.
As a result of this zero output from U1B, the plus input of
U1A is lower than its minus input. Thus, U1A also produces a zero output, which in turn holds Q2 off and prevents Q1 from conducting.
If, when the LINE power switch is turned on, the input dc rises cleanly to its nominal level of +6 volts, the circuit operates as follows: at an input level of approximately +5 volts, zener diode VR1 breaks down and sets the minus input of U1B at a maximum level of +2.61 volts. (At inputs less than approximately +5 volts, the input to the minus terminal of U1B is the voltage across R3.) As the input approaches +6 volts, the plus input of U1B becomes more positive than the minus input. Now, U1B produces a positive output which charges capacitor C1 across R7, developing a positive-going ramp at the plus input of U1A. As soon as the level of this ramp exceeds the level at the minus input of U1A, U1A produces a positive output which turns on Q2 and Q1. With Q1 conducting, approximately +5.5 volts is passed to the
Low Frequency Counter Board.
If, however, on initial power turn-on, the input dc fluctuates so that the output of U1B is turned on and off by polarity reverses at its inputs, C1, instead of charging, discharges through CR2 and U1B. (Remember, it requires approximately +5 volts input to hold the output of U1B above zero volts.) In this event, the plus input of
U1A remains lower than its minus input, and the resulting zero output holds off Q2 and Q1.
Once the switch is closed so that dc is supplied to the
Low Frequency Counter, the switching circuit is not affected by narrow, negative-going, widely-spaced glitches. A series of closely spaced glitches, however, may cause the switch to open until the input dc stabilizes.
Change 1 B-13
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
8443A Low Frequency Counter Troubleshooting (CHANGE 9)
Symptom
Display blanked or unintelligible
Counter display intermittently or successively repeats the start-up sequence confidence check.
NOTE
In the start-up sequence, the counter cycles all the display ICs so that the read
-out is all zeros, then all ones, then all twos, and so on up through all nines.
The counter normally goes through this time the line POWER switch is turned on, before displaying the actual frequency count.
Probable Cause
1. Failure of 3-to-8 decoder U6 (check U6 for BCD inputs and sequential outputs).
2. Failure of BCD-to-7-segment decoder U4 (check U4 for BCD inputs).
3. Failure of microcomputer U7 port 1 output circuitry (if possible, substitute another microcomputer IC for
U7).
1. Failure of the event counter in I/O expander and timer
U10. You can check this by looking at the output signal on U10 pin 6 (T.O.), the event counter overflow to U7 pin 39. The signal should be toggling at some very low frequency. In the external mode with an input frequency of 55 MHz and the RESOLUTION control set to 10 Hz, you should see approximately 25 signal excursions per second. Because of the overflow pulse timing, the excursions may appear some-
One or more display ICs fail to light.
NOTE
Make sure the unlighted display IC isn’t just being blanked to eliminate leading zeros. Check the setting of the
BLANKED/UNBLANKED switch on the 8443A rear panel.
Display shows a count of 777215 and two
2. Failure of the reset power-up circuitry (Q26, Q27,
Q28) connected to U10 pin 4.
3. Failure of prescaler IC U3.
4. Failure of gate U5D or USC.
1. Partial failure of 3-to-8 decoder U6. Check U6 for
BCD inputs and sequential outputs.
2. Failure of U7 port 1 outputs.
3. Failure of the unlighted display ICs on the Counter
Display Board Assembly, or open connections between the Display Board Assembly and the Low
Frequency Counter Board Assembly.
4. Failure of the current-source transistor(s) in the applicable digit drive output(s) from U6.
1. Failure of I/O expander and timer U10.
random numerals.
2. Failure of Reset circuit Q26, Q27, and Q28.
Change 1 B-14
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
8443 Low Frequency Counter Troubleshooting (CHANGE 9)
Symptom
.
Displayed number does not agree with actual input frequency. Digital outputs from U10 and/or U11 also erroneous
Probable Cause
1. If the digital outputs from both U10 and U11 are in error, the fault can be in U7, U8, U9, or U10. To eliminate U8 and U9, ground test points TP1, TP2,
TP3, and TP4; then look at the address data bus during the negative-going PSEN output from U7 pin 9.
The signals on the bus should appear as distinct highs and lows. If, instead, the bus seems to be floating, there is probably a failure in U9.
2. If the bus appears normal, and there doesn’t seem to be anything wrong with U8 or U9 at this point, the problem could be in U7. To check U7, ground the four control input test points, TP1 through TP4, just as in step I above. With the test points grounded, the display should count from 00000000 through
99999999, showing decimal points with the even numbers. Following the count of 99999999, the display should blank momentarily, exhibit the fourcharacter group shown below for two to five seconds, again blank momentarily, then repeat the entire cycle from the zeros display through the fourcharacter group. The display should continue to cycle in this manner as long as test points TP1 through TP4 are-grounded. (Note that if the test points are not solidly grounded to the 8443A chassis, the cycle will stop on the four-character group.)
Digital outputs from U11 ports 4, 5, 6, and
7 missing or incorrect. Display is normal.
Digital outputs from U10 ports B and C missing or incorrect. Display is normal.
The presence of the four-character group shown above is a fairly good indication that U7 is performing most of its required functions, and that the problem is most likely in U10. If a character group other than the one shown above is displayed, microcomputer U7 is the most likely suspect. Note that the signals for this character group should also be available at the DIGI
TAL OUTPUT connector on the 8443A rear panel.
1. Failure of U 1.
1. Partial failure of U10.
Change 1 B-15
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
+6 Volts Switching Circuitr Troubleshooting (CHANGE 9)
Symptom
Zero dc at switch output test point TP4 with a steady +6 volts at input test point TP2.
Voltage at switch output test point TP4 is less than +5.5 volts with a steady +6 volts at input test point TP2.
Switch fails to open with a significant reduction of the input voltage level.
Probable Cause
1. Series switching transistor Q1 open.
2. Failure of control transistor Q2.
3. Failure of comparator U1A or U1B.
4. Zener diode VR1 open.
5. Capacitor C1 shorted.
6. Diode CR1 shorted.
1. Partial failure of series transistor Q1or control transistor Q2.
2. Partial failure of comparator U1A or U1B.
1. Zener diode VR1 shorted.
Change 1 B-16
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-38A. A1A1, Low Frequency Counter Board Assembly, Components (CHANGE 9)
Change 1 B-17
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-38B. A1A2, Counter Display Board Assembly, Components (CHANGE 9)
Figure 8-38C. A1A3, +6V Switched Board Assembly, Components (CHANGE 9)
Change 1 B-18
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
HP Part
Number
18443-60047
0160-3987
0160-3879
0160-3877
0160-3879
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-I518
1901-0518
1901-0743
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0047
1911-0519
1901-0047
1901-0539
1901-0539
1901-0039
1991-0039 a
1901-0539
1250-1194
1250-1194
9100-1616
9100-1616
9100-1630
9100-1623
9100-1616
9100-1616
0160-2327
0160-0376
1810-0197
0180-0376
0160-2938
0180-0197
0100-0376
0180-0197
0160-2327
0160-3079
0160-2327
0160-2327
0160-2327
0180-0197
0160-3879
0160-2204
0160-3879
0160-2327
0160-2327
0180-0376
0180-0197
0160-2930
0160-2930
0160-2327
0160-2327
0180-0197
0180-0376
0180-0197
0180-0116
0160-2930
0160-2930
0160-3877
9100-1616
9110-1611
9100-1611
9100-1611
9100-1L30
0443-20041
1954-0345
1854-0345
1954-0071
1853-0020
1854-0019
Reference
Designation
A6
A6CR14
A6CR15
A6J1
A6J2
A6LI
A6L2
A6L3
A6L4
A6L5
A6L6
A6L7
A6L8
A6L9
A6L10
A6L11
A6L12
A6C33
A6C34
AhC35
A6C36
A6CR1
A6CR2
A6CR3
A6CR4
A6CR5
A6CR6
A6CR7
A6CR8
A6CR9
A6CR10
A6CR11
A6CR12
A6CR13
A6MP1
A6Q1
A6Q2
A6Q3
A6Q4
A6Q5
A6C16
A6C17
A6CIB
A6C19
A6C20
A4C21
A6C22
A6C23
A6C24
A6C25
A6C26
A6C27
A6C29
A6C29
A6C30
A6C31
A6C32
A6C1
A6C2
A6C3
A6C4
A6C5
A6C6
A6C7
A6C8
A6C9
A6C10
A6C11
A6C12
A6C13
A6C14
A6C15
Table 6-3. 8443A/B Replaceable Parts (CHANGE 10)
3
8
8
3
8
8
1
8
8
8
8
8
8
5
7
7
7
7
8
9
9
9
9
7
7
8
3
0
7
8
7
8
8
7
8
8
8
8
5
8
5
8
5
9
9
5
1
9
5
8
8
8
9
8
8
9
8
8
5
8
7
8
8
4
3
9
4
7
4
4
C
D Qty
8 1
9
5
7
5
1
2
6
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
1
2
6
3
1
3
5
2
1
Description
HIGH FREQUENCY DECADE ASSEMBLY
(8443A ONLY)
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .47UF+-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 01UF +80-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF +-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .47UF +-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF +-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 6.8UF +-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .47UF+-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .47UF+-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +80-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .47UF+-10% 35VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 10VDC-CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 1000PF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 2.2UF+-10% 20VDC TA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-5% 300VDC MICA
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD 100PF +-20% 200VDC CER
CAPACITOR-FXD .01UF +-20% 100VDC CER
DIODE-SWITCHING 20V 75MA 10NS
DIODE-SWITCHING 20V 75MA 10NS
DIODE-SM SIG SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SM SIG SCHOTTKY
DIODE-PWR RECT 1N4004 400V 1A DO-41
DIODE-SWITCHING 20V 75MA 10NS
DIODE-SWITCHING 20V 75MA 10NS
DIODE-SWITCHING 20V 75MA 10NS
DIODE-SM SIG SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SWITCHING 20V 75MA 10NS
DIODE-SM SIG SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SM SIG SCHOTTKY
DIODE-SWITCHING 50V 300MA OHM
DIODE-SWITCHING 50V 300MA OHM
DIODE-SM SIG SCHOTTKY
CONNECTOR-RF SM-SLD M SGL-HOLE-FR 50-OHM
CONNECTOR-RF SM-SLD M SGL-HOLE-FR 50-OHM
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 1.5UH 10%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 1.5UH 10%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 51UH 5% .166DX.385LG
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 27UH 5% .166DX.385LG
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 1.5UH 10%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 1.5UH 10%
COIL-,05UH (P.C. BOARD TRACE)
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 1.5UH 10%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-NLD 220NH 20%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-NLD 220NH 20%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 220NH 20%
INDUCTOR RF-CH-MLD 51UH 5% .166DX.385LG
COVER-HF DECADE ASSEMBLY
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5179 SI TO-72 PD-200MW
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5179 SI TO-72 PD-200MW
TRANSISTOR NPN SI PD=300MW FT=200MHZ
TRANSISTOR PNP SI PD=300MW FT=150MHZ
TRANSISTOR NPN SI TO-1B PD=360MW
Mfr
Code Mfr Part Number
28480 08443-60047
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
29480
29480
29480
01295
28480
29480
29480
28490
28480
29490
29480
28480
28480
29490
29490
29480
29840
28480
29480
29480
29480
29480
51642
56289
56289
56289
28480
56289
56289
56289
51642
29400
51642
51642
51642
56299
28480
28490
29480
51642
51642
56289
56289
28480
28480
51642
51642
56299
56299
56289
56289
28490
28480
29480
28480
28480
28480
28490
28480
29480
04713
04713
29480
29480
28480
0160-3879
0160-3979
0160-3877
0160-3879
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0518
1901-1518
1N4004
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0047
1901-0518
1901-0047
1901-0539
1901-0539
1901-0039
1901-0039
1901-0539
1250-1194
1250-1194
9100-1616
9100-1616
9100-1630
9100-1623
9100-1616
9100-1616
150-110-x5R-102M
150-110-X5R-to2M
150D474X9035A2
150D225X9020A2
0160-2930
0160-2930
150-110-XSR-102H
150-110-X5R-102M
150D225X9020A2
150D474X9035A2
150D225X9120A2
150Db85X903592
0160-2930
0160-2930
0160-3877
150-110-XsR-102H
150D474X9035A2
150D225X902oA2
150D474X9035A2
0160-2930
150D225X9020A2
150D474X9035A2
150D225X9020A2
150-110-XSR-102M
0160-3879
150-110-XSR-tO2H
150-110-X5R-102M
150-110-XSR-102H
150D225X9020A2
0160-3979
0160-2204
0160-3879
9100-1616
9100-1611
9100-1611
9100-1611
9100-1630
08443-20041
2N5179
2N5179
1954-0071
1953-0020
1854-0019
Change 1 B-19
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
HP Part
Number
0698-7236
0698-7236
0757-0442
0698-0083
0698-7236
0698-7236
0698-7236
0698-7236
0698-7236
0757-0438
08443-00041
08443-00041
1250-1194
1251-0600
1251-0610
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1820-0820
18200802
1820-1383
1920-1052
1810-1204
1902-1291
1902-0048
1902-0048
08443-60056
1854-0019
1854-0019
0698-7229
0757-0395
0757-0442
0698-7229
0757-0395
0757-0442
0757-0438
0757-0438
0757-0438
0757-0438
0757-0441
0757-0440
0698-3151
0698-3151
069s-0083
0757-0405
0698-3434
0698-3444
0698-0083
0757-0279
1757-0405
0698-3434
0757-0416
0698-3429
0698-3447
0698-0803
0757-0395
0698-7236
Reference
Designation
A6R29
A6R30
A6R31
A6R32
A6R33
A6R34
A6R35
A6R36
A6R37
A6R38
A6TP1
A6TP2
A6TP3
A6TP4
A6TP5
AbTP6
A6TP7
A6TP8
A6U1
A6U2
A6U3
A6U4
AbU5
A6VR1
A6VR2
A6BR3
A6W1
A6R12
A6R13
A6R14
A6R15
A6R16
A6R17
A6R18
A6R19
A6R20
A6R21
A6R22*
A6R23
A6R24*
A6R25
A6R26
A6R27
A6R28
A6Q6
A6Q7
A6R1
A6R2
A6R3
A6R4
A6R5
A6R6
A6R7
A6R8
A6R9
A6R10
A6R11
Table 6-3. 8443A/B Replaceable Parts (CHANGE 10)
C
D Qty
0
0
7
0
0
7
3
6
6
7
7
7
7
9
8
7
7
8
1
5
6
1
5 o
3
1
9
4
8
1
7
7
2
4
9
1
8
4
9
0
7
8
7
7
3
3
3
7
9
3
8
1
3
1
9
3
8
5
2
2
1
1
8
2
5
1
3
3
3
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
Description
TRANSISTOR NPN SI TO-18 PD-360MW
TRANSISTOR NPN SI TO-18 PD-360MW
RESISTOR 511 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 56.2 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 511 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 56.2 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 7.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 7.5K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.87K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 2.87K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.96K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 162 I% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 34,8 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 316 1% .125W F TC-0*-00
RESISTOR 1.96K I% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 3.16K 1%.125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 162 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 34.8 1% .125W F TC-O*-10
RESISTOR 511 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 19.6 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 422 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.96K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 56.2 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 10K I% .t25W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1.96K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 1K 1% .05W F TC=0+-100
RESISTOR 5.11K 1% .125W F TC=0+-100
TEST POINT CONNECTOR
TEST POINT CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR-RF SM-SLD M SGL-HOLE-FR 50-OHM
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
CONNECTOR-SGL CONT PIN 1.14-MM-BSC-SZ SQ
IC FF ECL J-BAR K-BAR CON CLOCK DUAL
IC QUAD 2 INPUT NOR
IC CNTR ECL BCD POS-EDGE-TRIG
IC XLTR ECL ECL-TO-TTL QUAD 2-INP
NETWORK-RES 8-SIP1.0K OHM X 7
DIODE-ZNR 1N5338B 5.1V 5% PD=5W IR=1UA
DIODE-ZNR 6.81V 5% DO-35 PD=.4W
DIODE-ZNR 6.81V 5% DO-35 PD=.4W
CABLE ASSEMBLY-RF, TIME BASE INPUT
Mfr
Code Mfr Part Number
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
04713
04713
04713
04713
01121
04713
28480
28480
29480
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
03888
24546
24546
24546
24546
29480
28480
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
C3-1/8-T0-I001-C
C3-1/8-TO-1001-G
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-1961-F
C3-1/8-T0-1001-G
C3-1/8-TO-1001-G
C3-1/8-T0-l001-G
C3-1/8-TO-1001-C
C3-1/8-TO-1001-C
C4-1/B-TO-5111-F
08443-00041
08443-00041
1250-1194
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
1251-0600
MC10135L
MC10102P
MC10138L
MC10125L
20A102
1N53388
1902-0048
1902-0048
08443-60056
1854-0019
1854-0019
C3-1/8-T0-511R-G
C4-1/8-TO-56R2-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C3-1/8-TO-511R-G
C3-1/8-TO-56R2-F
C4-1/8-TO-1002-F
C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
C4-1/8-TO-5111-F
C4-1/8-TO-7501-F
C4-1/8-TO-7501-F
C4-1/8-TO-2971-F
C4-1/8-TO-2871-F
C4-1/8-TO-1961-F
C4-1/8-TO-162R-F
C4-1/8-TO-34R8-F
C4-1/8-TO-316R-F
C4-1/8-TO-1961-F
C4-1/8-TO-3161-F
C4-1/8-TD-162R-F
C4-1/8-TO-34RB-F
C4-1/8-TO-511R-F
PME55-1/8-TO-19R6-F
C4-1/8-TO-422R-F
C4-1/8-TO-1961-F
C4-1/8-TO-56R2-F
C3-1/-TO-1001-C
Change 1 B-20
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
P/O Figure 8-31. Counter Section Logic Diagram (High Frequency Decade Portion) (CHANGE 10)
Change 1 B-21
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
SERVICE SHEET 8 (CHANGE 10)
High Frequency Decade Assembly A6 supplies a fourline BCD representation of the Tracking Generator frequency to the Low Frequency Counter. It also furnishes an end-of-count signal to Time Base Assembly
A5. If the High Frequency Decade does not supply a correct BCD count to the Low Frequency Counter, the counter display shows an incorrect frequency. Test points on all four BCD outputs from the High Frequency
Decade enable you to check for their presence. There is also a test point for the end-of-count output. To troubleshoot the High Frequency Decade successfully, you must be familiar with its circuits and with digital troubleshooting techniques.
Decade
The High Frequency Decade Assembly uses timing signals from Time Base Assembly A5 and divide-by-ten counter to convert the RF supplied to the counter section into four-line BCD (1-2-4-8) and end-of-count outputs.
The BCD drives Low Frequency Counter Assembly A1, and the end-of-count output is fed to the timing circuits on A5.
When the High Frequency Decade is operating properly, and the Spectrum Analyzer and Tracking
Generator/Counter controls are set as shown below, the
BCD outputs to the Low Frequency Counter Assembly
should appear as shown in Figure SS8-1. Connect
oscilloscope channels A, B, C, and D to A6 assembly test points TP4, TP5, TP6, and TP7 respectively. Initial
Control Setting (for waveform SS8-1)
Spectrum Analyzer (setting of controls not listed is unimportant)
SCAN WIDTH PER DIVISION ....................... 10 MHz
SCAN WIDTH .....................................PER DIVISION
FREQUENCY ................................................ 10 MHZ
SCAN TIMER PER DIVISION......................... 1 msec
SCAN MODE ........................................................ INT
SCAN TRIGGER...............................................AUTO
Tracking Generator/Counter
MODE ....................................................SCAN HOLD
RESOLUTION................................................. 100 Hz
MARKER CONTROL knob .........................Pulled out
Oscilloscope
SYNC ........................................................ INTERNAL
TIME/DIV ........................................................ 2 msec
VOLTS/DIV ............................................................0.2
SLOPE ........................................................................
TRIGGER.............................................................ACF
Input Amplifier and Switching Matrix
Input RF amplifier Q1-Q2 provides flat amplification of signals with frequencies up to 120 MHz. Inductors L10 and L11 peak the gain at the high frequency end of the bandpass. Resistor R22 in the emitter circuit of Q2 is selected for a value that enables a nominal -18 dBm signal to toggle count-enable switch (NOR gate) U2A.
The value of R24 is selected to provide a dc level at pin 4 of U2A that is -1.30 volts with no signal input.
Diodes CR1 through CR4 and CR6 through CR10 make up a switching matrix for the input RF signal. When the front-panel MODE switch is set to MARKER or SCAN
HOLD, the switch inputs forward bias switching diodes
CR1, CR4, CR6, and CR9, while back biasing CR2,
CR3, CR7, CR8, and CR10. This allows the input RF signal to be coupled through C3, CR1, CR6, C17, and L9 to the base of RF amplifier transistor Q1. When the
MODE switch is set to EXTERNAL, the bias on the switching diodes is the exact opposite of what it is for the
MARKER and SCAN HOLD modes: diodes CR1, CR4,
CR6, and CR9 are now back biased, while CR2, CR3,
CR7, CR9, and CR10 are forward biased. Thus the internal RF signal is passed to Q1.
Input Amplifier and Switching Matrix Test Procedure
Connect a 1 MHz source at +10 dBm to the 8443A
COUNTER INPUT and set the 8443A MODE switch to
EXTERNAL. Connect the oscilloscope Channel A input to the base of Q1, the Channel B input to the base of Q2, and the Channel C input to pin 4 of U2. Set the oscilloscope VOLTS/DIV to .2 for each channel and the
TIME/DIV to 1 µsec. Trigger INT, ACF, and SLOPE +.
The displayed waveforms should be as shown in Figure
If the Channel A waveform is present, but the Channel B and Channel C waveforms are not, check transistor Q1 and its associated components. If waveforms A and B are present, but C is not, check transistor Q2 and its associated components. If all the waveforms are present, do the Gate Toggle Translator and Main Gate
Flip-Flop Test Procedure described on this Service
Sheet.
Gate Toggle Translator and Main Gate Flip-Flop
Main gate flip-flop U11 is clocked by the gate toggle input from Time Base Assembly A5. This input is a periodically interrupted series of square waves with a repetition rate (in a single series) of 1 kHz, 100 Hz, or 10
Hz, selectable with the front-panel RESOLUTION switch.
It Is developed in the A5 assembly decade counter, and is started and stopped by the A5 assembly time base flipflop.
Change 1 B-22
SERVICE SHEET 8 (CHANGE 10) (Cont’d)
In the MARKER and SCAN HOLD modes of operation, the time base flip-flop starts the gate toggle square waves shortly after (less than 250 microseconds) the spectrum analyzer scan ramp is stopped at the frequency point set with the MARKER POSITION control.
(The scan ramp is stopped by a signal fed to the spectrum analyzer from 8443A Marker Control Assembly
A7.) The end-of-count output from the High Frequency
Decade Assembly signals the end of the counting period.
It is used to clock the time base flip-flop in A5 into the opposite state and thus stop the gate toggle square waves.
Gate Toggle Translator. The gate toggles is fed to U1 through a gate toggle translator circuit. This circuit inverts the gate toggle input and translates it from a TTL level to the ECL level required by U1. The translator consists of a comparator circuit, Q6-Q7, and an emitter follower, Q5. In addition to translating the gate toggle level, the comparator is a temperature compensation device. For this purpose, the base of comparator transistor Q7 is driven by a temperature-compensating dc voltage (VBB) output from pin 1 of the output level translators IC, U4. This dc voltage is also the noninverting input to each output level translator. Any ambient temperature change that affects the input requirements of main gate flip-flop U1 and the output levels from divide-by-10 counter U3 also causes a corresponding change in the VBB level applied to the base of Q7 and the non-inverting inputs of the output level translators. The gate toggle translator then changes the translated gate toggle signal level to compensate for the temperature-induced change in the clock input requirement of U1. Simultaneously, the level change at the noninverting inputs of the output level translators compensates for temperature-induced changes in the output levels from U3.
Main Gate Flip-Flop. Flip-flop U1 is connected so that its output state reverses each time a positive-going gate toggle pulse transition is applied to its clock input, pin 9.
(Because the gate toggle input is inverted in translator
Q5-Q6, the positive-going transitions that clock U1 are the negative-going transitions at the gate toggle input to the A6 board assembly.) The frequency counting period starts when output pin 2 of U1 is clocked low. It ends when the next positive-going transition at U1 pin 9 clocks
U1 pin 2 high and U1 pin 3 low.
The duration of the counting period depends on the frequency of the gate toggle input, which in turn depends on the setting of the front-panel RESOLUTION switch. If the RESOLUTION switch is set to 1 kHz, the positivegoing transitions at the clock input to U1 are 1 millisecond apart; therefore, the counting period (the period when U1 pin 2 is low) has a duration of 1 millisecond. For a RESOLUTION selection of 100 Hz,
Change 1 B-23
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
the counting period is 10 milliseconds, and for 10 Hz it is
100 milliseconds.
The length of the interval between counting periods depends on the mode in which the 8443A is being operated. In the MARKER mode, the spectrum analyzer scan ramp is allowed to continue when the counting period is over, and a new counting period is initiated on the next ramp. In the SCAN HOLD mode, the scan ramp is not allowed to continue when the counting period ends; the preliminary operations to set up a new counting period start immediately. Thus, in the SCAN HOLD mode, the counting periods are continual, separated only by the transfer and reset periods. If the 8443A is being operated in the EXTERNAL mode, the counting periods are separated by the combined widths of the transfer and reset pulses, a 200-millisecond delay, and the very short period required to start a new gate toggle output from
Time Base Assembly A5.
Count Enable Switch. Count enable switch U2A is a
NOR gate which switches the RF input through to U3 pin
12 (G1) during the count period, and blocks it at all other times. The dc level at input pin 4 of U2A is fixed at -1.30
volts; the other input, pin 5, follows the pin 2 output of main gate flip-flop U1. The enabling condition for U2A is both inputs low (in this regard, it functions as a negativelogic NAND gate). Thus, when U1 pin 2 is high, U2A blocks the RF input. When pin 2 of U1 is clocked low,
U2A passes the RF to U3 where it toggles the G1 (pin
12) input at the RF rate.
End-of-Count Translator. Transistors Q3 and Q4, and their associated components make up the end-of-count translator circuit. The end-of-count signal is the low output from U1 pin 3, which occurs when U1 pin 2 is clocked high to end the counting period. The purpose of this circuit is to translate the ECL level of the U1 output into the TTL level required to drive the associated circuitry on Time Base Assembly A5.
Gate Toggle Translator and Main Gate Flip-Flop Test
Procedure Set the 8443A MODE switch to MARKER and the RESOLUTION switch to 100 Hz. Set the spectrum analyzer SCAN TIME PER DIVISION to 1
MILLISECOND. Synchronize the oscilloscope to the spectrum analyzer scan, triggered on + slope, ACF. The waveforms you should obtain under these conditions at five points in the gate toggle signal path are shown in
Figure SS8-3. Set the oscilloscope VOLTS/DIV as indicated in the illustration for each waveform.
NOTE
These tests are valid only if Time
Base Assembly A5 is operating properly.
SERVICE SHEET 8 (CHANGE 10) (Cont’d)
If you obtain waveforms 1 and 2 (Q6 base, QS5emitter), but are unable to obtain waveforms 3, 4, and 5 (U1 pin 2,
U1 pin 3, and TP2), U1 is probably defective.
If you obtain waveform 1, but cannot get waveform 2, check transistors Q5 and Q6, and the components associated with them.
If you obtain the first four waveforms, but get an abnormal indication for the fifth (at TP2), transistor Q3 or
Q4 or an associated component is probably defective.
If the gate toggle input (waveform 1) is missing, try grounding test point TP2 on Time Base Assembly A5.
Grounding A5TP2, in effect, provides a continuous count trigger. It should produce a square wave gate toggle input with a repetition rate that is much higher than the normal gate toggle, but which can be used to check the gate toggle signal path circuitry. You should note, however, that if grounding A5TP2 is necessary to produce a signal at the gate toggle input to the High
Frequency Decade Assembly, there is very likely a problem with the count trigger output of Marker Control
Assembly A7.
Divide-By-10 Counter and Output Level Translators
Reset Input and Reset Translator. The reset input to the High Frequency Decade Assembly resets divide-by-
10 counter U3 to zero before each counting period. It is a positive-going pulse approximately 50 microseconds wide. Its leading edge starts less than 200 microseconds after the scan ramp in the spectrum analyzer is stopped, coincidently with the negative-going count trigger supplied by Marker Control Assembly A7 to
Time Base Assembly A5.
In the resistive voltage divider network of R38, R11, and
R12, the reset pulse is translated from the TTL level at which is received to the ECL level required by the counter. About one microsecond after the end of the reset pulse, the decade counters in Time Base Assembly
A5 start generating the gate toggle square waves that clock main gate flip-flop U1. (See Gate Toggle
Translator and Main Gate Flip-Flop circuit description on this Service Sheet.) When the dc level at pin 2 of NOR gate U2A is clocked high to start the counting period, the
RF passed through U2A starts toggling the clock 1 (GI) input (pin 12) to divide-by-10 counter U3.
Divide-By-10 Counter. Divide-by-10 counter U3 divides the RF input to provide the four-line BCD (1-2-4-8) required to drive the Low Frequency Counter. Because of the way the counter is connected, the BCD 8 output from U3 pin 2 is one-tenth the input RF rate. At the end of every 10th RF input cycle to pin 12, the count starts over again at 1. At the end of the counting period, the
RF input stops and the counter outputs remain as they zero.
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
were at the last count. Before a new counting period starts, however, the reset input returns all four outputs to
Output Level Translators. The outputs from the divideby-10 counter are positive logic at ECL levels, while the requirements of the Low Frequency Counter are for negative logic at TTL levels. Therefore, the output level translators (U4A-D) have two primary functions: first, to invert the divide-by-10 counter outputs to convert them to negative logic, and second, to shift the outputs to TTL levels to make them conform to the Low Frequency
Counter requirements.
The output level translators integrated circuit (IC) package, U4, contains a temperature-compensating dc reference supply (VBB), which maintains the IC outputs at a constant level. This supply responds to environmental temperature changes by altering the dc reference level sufficiently to cancel any level shifts that would otherwise be incurred in the IC circuitry as a result of the temperature variations.
The temperature-compensating dc reference (VBB) is available at pin 1 of U4. It is connected to the noninverting inputs of the level translators to compensate for temperature-induced variations in the counter output levels. It also drives comparator transistor Q7 in the gate toggle translator. In this instance, changes in the VBB level cause comparator Q6-Q7 to shift the gate toggle level in accordance with temperature-induced changes in the U1clock input level requirement.
Divide-By-10 Counter and Output Level Translators
Test Procedure Check for the reset pulses with the oscilloscope at Motherboard socket XA6 pin 9, or at the junction of C15 and R38. The reset pulses should be positive-going, three to four volts in amplitude.
Set the 8443A controls for operation in the MARKER mode at 100 Hz RESOLUTION. Set the spectrum analyzer SCAN TIME PER DIVISION to 1 msec.
Connect the oscilloscope channel A, B, C, and D inputs to output test points 4, 5, 6, and 7 respectively on the
High Frequency Decade Assembly. Set the oscilloscope
TIME/DIV to 5 msec and the VOLTS/DIV to .5 for all four channels. The oscilloscope display should appear as shown in Figure SS8-4.
If the oscilloscope display shows a malfunction, and the input RF amplifier (Q1-Q2) circuits and main gate flipflop (U1) are functioning normally, the problem is in NOR gate U2A, counter U3, or in the output level translators
IC, U4. If only one output is missing, the problem is most likely a defective output level translator in U4. If all the outputs are missing, either U2 or U3 could be at fault.
Change 1 B-24
Figure SS8-1. Output Waveforms, SCAN HOLD Mode (CHANGE 10)
Figure SS8-2. RF Amplifier Waveforms (CHANGE 10)
Change 1 B-25
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure SS8-3. Gate Toggle, Count Enable, and End-of-Count Waveforms (CHANGE 10)
Figure SS84. Output Waveforms, MARKER Mode (CHANGE 10)
Change 1 B-26
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Figure 8-36. A6, High Frequency Decade Assembly, Cover and Components (CHANGE 10)
Change 1 B-27
Reference
Designation
A15
A1SC1
A15C2
A15C3
A15C4
A15C5
A15C6
A1SCR1
A15CR2
A15CR3
A15CR4
A15CR5
A15CR6
A15CR7
A1SF1
A15F2
A15F3
A15F4
A15Q1
A1SR1
A15R2
A15R3
A15XF1
A15XF2
A15XF3
A15XF4
HP Part
Number
0844360118
0170-0040
0170-0040
0160-3453
0160-3453
0160-3453
0160-3453
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0200
1901-0743
1901-0743
1902-3002
2110-0001
2110-0001
2110-0002
2110-0001
1853-0007
0812-0012
0698-0084
0757-0833
2110-0269
2110-0269
2110-0269
2110-0269
Table 6-3. Replaceable Parts (CHANGE 12)
C
D Qty
1
8
9
3
8
5
5
5
5
1
9
3
4
9
3
3
3
7
9
8
7
2
0
0
0
0
Description
1
2
4
4
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
8
BOARD ASSY: RECTIFIER
C:FXD MY 0.047 UF 10% 200VDCW
C:FXD MY 0.047 UF 10% 200VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
C:FXD CER 0.05 UF +80-20% 100VDCW
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 100 PIV 3A
DIODE:SILICON 1A 400 PIV
DIODE:SILICON 1A 400 PIV
DIODE:ZENER 2.3V 5%
FUSE:1 AMP 250V FB
FUSE:1 AMP 250V FB
FUSE:2 AMP 250V FB
FUSE:1 AMP 250V FB
TSTR:SI PNP 2N3251
R:FXD WW 18 OHM 5% 3W
R:FXD MET FLM 2.15K OHM 1% .120W
R:FXD MET FLM 5.11K OHM 1% .05W
CLIP:FUSE 0.250 IN DIA
CLIP:FUSE 0.250 IN DIA
CLIP:FUSE 0.250 IN DIA
CLIP:FUSE 0.250 IN DIA
Change 1 B-28
TM 11-6625-2858-14 & P
Mfr
Code Mfr Part Number
28480
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
02735
02735
02735
02735
28480
28480
28480
75915
75915
75915
75915
28480
28480
28480
28480
91506
91506
91506
91506
08443-60118
192P47392-PTS
192P47392-PTS
C023A101L503ZS25-CD4
C023A101L503Z525-CD4
C023A101L503ZS25-CD4
C023A101L503ZS25-CD4
IN4998
IN4998
IN4998
IN4998
1901-0743
1901-0743
1902-3002
312001.
312001.
312.002
312001.
1853-0007
0812-012
0698-0084
0757-0833
6008-32CN
6008-32CN
6008-32CN
6008-32CN
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
ROBERT M. JOYCE
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with special mailing list.
E. C. MEYER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
PIN: 049671-000
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project